JP2020081468A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of exhibiting the performance assumed by a game machine manufacturer for a long time by stably circulating a game medium in an intended flow.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 having a game board 5 in which multiple obstacle nails N are placed in a game area in which a game is played includes a center right front plate 2555 in the form of a transparent flat plate that is provided with a first accommodating portion 2555a and a second accommodating portion 2555b that can accommodate the front ends of the multiple obstacle nails N constituting a specific obstacle nail group 2700 in a state where a gap is provided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 149

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”).

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a game board in which a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a game area where a game is played. As this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed one provided with a protection member capable of making it difficult to bend an obstacle nail provided directly above a winning opening for giving a privilege by receiving a game medium (for example, a patent Reference 1). According to the technique of Patent Document 1, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail directly above the winning opening from being bent easily, thereby suppressing a change in the probability of accepting the game medium into the winning opening.

However, in the technique of Patent Document 1, since the protection member protects the front end (head) of the obstacle nail from bending only in a predetermined direction, the obstacle nail is protected by the protection member. You can turn in the direction that is not done. Therefore, for some reason, the obstacle nail may be bent in a direction not protected by the protective member. Further, in the conventional technique as disclosed in Patent Document 1, since only the obstacle nail provided directly above the winning opening is protected by the protective member, a plurality of trees that are planted upstream of the winning opening are provided. Obstacle nails tend to bend due to impacts such as contact with game media. Therefore, if the obstacle nail upstream of the winning opening bends, the flow of the game medium that should go to the winning opening changes with a certain probability, and it is difficult to achieve the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine for a long time. there were.

JP, 2018-140155, A

Therefore, in view of the above situation, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of exhibiting the performance assumed by the gaming machine manufacturer for a long time by stably circulating the gaming medium in an intended flow. It is a thing.

Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A game machine having a game board in which a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a game area in which a game is played,
A transparent flat plate-shaped holding plate provided with a plurality of accommodating portions capable of accommodating the front end of the obstacle nail with a gap,
It is equipped with.

Here, the "accommodating portion" is "a hole penetrating the holding plate", "a groove-shaped member recessed from the rear surface of the holding plate", or a weir-shaped member protruding from the rear surface of the holding plate. Stuff”, and the like. Further, as the "accommodating portion", one accommodation portion may accommodate the front ends of a plurality of obstacle nails, or one accommodation portion may accommodate only the front ends of one obstacle nail. It may be.

Also, as a "holding plate", it is provided on a front unit (for example, a center accessory, an attacker unit, a starting opening unit, a gate member, etc.) attached to the front of a game panel provided with a game area in the front. It may be provided, or may be directly attached to the front surface of a game panel provided with a game area in the front. Further, the "holding plate" may have a function of a light guide plate capable of reflecting the light incident from the side surface to the front and emitting and displaying a predetermined pattern, as in the frame of the center accessory. It may have a function of a protective plate that prevents the game medium from entering a predetermined area.

Further, the gap between the front end of the obstacle nail in the accommodating portion is preferably in the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, and more preferably in the range of 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. If the gap is smaller than this range, when the holding plate expands or contracts due to environmental changes, it may affect the obstacle nail depending on the size of the holding plate and bend the obstacle nail, and it is stored when assembled on the game board. This is because it is difficult to store the front end of the obstacle nail in the portion and it takes time and labor, which may increase the cost. Also, if the gap is larger than this range, the degree of bending when the obstacle nail bends due to the impact due to contact with the game medium or the like exceeds the allowable range, and it may be difficult to circulate the game medium in the intended flow. Because there is.

By connecting and fixing the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails by the holding plate, it is possible to make the obstacle nails difficult to bend in any direction. However, if the front ends of a plurality of obstacle nails are connected and fixed to each other, it is necessary to fit the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails to the holding plate, which increases the cost of the gaming machine due to the troublesome assembly. There is. Further, if the front ends of a plurality of obstacle nails are fixed, when the holding plate expands and contracts due to changes in the environment, the resistance of the plurality of obstacle nails may damage the holding plate, or the plurality of obstacle nails may bend. ..

According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is provided with a gaming board in which a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the game area where the game is played, and the front end of the obstacle nails has a gap. In the embodiment for carrying out the invention, [5-8e from paragraph [1240] is provided. -4. Space forming section], [5-8g. Specific obstacle nail group] chapter from paragraph [1282], and FIGS.

As a result, since the holding plate having the plurality of housing portions capable of housing the front ends (heads) of the plurality of obstacle nails is provided, the contact with the game medium, the contact with the tool or the like during maintenance, etc. Even if an impact is applied to the obstacle nail, the front end of the obstacle nail comes into contact with the peripheral wall of the accommodating portion, so that further movement of the obstacle nail can be prevented and the obstacle nails cannot be easily bent. It is possible to keep the flow of the game medium by the nail in the intended initial state (at the time of shipping). Therefore, since the plurality of storage portions of the holding plate can stably maintain the flow of the game medium by the plurality of obstacle nails, the game medium can be stably circulated in the intended flow, and The intended effect of the flow can be surely exerted, and the performance assumed by the gaming machine manufacturer can be exerted for a long time. Further, as described above, since the game medium can be circulated in a stable and intended flow, the game medium can be directed to the downstream winning port with a predetermined predetermined probability, and the intended flow of the game medium can be achieved. This makes it possible to entertain the movement of the game medium and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the plurality of holding portions of the holding plate, since there is a gap between the front end of the obstacle nail housed in each of the holding plate, the holding plate expands and contracts due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. Also, due to the gap, it is possible to absorb the change in the positions of the accommodation portion and the obstacle nail due to expansion and contraction. Therefore, even if the holding plate expands and contracts, it is possible to avoid bending of the plurality of obstacle nails, damage of the holding plate due to resistance from the plurality of obstacle nails, and the like, and to ensure the above-described operational effects. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be played on.

Further, as described above, due to the gap between the front end of the obstacle nail and the accommodating portion, even if the holding plate expands and contracts, the plurality of obstacle nails can be maintained in the original state without bending, so that the holding By enlarging the plate, even if the change in the distance from one end to the other end becomes large due to expansion and contraction, the above-described action and effect can be achieved, and thus the holding plate can be enlarged. It is possible to make it difficult for a plurality of obstacle nails (for example, a specific obstacle nail group) implanted in a wide range in the game area to bend. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a plurality of obstacle nails provided upstream of the winning opening to bend, so that these obstacle nails can direct the game medium to the downstream winning opening with an intended predetermined probability. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game medium due to the flow of the game medium described above and suppress a decrease in interest, and to stably maintain the flow of the game medium due to a plurality of obstacle nails, which is assumed by the manufacturer of the game machine. The performance that has been achieved can be exhibited for a long time. As this large holding plate, for example, one whose height is in the range of 1/3 to 3/3 of the height of the game area and whose left and right widths are in the range of 1/10 to 10/10 of the width of the game area Can be mentioned.

Further, in the plurality of holding portions of the holding plate, there is a gap between the front ends of the obstacle nails, so when assembling into the game board, the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails that have been planted are stored in a corresponding manner. It is possible to make it easy to insert into a part, and by assembling it easily, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost for the gaming machine.

In addition, in the case where the housing portion of the holding plate penetrates back and forth, a sheet (seal) for closing the housing portion may be attached to the front surface of the holding plate. As a result, since the front side of the accommodating portion is closed by the sheet attached to the front surface of the holding plate, the obstacle nail whose front end is accommodated in the accommodating portion cannot be touched from the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail from being bent by the contact of a tool or the like at the time of maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail being intentionally bent. Further, in this case, when the obstruction nail whose front end is accommodated in the accommodating portion is bent through the sheet, a trace of the obstruction nail remains on the sheet, so that the defect of the obstruction nail can be easily noticed.

In addition, it is desirable to provide a plurality of housings over the entire area of the holding plate. Thereby, since the plurality of housing portions are provided over the entire area of the holding plate, the plurality of obstacle nails that are planted in a wide range among the plurality of obstacle nails that are planted in the game area. Since the front end of can be accommodated by a plurality of accommodating portions provided on one holding plate, it is possible to make it difficult for a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in a wide range in the game area to bend. Therefore, for example, by using a holding plate having a size that covers a plurality of obstacle nails (for example, a specific obstacle nail group) provided upstream of the winning opening, Since the storage unit can make it difficult for the obstacle nails to be bent, the obstacles can cause the game medium to be directed to the downstream winning port with a predetermined probability, and the game can be performed by the intended flow of the game medium. It is possible to entertain the movement of the medium and suppress a decline in interest, and to stably maintain the flow of the game medium due to a plurality of obstacle nails, and to exhibit the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine for a long time. You can

Further, the plurality of storage portions can store the front ends of the respective obstacle nails of the specific obstacle nail group including the plurality of obstacle nails that are implanted so that the game medium can be guided along the predetermined guide area with a predetermined probability. May be set. Thereby, since the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails forming the specific obstacle nail group are accommodated in the accommodation portion of the holding plate, the respective obstacle nails of the specific obstacle nail group are accommodated by the plurality of accommodation portions. Since it is possible to make it difficult to bend, it becomes possible to continue to guide the game medium with a predetermined probability by the specific obstacle nail group, and it is possible to surely exhibit the intended effect of the specific obstacle nail group. , Amusement machine manufacturer that can entertain the movement of the game medium due to the intended flow of the game medium and suppress a decrease in interest, and can stably maintain the flow of the game medium due to the specific obstacle nail group. The performance envisioned by can be exhibited for a long time.

Further, for example, it is possible to delay the distribution of the game medium by the above-mentioned specific obstacle nail group, and to provide a variable winning opening that opens and closes so that the game medium can be received downstream of the specific obstacle nail group according to the progress of the game. May be. As a result, when the game medium is guided by the specific obstacle nail group, it is possible to delay and reach the variable winning opening provided in the downstream as compared with a plurality of normal nail obstacles. It is possible to make the timing of driving the game medium aiming at the variable winning opening difficult, and to give a desired degree of difficulty to the operation of driving the game medium. At this time, as the obstacle nails of the specific obstacle nail group are made difficult to bend by the holding plate as described above, it is possible to continue guiding the game medium with a predetermined probability by the specific obstacle nail group and ensure the driving operation. The difficulty level can be set to a desired level, and the difficulty level of the driving operation, which is the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine, can be maintained for a long time. From this, it is possible to motivate the player to drive the game, to entertain the game medium, and to receive the game medium in the variable winning a prize to achieve a sense of accomplishment. Can be given, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed. Further, in this case, as described above, since it is possible to give a degree of difficulty to the driving operation by the specific obstacle nail group, it is possible to make it difficult to receive the game medium into the variable winning a prize port, and to the variable winning a prize port. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the gaming machine is installed by suppressing the opportunity of paying out by receiving the game medium.

Further, the storage portion is configured by a first storage portion capable of storing the front ends of a plurality of obstacle nails, and a second storage portion capable of storing the front ends of one obstacle nail. Then, the first accommodating portion may be provided centered on a position different from the center of the accommodated obstacle nail. Thereby, the front ends of a plurality of obstacle nails (for example, braid nail portions) that are planted close to each other are accommodated in one first accommodating portion, and a plurality of nails that are planted close to each other are arranged. Since it is difficult to bend the obstacle nails in the directions approaching each other, by enclosing the parts in the direction not approaching each other as a set with the first accommodating portion, the obstacle nails can be moved in any direction. Can also be difficult to bend. On the other hand, since the front end of one obstacle nail that is planted alone is accommodated in the second accommodating portion, it is possible to make the obstacle nail difficult to bend by the second accommodating portion. From this, a plurality of obstacle nails that are planted in a predetermined gauge array in the game area can be accommodated in the first accommodating portion and the second accommodating portion of the holding plate, so that the game area is wide. A holding plate capable of making a plurality of obstacle nails planted in the range hard to bend can be surely embodied, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the above-described effects.

Further, the holding plate may be provided with a plurality of protrusions that project rearward and can contact the game medium. As a result, since the game medium comes into contact with the protrusion of the holding plate, the circulation speed of the game medium can be suppressed, and the circulation direction of the game medium can be changed. Can be shown to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, in this case, unlike the obstacle nail, the protrusion of the holding plate does not bend, so that the flow of the game medium by the plurality of protrusions can be stably maintained, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine can be prolonged. Can be demonstrated.

Further, when the protrusion is provided on the holding plate as described above, as described above, the protrusion of the holding plate has a function similar to an obstacle nail that suppresses the circulation speed of the game medium or changes the circulation direction. The holding plate is provided in the vicinity of the front end of the game area because the front end of the obstacle nail is stored in the storage portion of the holding plate. It is possible to extend to a site that is difficult to implant and to provide a protrusion at that site. As a result, by providing a protrusion instead of the obstacle nail in a portion where the conventional nail cannot be implanted in the conventional game machine, the game medium can be moved in the same manner as the obstacle nail, and thus a wider range. With this, it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game medium, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, a plurality of sets of nails are set in a plurality of storage portions, and the front ends of the plurality of sets of nail portions, in which the sets are provided at intervals such that the game medium can pass through, can be stored. Is also good. As a result, a plurality of obstacle nails are used as a set of nail nail portions, and a gap through which the game medium can pass is provided between the plurality of nail nail portions. Therefore, in one obstacle nail of the nail nail portions, In the direction in which the remaining obstacle nails are adjacent to each other, a gap through which the game medium can pass is not formed. Therefore, the remaining obstacle nails are only responsible for forming a gap in a direction in which they are not adjacent. In other words, in the braided nail portion, in one obstacle nail, the direction in charge of forming a gap through which the game medium can pass can be a partial direction. Therefore, even if one obstacle nail of the braided portion is bent, the number of the affected gaps is small compared to the number of the gaps formed with the braided nail portion that is paired with the braided nail portion. It is possible to suppress a great change in the flow of the game medium, and it is possible to facilitate the circulation of the game medium in a stable state in a desired and intended flow path. Then, since the front end of the braided nail portion having the above-described characteristics is accommodated in the accommodating portion of the holding plate, it is possible to make it difficult for the obstruction nails constituting the braided nail portion to bend, so that the game The medium can be surely circulated in the intended flow path, a game machine having the above-described operational effects can be surely provided, and the flow of the game medium by the plurality of obstacle nails can be stably maintained. Therefore, the performance assumed by the game machine manufacturer can be exhibited for a long time.

Further, as described above, when providing a gap through which the game medium can pass between the plurality of braided portions, since the flow path of the game medium is constituted by the plurality of braided portions, The number of obstacle nails implanted can be relatively increased, and more obstacle nails can be brought into contact with the game medium. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of contact with the obstacle nail, it is possible to further suppress the circulation speed of the game medium or change the circulation direction of the game medium to various directions. It is possible to make the movement more entertaining, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, the specific obstacle nail group may be configured by at least a plurality of combined nail portions. Thereby, while configuring the specific obstacle nail group by the braid nail portion having the characteristics as described above, the front end of each of the plurality of braid nail portions and the obstacle nails configuring the specific obstacle nail group, Since it is hard to bend each obstacle nail by accommodating it by the accommodating portion of the holding plate, it becomes possible to continue guiding the game medium with a predetermined probability by the specific obstacle nail group, and the intended effect of the specific obstacle nail group can be obtained. It can be surely exerted, the movement of the game medium due to the intended flow of the game medium can be enjoyed to suppress the decline in interest, and the flow of the game medium due to the specific obstacle nail group can be stably maintained. Therefore, the performance assumed by the gaming machine manufacturer can be exhibited for a long time.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
“A plurality of the accommodation units,
It is provided over the entire area of the holding plate”.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the plurality of accommodating portions are provided over the entire area of the holding plate (refer to the description of the center right front plate 2555 in [Description of Embodiments]).

Thereby, since the plurality of housing portions are provided over the entire area of the holding plate, the plurality of obstacle nails that are planted in a wide range among the plurality of obstacle nails that are planted in the game area. Since the front end of can be accommodated by a plurality of accommodating portions provided on one holding plate, it is possible to make it difficult for a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in a wide range in the game area to bend. Therefore, for example, by using a holding plate having a size that covers a plurality of obstacle nails (for example, a specific obstacle nail group) provided upstream of the winning opening, Since the storage unit can make it difficult for the obstacle nails to be bent, the obstacles can cause the game medium to be directed to the downstream winning port with a predetermined probability, and the game can be performed by the intended flow of the game medium. It is possible to entertain the movement of the medium and suppress a decline in interest, and to stably maintain the flow of the game medium due to a plurality of obstacle nails, and to exhibit the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine for a long time. You can

Means 3: In the constitution of Means 1 or Means 2,
“A plurality of the accommodation units,
It is possible to accommodate the front end of each of the obstacle nails of the specific obstacle nail group consisting of the plurality of obstacle nails that are implanted so as to be able to guide the game medium along the prescribed guide area with a prescribed probability". Characterize that.

Here, examples of the "specific obstacle nail group" include "things that can be delayed by suppressing the circulation speed of the game medium to guide them", "things that can guide the game medium in a meandering manner", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 3, each of the obstacle nails of the specific obstacle nail group including a plurality of obstacle nails, which are implanted by the plurality of accommodating portions so as to be able to guide the game medium along the predetermined guide area with a predetermined probability. The front end of the right front plate 2555 and the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are referred to in [Mode for carrying out the invention].

Thereby, since the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails forming the specific obstacle nail group are accommodated in the accommodation portion of the holding plate, the respective obstacle nails of the specific obstacle nail group are accommodated by the plurality of accommodation portions. Since it is possible to make it difficult to bend, it becomes possible to continue to guide the game medium with a predetermined probability by the specific obstacle nail group, and it is possible to surely exhibit the intended effect of the specific obstacle nail group. , Amusement machine manufacturer that can entertain the movement of the game medium due to the intended flow of the game medium and suppress a decrease in interest, and can stably maintain the flow of the game medium due to the specific obstacle nail group. The performance envisioned by can be exhibited for a long time.

Further, for example, the distribution of the game medium can be delayed by the specific obstacle nail group, and a variable winning opening for opening and closing the game medium can be provided downstream of the specific obstacle nail group according to the progress of the game. good. As a result, when the game medium is guided by the specific obstacle nail group, it is possible to delay and reach the variable winning opening provided in the downstream as compared with a plurality of normal nail obstacles. It is possible to make the timing of driving the game medium aiming at the variable winning opening difficult, and to give a desired degree of difficulty to the operation of driving the game medium. At this time, as the obstacle nails of the specific obstacle nail group are made difficult to bend by the holding plate as described above, it is possible to continue guiding the game medium with a predetermined probability by the specific obstacle nail group and ensure the driving operation. The difficulty level can be set to a desired level, and the difficulty level of the driving operation, which is the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine, can be maintained for a long time. From this, it is possible to motivate the player to drive the game, to entertain the game medium, and to receive the game medium in the variable winning a prize to achieve a sense of accomplishment. Can be given, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed. Further, as described above, since it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation by the specific obstacle nail group, it is possible to make it difficult to receive the game medium into the variable winning port, and the game medium to the variable winning port. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side in which the gaming machine is installed by suppressing the opportunity of paying out by accepting.

Means 4: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 3,
"The storage section
A first accommodating portion capable of accommodating the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails,
It is composed of a second accommodating portion capable of accommodating the front end of each one of the obstacle nails,
The first storage unit,
It is provided centering on a position different from the center of the housed nail.”

According to the configuration of the means 4, the accommodating portion includes the first accommodating portion capable of accommodating the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails, and the second accommodating portion capable of accommodating the front ends of the obstacle nails. In addition to the above, the first housing portion is provided with a center different from the center of the housed obstacle nail (in the embodiment for carrying out the invention, the center right front plate). 2555).

Thereby, the front ends of a plurality of obstacle nails (for example, braid nail portions) that are planted close to each other are accommodated in one first accommodating portion, and a plurality of nails that are planted close to each other are arranged. Since it is difficult to bend the obstacle nails in the directions approaching each other, by enclosing the parts in the direction not approaching each other as a set with the first accommodating portion, the obstacle nails can be moved in any direction. Can also be difficult to bend. On the other hand, since the front end of one obstacle nail that is planted alone is accommodated in the second accommodating portion, it is possible to make the obstacle nail difficult to bend by the second accommodating portion. From this, a plurality of obstacle nails that are planted in a predetermined gauge array in the game area can be accommodated in the first accommodating portion and the second accommodating portion of the holding plate, so that the game area is wide. A holding plate capable of making a plurality of obstacle nails planted in the range hard to bend can be surely embodied, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the above-described effects.

Means 5: In any one of the means 1 to 4,
"The holding plate is
There is further provided a plurality of projections that project rearward and can come into contact with the game medium."

Here, the "projections" include "projections that project along the rear surface of the holding plate by a predetermined length", "projections that are semi-spherical protruding from the rear surface of the holding plate", and "holding plate". "Projecting in a columnar shape from the rear surface", "projecting in a flat plate shape from the rear surface of the holding plate", and the like.

According to the structure of the means 5, the holding plate is provided with a plurality of projections that can project rearward and come into contact with the game medium (in the embodiment for carrying out the invention, the center right front plate). 2555).

As a result, since the game medium comes into contact with the protrusion of the holding plate, the circulation speed of the game medium can be suppressed, and the circulation direction of the game medium can be changed. Can be shown to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. Also, unlike the nails, the protrusions of the holding plate do not bend, so the flow of the game medium by the multiple protrusions can be maintained stably, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine can be exhibited for a long time. You can

Further, as described above, the protrusion of the holding plate can perform a function similar to an obstacle nail such as suppressing the flow speed of the game medium or changing the flowing direction, and the holding plate housing portion. Since the holding plate is provided near the front end of the game area because the front end of the obstacle nail is accommodated in the holding area, the holding plate is extended to a portion in the game area where the obstacle nail is hard to be planted, It is possible to provide a protrusion on the. As a result, by providing a protrusion instead of the obstacle nail in a portion where the conventional nail cannot be implanted in the conventional game machine, the game medium can be moved in the same manner as the obstacle nail, and thus a wider range. With this, it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game medium, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
“A plurality of the accommodation units,
It is possible to accommodate the front end of each of the plurality of nail portions in which the plurality of obstacle nails are provided as one group at intervals allowing the game medium to pass therethrough”.

Here, as the "braided nail portion" formed by a plurality of obstacle nails, "one arranged in a row", "one arranged in a triangle", "one arranged in a quadrangle", and "arranged in a pentagon" "What is arranged", "what is arranged in a hexagon", and the like.

By the way, the braided nail portion is composed of only one obstacle nail. In other words, if a gap (gap) through which a game medium can pass is set between adjacent obstacle nails in each of a plurality of obstacle nails, the game is performed for a certain obstacle nail. Other obstacle nails that form a pair to form a gap through which the medium can pass become obstacle nails in all directions forming a gap around the obstacle nail. That is, one obstacle nail takes charge of formation of the crevice in all directions. As a result, for example, when a certain obstacle nail bends in a predetermined direction, the gap between the obstacle nail and a pair of obstacle nails on the predetermined direction side becomes narrow, and thus it becomes difficult for the game medium to pass through. On the other hand, on the side opposite to the predetermined direction of the obstacle nail, the distance between the obstacle nail and a pair of obstacle nails becomes wide, so that the game medium can easily pass through. From this, when the obstacle nail bends, the gap widens in one direction and narrows in the opposite direction, so that the deformation (bending) of one obstacle nail greatly changes the flow of the game medium. However, it becomes difficult to circulate the game medium in a desired and intended flow path in a stable state.

According to the structure of the means 6, a plurality of obstacle nails can be accommodated in a plurality of accommodating portions, and the front ends of the plurality of nail nail portions can be accommodated at intervals such that the game medium can pass therethrough. ([Description of Embodiments] describes the center right front plate 2555 and the specific obstacle nail group 2700).

As a result, a plurality of obstacle nails are used as a set of nail nail portions, and a gap through which the game medium can pass is provided between the plurality of nail nail portions. Therefore, in one obstacle nail of the nail nail portions, In the direction in which the remaining obstacle nails are adjacent to each other, a gap through which the game medium can pass is not formed. Therefore, the remaining obstacle nails are only responsible for forming a gap in a direction in which they are not adjacent. In other words, in the braided nail portion, in one obstacle nail, the direction in charge of forming a gap through which the game medium can pass can be a partial direction. Therefore, even if one obstacle nail of the braided portion is bent, the number of the affected gaps is small compared to the number of the gaps formed with the braided nail portion that is paired with the braided nail portion. It is possible to suppress a great change in the flow of the game medium, and it is possible to facilitate the circulation of the game medium in a stable state in a desired and intended flow path. Then, since the front end of the braided nail portion having the above-described characteristics is accommodated in the accommodating portion of the holding plate, it is possible to make it difficult for the obstruction nails constituting the braided nail portion to bend, so that the game The medium can be surely circulated in the intended flow path, a game machine having the above-described operational effects can be surely provided, and the flow of the game medium by the plurality of obstacle nails can be stably maintained. Therefore, the performance assumed by the game machine manufacturer can be exhibited for a long time.

In addition, since the flow path of the game medium is configured by a plurality of braided nail portions, the number of nails that have been planted can be relatively increased, and more obstacle nails can be played with the game medium. Can be brought into contact. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of contact with the obstacle nail, it is possible to further suppress the circulation speed of the game medium or change the circulation direction of the game medium to various directions. It is possible to make the movement more entertaining, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
"The specific obstacle nail group is
It is composed of at least a plurality of the above-mentioned nail portions”.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the specific obstacle nail group is configured to include at least a plurality of braided nail portions (in [Description of Embodiments], refer to the description regarding the specific obstacle nail group 2700). ..

Thereby, while configuring the specific obstacle nail group by the braid nail portion having the characteristics as described above, the front end of each of the plurality of braid nail portions and the obstacle nails configuring the specific obstacle nail group, Since it is hard to bend each obstacle nail by accommodating it by the accommodating portion of the holding plate, it becomes possible to continue guiding the game medium with a predetermined probability by the specific obstacle nail group, and the intended effect of the specific obstacle nail group can be obtained. It can be surely exerted, the movement of the game medium due to the intended flow of the game medium can be enjoyed to suppress the decline in interest, and the flow of the game medium due to the specific obstacle nail group can be stably maintained. Therefore, the performance assumed by the gaming machine manufacturer can be exhibited for a long time.

Means 8: In the gaming machine,
"A game machine having a game board in which a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a game area in which a game is played,
In the game area, at least a plurality of nail groups are provided, each group including a plurality of obstacle nails as a set, and each pair is provided at intervals allowing a game medium to pass therethrough. A specific obstacle nail group that can guide the game medium with a predetermined probability is provided,
"A plurality of first accommodating portions that are capable of accommodating the front end of the braid nail portion in the specific obstacle nail group and are provided around a position different from the center of the obstacle nail that is accommodated, and the specific obstacle. A plurality of accommodating portions configured to include a second accommodating portion capable of accommodating the front end of one obstacle nail different from the braided nail portion in the nail group, and capable of accommodating the front end of the obstacle nail with a gap. And a transparent flat plate-shaped holding plate provided with a "plurality of protrusions projecting rearward and capable of contacting the game medium",
It is equipped with.

According to the configuration of the means 8, the gaming machine is provided with a gaming board in which a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the game area where the game is played, and the gaming area has a plurality of obstacle nails. A specific obstacle capable of guiding the game medium with a predetermined probability along at least a predetermined guiding region, the at least two nails being provided at least at intervals so that the game medium can pass through as a set. A group of nails is provided, and "a plurality of first accommodating portions that are capable of accommodating the front ends of the braided nail portions in the group of specific obstacles and that are provided around a position different from the center of the obstacles that are accommodated are provided. And a second accommodating portion capable of accommodating the front end of one (single) obstacle nail different from the braided nail portion in the specific obstacle nail group, the front end of the obstacle nail can be accommodated with a gap. A plurality of accommodating parts" and "a plurality of projecting parts that project rearward and can come into contact with the game medium" are provided.

Thus, when the game medium enters a specific obstacle nail group including a plurality of obstacle nails in the game area, the game medium can be guided with a predetermined probability along the predetermined guide area. In this specific obstacle nail group, a plurality of obstacle nails are configured to be at least composed of a plurality of nail nail portions, and a game medium can pass between the plurality of nail nail portions. Since the gap is provided, in one obstacle nail of the braided nail portion, there is no gap through which the game medium can pass in the direction in which the remaining obstacle nails are adjacent to each other. It will be in charge of only forming the gaps in the directions not adjacent to each other. In other words, in the braided nail portion, in one obstacle nail, the direction in charge of forming a gap through which the game medium can pass can be a partial direction. Therefore, even if one obstacle nail of the braided portion is bent, the number of the affected gaps is small compared to the number of the gaps formed with the braided nail portion that is paired with the braided nail portion. It is possible to suppress a great change in the flow of the game medium, and it is possible to facilitate the circulation of the game medium in a stable state in a desired and intended flow path.

At this time, the first accommodating portion of the holding plate accommodates the front ends of the respective obstacle nails of the plurality of braided nail portions forming the specific obstacle nail group, and is specified by the second accommodating portion of the retaining plate. It contains the front ends of the individual nails that make up the nail group. In the braided nail portion, the front ends of a plurality of obstacle nails that are planted in close proximity to each other are accommodated in one first accommodating portion, and in a plurality of obstacle nails that are implanted in close proximity to each other, Since it is difficult to bend in the directions approaching each other, by enclosing the parts in the direction not approaching each other as a set with the first accommodating portion, it is difficult to bend those obstacle nails in any direction. You can On the other hand, since the front end of one obstacle nail that is planted alone is accommodated in the second accommodating portion, it is possible to make the obstacle nail difficult to bend by the second accommodating portion. Because of this, the obstacle nails of the plurality of braided nail portions or the single obstacle nails that constitute the specific obstacle nail group are accommodated in the first accommodating portion and the second accommodating portion of the holding plate. Even if impact is applied to the obstacle nail due to contact of the game medium, contact of tools or the like during maintenance, the front end of the obstacle nail comes into contact with the peripheral wall of the accommodating portion, and further movement is possible. It is possible to prevent the obstruction nail(s) from bending and to keep the flow of the game medium by the obstruction nails in the intended initial state (at the time of shipment). Therefore, the plurality of first accommodating portions and the second accommodating portion of the holding plate can make it difficult for the plurality of obstacle nails forming the specific obstacle nail group to bend, so that the game medium is stably and intended. The game machine can be circulated and can continue to guide the game medium with the specific obstacle nail group with a predetermined probability, and can surely exert the intended action and effect by the specific obstacle nail group. The performance expected by the manufacturer can be exhibited for a long time.

Further, since the specific obstacle nail group is composed of a plurality of braided nail portions or a single obstacle nail, it is possible to relatively increase the number of obstacle nails that have been planted, resulting in more obstacle nails. A game medium can be brought into contact. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of contact with the obstacle nail, it is possible to further suppress the circulation speed of the game medium or change the circulation direction of the game medium to various directions. It is possible to make the movement more entertaining, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, the holding plate is provided with a plurality of protrusions projecting rearward, and when the game medium comes into contact with the protrusions of the holding plate, the circulation speed of the game medium is suppressed or the distribution of the game medium is performed. Since the direction can be changed or changed, more various movements of the game medium can be shown to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. Also, unlike the nails, the protrusions of the holding plate do not bend, so the flow of the game medium by the multiple protrusions can be maintained stably, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine can be exhibited for a long time. You can

Further, since the holding plate is provided with the protrusion, the protrusion of the holding plate can exert a function similar to an obstacle nail such as suppressing the circulation speed of the game medium or changing the circulation direction. Since the holding plate is provided near the front end of the game area because the front end of the obstacle nail is stored in the holding plate storage portion, the holding plate is extended to a portion in the game area where it is difficult to implant the obstacle nail. The protrusion can be provided at the relevant portion by being extended. As a result, by providing a protrusion instead of the obstacle nail in a portion where the obstacle nail cannot be implanted in the conventional game machine or a portion outside the specific obstacle nail group, similar to the obstacle nail in the game medium. Since the player can move, it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game medium in a wider range, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the game medium can be brought into contact with many obstacle nails in the specific obstacle nail group, it is possible to delay the distribution of the game medium, so that the game is provided downstream of the specific obstacle nail group according to the progress of the game. When providing a variable winning opening that opens and closes so that the medium can be received, when a gaming medium is guided by a group of specific obstacle nails, a variable winning opening that is provided on the downstream side as compared with a plurality of normal obstacle nails Since it is possible to delay the game medium to reach the game medium, it is possible to make it difficult to drive the game medium at the timing of driving the variable winning port, and to give a desired difficulty level to the operation of driving the game medium. You can At this time, as the obstacle nails of the specific obstacle nail group are made difficult to bend by the holding plate as described above, it is possible to continue guiding the game medium with a predetermined probability by the specific obstacle nail group and ensure the driving operation. The difficulty level can be set to a desired level, and the difficulty level of the driving operation, which is the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine, can be maintained for a long time. From this, it is possible to motivate the player to drive the game, to entertain the game medium, and to receive the game medium in the variable winning a prize to achieve a sense of accomplishment. Can be given, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed. Further, as described above, since it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation by the specific obstacle nail group, it is possible to make it difficult to receive the game medium into the variable winning port, and the game medium to the variable winning port. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side in which the gaming machine is installed by suppressing the opportunity of paying out by accepting.

Further, in a plurality of storage parts such as the first storage part and the second storage part of the holding plate, since there is a gap between the front ends of the obstacle nails stored in each of the storage parts, temperature and humidity Even if the holding plate expands or contracts due to such a change in the environment, it is possible to absorb the change in the positions of the accommodation portion and the obstacle nail due to the expansion and contraction due to the gap. Therefore, even if the holding plate expands and contracts, it is possible to prevent the plurality of obstacle nails from bending, and the holding plate from being damaged by resistance from the plurality of obstacle nails. Accordingly, by enlarging the holding plate, even if the change in the distance from one end to the other end becomes large due to expansion and contraction, the above-described action and effect can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the plurality of obstacle nails of the specific obstacle nail group that are planted in a wide range in the game area from bending. Therefore, the specific obstacle nail group can guide the game medium to the downstream winning port with an intended predetermined probability, and entertain the movement of the game medium due to the intended flow of the game medium to suppress a decrease in interest. At the same time, the flow of the game medium by the specific obstacle nail group can be stably maintained, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the game machine can be exerted for a long time. As this large holding plate, for example, one whose height is in the range of 1/3 to 3/3 of the height of the game area and whose left and right widths are in the range of 1/10 to 10/10 of the width of the game area Can be mentioned.

In addition, in the housing portion such as the plurality of first housing portions and the second housing portion of the holding plate, since there is a gap between the front end of the plurality of obstacle nails of the specific obstacle nail group, the game board At the time of assembling, it is possible to easily insert the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails that have been planted into the corresponding accommodating portions, and by making the assembling easy, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. it can.

Means 9: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 8,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of game media are provided in the game area so that the game media can be received, and a pachinko machine having a receiving opening from which a predetermined number of game media are paid out from the payout device according to the reception of the game media. And

Here, as the "reception opening", "general winning opening that is always open in the game area", "advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by receiving the game medium because it is always open in the game area Starting prize hole (starting opening) in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game medium is received in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area. Variable winning opening that can be accepted (variable starting opening, accessory winning opening, etc.)", "Ordinary symbol that is drawn by the game medium passing through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area According to the lottery result of, the variable winning opening (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.) that can accept the game medium", "play a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) in the playing area Depending on the drawing result of the ordinary symbol that is drawn by passing through the medium, it becomes possible to accept the game medium, and a special lottery for whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the game medium is advantageous by accepting the game medium "Variable start winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winnings that generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage when the game medium accepted in the winning prize winning portion is sorted and accepted by the sorting means. "Mouth", "As an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage, a big prize hole or a prize prize hole in which a game medium can be received by opening and closing in a predetermined pattern" and the like can be mentioned.

Further, as the "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by receiving the game medium into the starting opening, and a special symbol drawn by the lottery means A special lottery result display means for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol lottery by the combination of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed after the special symbol is variably displayed according to the lottery result, and the special lottery result display means In the advantageous game state generating means for generating the advantageous game state by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when the special symbol lottery result for generating the advantageous game state is displayed, a so-called digital pachi machine )”, “A distribution means for distributing the game media received in the prize winning opening, and when the game media distributed by the distributing means is received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. And an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous (a so-called honey machine), "A game having a large winning opening and a winning prize opening, and a starting opening Depending on the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the medium, the special winning opening or the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game medium accepted in the winning prize is distributed to the V winning opening. The one provided with an advantageous game state generation means for generating an advantageous game state in which a player is advantageous by opening and closing the prize winning opening or the special winning opening (a so-called multi-function peripheral)", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 9, a plurality of game machines are provided in the game area so that the game media can be received, and a receiving opening from which a predetermined number of game media are paid out from the payout device according to the reception of the game media, It is a pachinko machine equipped with. With this, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to achieve the action and effect of any of the above-described means.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of exhibiting the performance assumed by the gaming machine manufacturer for a long time by stably circulating the gaming medium in an intended flow.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a front perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a), and (c) is a cylinder of a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. 34A is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A as seen from the rear. is there. 34A is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A from the front, and FIG. 34B is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. FIG. 7C is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state in which the state is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. FIG. 7A is an enlarged front view showing portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 7B is an enlarged perspective view showing portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and was seen from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from back. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 41( a ). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the aer line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (A) is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects horizontally at the site|part of a lower dish ball supply opening in a door frame, and (b) cuts the same site|part as (a) in the conventional door frame, and shows a main part. FIG. 4C is a cross-sectional view showing the number of stored game balls in the lower plate of the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. It is a top view which expands and shows the site|part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front in the state which turned the production operation button upward, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit of (a) from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the front upper side. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the position of the moving end upward, and (b) is a effect operation unit unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the production|operation production unit in the state which moved to the raising position. It is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lower elevating spring holding member is at the position of the moving end downward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect|action operation part outer periphery decoration board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit unit is in the raised position. It is a plan view of the effect operation unit, showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which connected several contact detection bodies to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) shows the contact detection sensor main body and several contact detection bodies in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the switching part between typically, (c) makes the plate left decoration unit of a plate unit, the plate right decoration unit, and the production operation unit etc. forward/backward movable, and a production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and back side, such as. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the contact detection body which has decoration, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows another embodiment of a production|operation production unit typically. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the front, (c) is the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the Woo line in FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front. And (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AE in FIG. 66( a ). FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-E in FIG. 66( a ). (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame, and (b) is the inner layer as it is in (a) and the outer layer is transparent. FIG. 7 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the closed state. It is a front view which shows each decoration board of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board of the site|part of the production operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decoration board provided around the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is the rear cross-sectional view which cut|disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled FIG. 100 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area|region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the site of a tank rail seeing from the back the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of a second embodiment. 106A is a plan view showing the tank rail or the like of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, FIG. 106B is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail of a) from the back. 107A is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like shown in FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 107B is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like as shown in FIG. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the curve line in FIG. 107(a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 by a cross section. It is an isometric view which expands and shows the site|part of the tank rail seeing from the right back the main body frame provided with the tank rail etc. of 3rd embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the site|part of the tank rail seeing from the left back the main body frame provided with the tank rail etc. of 3rd embodiment. (A) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal board, and (b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 113A is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 113B, and FIG. 113B is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 113A. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in FIG.114(b). (A) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as seen from the upper right rear side, and (c) is (a) ) Is a perspective view of the tank rail of FIG. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of FIG. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of FIG. (A) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board unit of (a) from the right front, and (c) is the board unit of (a) from the left front. It is the perspective view seen. 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the upper right rear side, and FIG. 119(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the lower right back side. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit shown in FIG. 119(a) is a sectional view taken along the line of FIG. 119(a), FIG. 119(b) is a sectional view taken along the line of FIG. 119(a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the cut line. It is a bottom view which shows the site|part behind a door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the board|substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example in which an out sensor is removable, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board unit of a third embodiment which abbreviate|omitted a power supply unit, a payout control unit, and an interface unit from the front right, and (b) sees the board unit of (a) from the front left. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 127A is a plan view of the board unit shown in FIG. 127, FIG. 72B is a sectional view taken along the line XX in FIG. 127A, and FIG. FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the see-through line in FIG. 129 (a). FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as disassembled and seen from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows elimination of a ball clogging in the board|substrate unit of FIG. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing prevention of intrusion of a linear illegal tool in the board unit of FIG. 127. It is explanatory drawing which shows dust removal in the board|substrate unit of FIG. It is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of wiring of the function display unit on the main control board. It is a front view of a game board in a state where a center accessory and the like are transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of a game board shown in a state in which a table unit is cut in parallel with a surface of a game panel to show a game area in which a game ball flows and an obstacle nail. It is an enlarged front view which expands and shows the left side of FIG. 145. It is an expansion front view which expands and shows the right side of FIG. 145. (A) is a front view which shows the right half of a front unit with a panel board and an obstacle nail, (b) is a perspective view which looked at (a) from the front. 148 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. 148 as seen from the front, and FIG. 148 (b) is the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. FIG. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate in FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 15A is an exploded perspective view of the back box relation of FIG. 151 disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view of the rear box relationship viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit in FIG. 152 as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the rear. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the back under front decoration of the back under front production unit in the back unit and the back under back decoration of the back under back production unit have respectively moved to the raising position. In the back unit, the front lower part decoration of the back lower front effect unit has moved to the center of the game area, and the back upper rear decoration of the back upper rear effect unit has moved to the upper side of the lower back front decorative element. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-bottom rear decorative body of the rear-bottom rear effect unit is moving to the lower side of the rear-bottom front decorative body. In the state of FIG. 155, the front of the game board showing a state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back lower front decoration of the back lower front effect unit move to the open position and the central decoration appears. It is a figure. A state in which the back-up rear decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back-lower rear effect unit rises and is in contact with the back-up rear decorative body. It is a front view of the game board showing. In the state of FIG. 157, the front of the game board showing the state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit move to the open position and the central decorative body appears. It is a figure. In the back unit, the back-up front decorative body of the back-up front rendering unit is moving to the lowered position, and the back-up rear decorative body of the back-up rear rendering unit is moving to the rear of the back-up front decorative body, In the back of the front production unit, the front decoration under the back is raised and moved to the lower side of the front decoration of the back, and at the same time, the rear decoration of the rear production unit of the rear production unit moves up and behind the front decoration of the back It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of being in contact with the rear upper decorative body. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment shown in a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel and the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed is shown. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment from the back. FIG. 16A is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guiding unit in the right half of the center accessory of FIG. 162 as seen from the front, and FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 16A is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and FIG. 16B is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 16A is a sectional view taken along the soot line in FIG. 164, FIG. 16B is a sectional view taken along the sethe line in FIG. 164, and FIG. FIG. 16D is a cross-sectional view taken along line (d) of FIG. 164. FIG. 16A is an exploded perspective view of the sphere guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of the sphere guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and seen from the front left.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as seen from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose top view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated to the front so that the player can hear a more deep bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Main frame upper hinge member 510 and main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for opening and closing the door frame 3 and opening and closing the door frame 3, a main frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a power supply board 630 having a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. And a back cover 640 attached to the body frame base 501 for covering the rear side of the game board 5, a locking unit 650 for locking the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. I have it.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. On the rear side of the game panel 1100, a main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) that is arranged, a production display device 1600 that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and can display a predetermined production image, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect in accordance with a game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B A general winning opening 2001 for giving a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006 are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can drive the game ball B by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 195.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the lower right unit 2400, and the back unit. For example, the light emitting effect and the movable effect are performed by the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back front effect unit 3300, the back front effect unit 3400, the back up effect unit 3500, the back effect unit 3600, and so on. Can entertain the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling it into each main member. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

As illustrated, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right at a rear side portion of the left side surface that is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a right side surface from a portion opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has strength and rigidity enhanced by the recess 11a and the bulge 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further to the front side. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, with the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, the upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a contact the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, the outer frame lower member 41 is attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion that is opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the horizontal fixing portion 23b, the plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a, and the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a contact the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the right end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in the form of a flat plate, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. The plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted by penetrating the hooking piece 25b back and forth. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41. A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is arranged in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically penetrated and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thus, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recessed portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the rearward position in the center of the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a laterally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 is provided with an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to the front surface, the rear curtain member 43 forms a curtain inner space 40a which cooperates with the front curtain member 42 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball B stays in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a that is formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that is opened upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that is opened upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d that extends upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and that the upper surface inclines so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the upper end protruding portion 44e that is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and protrudes forward, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is discharged from the first lower hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the discharge hole 60d. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, so as to be laterally spaced from each other, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are mounted inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are for contacting the lower ends of the door frames 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside (curtain plate inner space 40a) of the curtain plate front member 42 and the outside to communicate with each other through the gap between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 connects the curtain plate inner space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by the two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the side of the player). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear a heavy bass sound.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43 a and the lower end of the connecting part 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking from between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, air vibrations emitted from the curtain plate inner space 40a to the outside by the body frame speaker 622 are slanted by the plurality of slanted blade portions 46b, and the handle cover unit 290 is located diagonally above and forward. Through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295, the handle unit 180 can be directed to the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. As a result, when the player thrusts his/her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device for the game ball B), the main frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending the wind into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, a part of the sound pressure released from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is released forward. Therefore, it is released from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and to other players who are traveling around in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since the production sound can be heard, it is possible to attract the player's interest also by the production sound, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 provided in the body frame 4, it is possible to increase the volume of the enclosure 624. Therefore, it is possible to output a more deep bass effect sound, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can rotate. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, which is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 and the mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51 are provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends upward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically to the center of the front extending portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b toward the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and an edge extending from the left side of the front extending portion 51b around the front side to a portion where the bearing groove 51c is open are extended downward. The horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided with a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extension extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely leftward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock main body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock main body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that vertically penetrates the horizontal portion 60a and allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, and rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, so that it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed into a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door, a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the dish unit 200. A door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, The door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 are provided on the upper side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and rear, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. In the rear view, the speaker duct 103 is attached to the lower right corner, the door frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 near the right end in the rear view, and the rear surface of the door frame main relay board 104. Door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the view, handle rear relay board 106 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub relay board 105, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay A door frame relay substrate cover 107 that covers a part of the substrate 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay substrate cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 195 that can be rotated by a player, and the handle unit 180 operates the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, so that the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is released from the ball launch device. 540 is for performing a game of driving into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends in the vertical direction, and a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. ..

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the rear end of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the handle rear relay board mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 has a door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 includes a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42 and the like) that is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly more forward than the right end side. A cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted by penetrating back and forth between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b in front view on the left side. And a ball feeding opening 101e for penetrating the ball feeding unit 140 in the front and rear direction to allow the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, a top plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and which penetrate the front and rear sides. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, penetrates the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided to the front without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the dish unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a rectangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangle extending horizontally is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of the rectangle extending vertically, and a portion extending vertically is formed. The door frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the rear view left side. The door frame sub relay board 105 is a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decoration board 422 and a door frame left side lower decoration board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, a door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, a door frame top relay substrate of the door frame top unit 450, and an interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portion extending vertically above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle with the outer shape extending leftward and rightward, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the one-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle post substrate 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered with the rear handle post substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover/rear handle rear board cover/cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (a portion that extends vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side in front view being open. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcement frame 113 extending from the left reinforcement frame 111; A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of vertically-spaced rear mountings of the right reinforcing frame 112 are attached to the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4. And a hooking member 116 to be hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length substantially the same as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction so that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating part 114b is aligned with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a flat plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In this door frame reinforcing unit 110, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the state of being attached to the door frame base 101 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for mounting the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is vertically movably attached to the hinge bracket 121, and a flange that is attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular shape in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is located between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the upper portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is removed. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 cooperates with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. Installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotatable with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522 a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. 34A is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the cylinder lock as shown in FIG. 34A from the front and rear, and FIG. 34C is a conventional pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 6 as viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a) as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) viewed from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) viewed from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) from the front, and FIG. 36(b) is shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). It is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock, and (c) is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock shown in a state rotated by 90 degrees in a clockwise direction from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used to open and close the lock with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular cylinder inserted in the key hole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates with a regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and the cylinder mounting frame 115. Second cam member 135 that is rotatably attached to the front-rear direction around a lower portion of the cylinder body 131, and an upper end portion that rotates to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. And a lower end side of the second cam member 135 which is rotatably attached to the right side of the rotation center of the second cam member 135, and an upper end side of which rotates the first cam member 134. A strip plate-shaped second arm 137 rotatably attached to a portion below the center and a lower end side rotatably attached to a portion below the rotation center of the second cam member 135. ing.

In addition, the cylinder lock 130 is a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133). A rivet that rotatably attaches the rear cover 138 attached to 115 and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139 and.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear surface side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front surface side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably mounted from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmitting member 133 is integrally rotatably mounted on the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115. In the second cam member 135, the lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees about each rotation axis. is doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the rotation center than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. ..

The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a projecting outward from the lower ends of the left and right side surfaces in a cylindrical shape locked to the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the upper end side thereof is not shown in the drawings. Thus, it is detachably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In the cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmitting member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are formed of metal. ..

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34(c) and (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. There is. In this cylinder lock 130A, a rotation transmitting member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIGS. 34C and 34D, the rotation transmitting member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, etc., a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In a normal state of the cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. 36A, the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 are respectively the center of rotation of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. The second arm 137 is attached to the right side portion, and the upper and lower end sides of the second arm 137 are attached to portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 below the respective rotation centers. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated from the normal state in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by 90 degrees with a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, let the first arm 136 rotate the second cam member 135 in the counterclockwise direction. The second arm 137 has its upper end mounted below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second arm 137 does not move the second cam member 135. The force to rotate in the clockwise direction hardly acts.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves counterclockwise. And the rotation transmitting member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by the rotation of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is due to the position where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction between the rotation center of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward in the first arm 136 decreases, while the force acting upward in the second arm 137 decreases. The power to do it increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force exerted upward by the second arm 137 is larger than that by the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state in the counterclockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36B).

In addition, when the key is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state to be rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is performed. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise from the normal state by the key inserted into the keyhole 132 through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131, the upper end side is located at the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to one side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached to the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 tries to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. The second arm 137 has its upper end mounted below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second arm 137 rotates the second cam member 135 clockwise. The force to rotate in the direction of does not act.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. As a result, the rotation transmitting member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. And the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in proportion to the horizontal direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, while In the arm 137, the force to rotate the second cam member 135 becomes large.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. As a result, the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise from the normal state by an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36C).

When the key is used to rotate 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the normal state to rotate it 90 degrees in the clockwise direction to return to the normal state, the operation is performed in the opposite manner to the above. Will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are attached so as to be in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the rotation is transmitted by connecting at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 regardless of the rotation position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132). Thus, the rotation can be transmitted to rotate the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133), and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked or unlocked favorably.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder main body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a cheating person who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front into the rear side of the cylinder body 131. Incorrectly rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool may open the door frame 3 and perform an illegal act. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool can be inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmitting member 133, the rotation transmitting member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmitting member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and the fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. Can be prevented.

Further, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, which are separated from each other by the rotation angle of 90 degrees, to the first arm 136. A portion of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It will be in the state of being. Therefore, when one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is located at the dead point of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. The key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated without a great resistance to the rotation, the unlocking/locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted in the keyhole is forcibly rotated. It can be prevented that the key is damaged, and the key can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, since the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. As a result, even if one arm is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Further, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (band-shaped) first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, there is a possibility that the gear is rotated and the rotation transmission member 133 is rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the tooth of the gear. Since the arms 136 and the second arms 137 have a rod shape with a smooth surface, it is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the tool to be caught by the first arms 136 and the second arms 137 and to move the first arms 136 and the second arms 137. It is possible to prevent the rotation transmitting member 133 from being rotated by being locked, and it is possible to reliably prevent the locking unit 650 from being illegally operated and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 being unlocked. be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 uses the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. , But is not limited thereto, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , And so on.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 37(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened, and a game ball that is closed from the front end of the front cover 141 and has a box shape that is opened at the front and that has entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540 and a front cover rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. A rear cover 142 for each of a ball removing member 143 having a partition 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of 141, and game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

In the ball feeding unit 140, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removing unit 240. Also, it is formed so as to close the portion open to the rear on the upstream end side of the ball guide passage 241c from the rear side.

The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up and down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. The pivot rod 143b rotatably supported on the rod 143b, the rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rod 143b, and the rod 143b below the rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball-slipping slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper bowl ball-slotting button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180° about the axis of rotation. The ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking section 144a faces the partition section 143a, and at the same time, the ball holding section 144b faces the ball hitting supply port 142a, and the ball holding section 144b has the partition section 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked by the blocking section 144a from moving toward the ball holding section 144b (striking ball supply port 142a), and remains on the partition section 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the rod portion 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip vertically swings by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which vertically swings in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that an end (right end) on the opposite side to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front and rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and the ball feeding operation is performed with the right end portion as the center. It rotates so that the left end side near the crank 147 moves upward. Then, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. The shaft portion 147b is disposed on the side opposite to the side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 160) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that it is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by a ball pulling member 143 pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not enter.

Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partitioning part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide passage 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is formed by a spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if it is supplied with vigor, the impact can be absorbed by the spring through the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is separated by the partition portion 143a. Bounce can be prevented.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The tampering prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a and an upper piece portion 148a which are vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left side. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the tamperproof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamperproof member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 to be attached to the illegal gaming ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed in which the illegal game ball B is put in and out of the first starting opening 2004 by operating the provided string, the illegal game ball B shot (struck) by the ball launch device 540 The string attached to the illegal game ball B by force is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal gaming ball B with a string attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. And 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. The ball passage 150a and a full tank receiving passage 610b of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4 which is open rearward on the lower right side in a front view of the through ball passage 150a and can communicate with each other. And a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full tank receiving port 150b when viewed from the front side. Foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c opening forward near the lower right corner of the front view. And a ball discharge port 150d that communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves downward as it goes downward. When the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and at the same time the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

The glass unit 160 is a frame-shaped glass frame 161 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and attachable to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front and rear so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a that is mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base portion 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by the procedure reverse to the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attachable to and detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the regulation of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along an outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 173 projecting forward of the main body 171 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not project into the game area 5a in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

The security cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is protruded rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. 41A is an enlarged front view showing the portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41B is an enlarged perspective view showing the portions of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 41(a). 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 46, only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted is shown in a sectional view.

The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the dish unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and is operated by the player so that the game ball B in the upper dish 201 is moved. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later, and a front end of the handle base 181. Handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 to be described later, and a disc-like shape attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle mounted on the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a front lens 185.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 186 and handle base 181 to provide an outer periphery. The shaft member 187 having the drive gear portion 187a, the transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and the detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 have the handle base 181 and the inner. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side in a front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 and the base. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b radially protruding from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear tubular portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear tubular portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusion portions 291d can be respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. Is inserted, the handle base 181 is in a state of being unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c that connects the ends of the portion 195b to each other, and two outer peripheral ring portions 195c that extend in an arc shape around the rotation shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrate the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. The slit 195d and a locking protrusion 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190 are provided. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and centered around one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend in the counterclockwise direction from the portions having an angle of 120 degrees. The three spoke portions 195b extend in a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped R side facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 can be detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is rotated.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a opened toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat plate-shaped mounting stay 196b extending from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. There is. The three handle guides 196 have mounting stays 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portions 196a are located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The movement of the handle guide 196 in the front-rear direction is restricted by inserting a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291 described later into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The handle decoration board 184 is one in the center, three are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six are provided at constant intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10 The individual LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric shape. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two in the upper left of the outer circumference, two in the upper right of the outer circumference, and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decoration board 184. The LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems and can control 10 LEDs 184a, which are divided into 5 groups, in full color, respectively, with 15 systems including 3 systems for one group. I am trying.

Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 includes two power lines (one is a ground wire) for supplying electric power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable composed of four electric wires is connected to each of the control signal line for receiving signals such as the above, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. .. Then, when the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, it is divided into five groups according to the command. The ten LEDs 184a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

As described above, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the number of the LEDs 184a, which are larger than the number of the electric wires forming the wiring cable to be connected, is individually (here, combined). The number of electric wires can be reduced and the configuration related to electric wiring can be simplified.

The front surface of the front handle lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has a light-transmitting property. The front lens 185 of the handle has a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The front lens 185 of the steering wheel is made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 changes. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength according to the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 195, and the player touches the handle 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is emitted with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and to reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, the firing controller 633b of the payout control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and also the one-shot button. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, it is possible to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before the single-shot button 193 is operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the rear end of the handle cover base 291 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner 292 having a cover and a rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200; and an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface thereof. An annular substrate cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has a rear end attached to the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 are provided.

The handle cover base 291 has a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending forward and backward with an inner diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and the inner diameter becomes smaller from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a toward the front. An inner wall portion 291b, a cylindrical rear cylinder portion 291c that extends through the middle wall portion 291b and has an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to be inserted, and an inner circumference of the rear cylinder portion 291c. And a plurality of (here, three) protrusions 291d are provided at positions corresponding to the groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

In addition, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tubular portion 291a and the same position from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the front end of the front tubular portion 291a. A cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f that protrudes forward to the front, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front cylinder portion 291a at a portion between the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and the front cylinder. And an opening 291h penetrating the lower part of the part 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction in a circular arc shape whose cross section bulges outward. The rear end of the rear tubular portion 291c is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted inside. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181, and by inserting the three protrusions 291d into the groove portions 181c, the handle base 181 can be relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer tubular portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g projects from the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position near the front tubular portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and three guide pieces 291g are provided in the circumferential direction at intervals of an angle of 10 degrees. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 is inserted rearward of the guide piece 291g through the space between the guide pieces 291g, and the handle 195 is rotated, whereby a U-shaped guide portion is formed. By positioning the guide piece 291g inside 196a, the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder 291a to the vicinity of the flange 291e, and has a size in the range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front cylinder 291a. ..

The inner 292 extends rearward from an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and an outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (four in this case) notch portions 292c which are cut out from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and which are provided at intervals in the circumferential direction. The front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base portion 292a from the front, and the base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200. The cutout portions 292c are provided in the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decoration board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. Twelve LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These twelve LEDs 293a are in a set of two from the center, two on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, two on the right, and two on the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can be controlled to emit light in full color, and 18 systems of 3 systems per group are controlled. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decoration board 293 has two power lines (one is an earth wire) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and a command from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one control signal line for receiving a signal such as an address and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. There is. Then, when the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b is divided into 6 groups according to the command. Further, the twelve LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The substrate cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and the front plate portion 294a. And a cylindrical side plate portion 294b having an outer peripheral edge extending shortly rearward. In this board cover 294, the front plate 294a is located between the flange 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and the side plate 294b extends to the base 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a of the same inner shape as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and the spindle base (kamakura type or bowl type) bulges toward the rear. , Etc., and a plurality of (four in this case) notched opening portions 295b are formed in the circumferential direction by notching from the rear end toward the front. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of cutout openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is formed in two colors by using synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded with two kinds of resin, that is, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , Circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected to the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When the handle cover 295 is molded, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is provided. A portion on the rear side of the handle cover unit 290 is inserted, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, and the like are located on the front side of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the part of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover unit 290, and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101. It is attached to 101b.

A central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is rotatably supported by a handle base 181. Further, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 at the outer peripheral ring portion 195c on the outer side of the central hub portion 195a by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. In the handle guide 196, the rear end side of the guide portion 196a is inserted (locked) between the front tubular portion 291a and the outer tubular portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the substrate cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have a light-transmitting property, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 emits light. Thus, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the interior of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be illuminated and decorated.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has the notch opening 295b and the notch 292c which are aligned with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side. A hole communicating with the inside of the front tubular portion 291a can be made to appear to be open. This alleviates the mental anxiety of the player by thrusting his/her hand (finger) into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. You can

The upper cutout opening 295b (upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) of the handle cover 295 is closed by the dish right decoration unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted passes through the opening 291h and is located below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295, respectively. It communicates with the cutout portion 292c and the cutout opening portion 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side Can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout 295b.

In addition, when the liquid or the game ball B enters into the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the liquid is passed through the gap between the front tube portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292, and the lower side It can be discharged downward through the cutout opening 295b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the lower notch 292c of the inner 292, and the lower notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 are the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame 2, as shown in FIG. It is provided on an extension line of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional body 40 in the inclination direction. Accordingly, the wind (wind pressure) emitted obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout opening 295b. It is possible to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player thrusts his/her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device for the game ball B), the main frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending the wind into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has the cutout opening 295b, when the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened, the cutout opening 295b on the right side can be hooked with a finger to pull the door frame 3 and the like. It can be used as a handle when opening.

Further, in the handle 195, since the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is plated, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B Can be typed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has the cutout opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by putting a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b to grasp. It can be fixed and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant strength even if the hand is not continuously twisted. In this way, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the driving operation suitable for the player can be selected.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view, and faces the outer side (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the terminal also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the left side is provided so as to be openable and closable around the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. The handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided, so that the handle of the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 having a shape that has never been seen before can be seen in the existing portion, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the interest of the player. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play with the pachinko machine 1 as well as the player who is traveling around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be used.

In addition, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine with respect to the operation of the handle 195, and entertain the player by the driving operation of the game ball B with a new feeling. Can be suppressed.

Then, when the player operates the handle 195, when a production sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is generated by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air in the enclosure 624 vibrates due to the box 623, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 becomes sound pressure through the curtain plate inner space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is generated by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47, and the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover. It can be guided to the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (in the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and can be introduced into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. A sound pressure stimulus can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, depending on the game state in the game area 5a, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the fingers of the player inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. The player can be surprised, the chance of coming can be foreseen, the amount of steering wheel operation can be changed, etc., which can entertain the player and prevent the player from getting bored. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover. By cooling the inside of the unit 290 and making the environment around the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 comfortable, it is possible to reduce the stress on the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. it can.

Further, as described above, the handle 195 or the handle 195 is provided to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is generated by the grill member 46. Since the plurality of blades 46b are used to guide and apply the stimulus, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibration device. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.), bearing mechanism, etc., and it is possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

Further, since the handle 195 has the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portion 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has the appearance of a steering wheel of an automobile, and thus the handle of a conventional pachinko machine. Even if the appearance is greatly different from, it is possible to let the player intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is similar to that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the pachinko machine is a pachinko machine that allows the player to play without hesitation. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are formed in a portion of the handle cover unit 290 which faces the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which the player's finger can be inserted, between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Since the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower part than the handle cover unit 290 is opened through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. Since it is visible, the tubular handle cover unit 290 can be given a feeling of openness, so that the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290 can be reduced, and The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h penetrating therethrough are provided in the downward facing portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and the port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened to the front, even if a liquid such as a drink or the game ball B enters the handle cover unit 290, the handle cover unit 290 can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to prevent the liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h from entering the port member 47 easily.

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit 290 has a plurality of front end diameters equal to those of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be operated by gripping it with a hand like a handle of a conventional pachinko machine, or the spoke portion 195b can be operated by only a finger, or an outer ring. The handle cover unit is operated by operating the portion 195c like a steering wheel of an automobile, operating by holding a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b, and straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing an operation such as picking the inside and the outside of the 290 with a finger, and capable of various driving operations (handle operation) of the game ball B. Therefore, according to the game state, the state of the player, etc., it is possible to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to make the player tired. It is possible to enter the game ball B into the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 may be grasped by placing a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195b, or the outer peripheral ring portion 195c may be straddled to pinch the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with a finger. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform the handle operation that cannot be performed by the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is possible to provide the player with various handle operations. , It is possible to entertain the operation of the handle and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 has a form extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, can be made to look good and attract the player's attention.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming unnecessarily large and the handle cover unit 290. By suppressing the game area 5a (door window 101a) from being pressed upward, it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from becoming narrow, and it is possible to relatively increase the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player can be provided.

Further, by appropriately emitting the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (in the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emission decorations of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power and capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player.

Further, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided in a portion of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a handle that makes the door frame 3 look bad, and the door frame 3 can be made to look good.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 rotatably in the circumferential direction, and a flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction and The guide piece 291g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g or the like can restrict the forward movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. 195c and the spoke portions 195b connecting the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to hit the game ball B, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided. The gaming ball B can be driven even if the handle 195 is operated while touching, and the pachinko machine 1 can perform various driving operations (handle operation) as described above, and the player can It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in without touching the handle 195, prevent the handle operation using a tool from being performed, and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The dish unit 200 has an upper dish 201 and is attached to the front face of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 is attached to the front face of the dish base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surfaces of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to an upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. Mounted on the mounting base (not shown) protruding forward, a tray unit relay board (not shown) mounted on the right side of the mounting base, and a ball mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. A lending operation unit 220, a unit for removing the upper bowl ball (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and a unit for removing the upper bowl ball 240 installed behind the unit for removing the upper bowl ball, Is equipped with.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 so as to be laterally spaced from each other, and And a plate right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes, as an effect operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation section 302 that can be operated by the player to make a contact, and a pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. A ring-shaped effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 mounted on the upper surface, an outer peripheral substrate cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation unit base 315. And a partial relay substrate unit 330.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit unit 350, which is capable of projecting upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and provided with the effect operation unit 301, and the operation operation unit base 315. And a projection output adjusting mechanism 380 that adjusts an upward projection output of the production operating unit unit 350 by the production operating unit elevating mechanism 360. There is.

The entire dish unit 200 is bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged such that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is provided with the ball lending operation unit 220 on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is provided on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a region of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges to the front. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 73). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side becomes lower, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 201a sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is located below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to become lower toward the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball B. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged in.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame, which is horizontally cut at the lower dish ball supply port, and FIG. It is a sectional view showing an important part, and (c) is a table comparing the number of stored game balls in the lower plate of the product of this embodiment and the conventional product. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal lid 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating vertically, and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed and open the lower plate ball hole 202a. The game ball B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, so that the lower dish ball supply port 211c is moved forward. The discharged game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lower plate ball supply port 211j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 is connected to the lower plate ball supply port 211j. On the other hand, a lower dish ball removal hole 202b of the lower dish 202 is provided in front of the central axis thereof. Then, the lower bowl ball supply port 211j has a cylindrical shape that extends straight forward so that the game ball B ejected forward from the ball ejection port 150d goes straight to the lower dish ball ejection hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball extraction hole 202b by the shortest distance movement.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight to the lower plate ball removal hole 202b by the lower plate ball supply port 211j, if the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265, Since the dish ball vent hole 202b and the lower dish ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower dish 202, the storage of the game balls B may be concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower dish 202. There is. Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right side area in the lower plate 202 block the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game balls B come from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. Since the tank is not discharged, the full tank detection sensor 154 operates and there is a risk that the lower tray 202 is determined to be full even though there is still room in the left side area in the lower tray 202. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the lower dish ball supply port 211c extends diagonally forward left. It is inclined to. More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the dish unit base 211 at a position directly behind the lower dish ball hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow. It is tilted diagonally to the left front so that the distance becomes equal.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is located to the left of the central axis (the line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (the ball discharge port 150d) of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. Are moving to.

Accordingly, by moving the lower dish ball punching hole 202a to the left, the lowest portion of the lower dish 202 (the portion of the lower dish ball punching hole 202a) is moved to the left, and the lower dish ball punching hole is formed. It is possible to reduce that the game balls B are concentrated and stored on the right side in the lower plate 202 while the 202a is closed. Then, in the lower plate 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the site of the lower plate ball hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (the front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. Since the side wall on the left side of the mouth 211c extends obliquely to form a gap between the rear end of the lower plate 202 and the game ball B, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball. The game ball B discharged from the post-drawing unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower plate 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and discharged. It is possible to properly store the game ball B in the entire lower plate 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game balls B remains in the lower plate 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit base 211. A main body 212 and a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 near the lower right corner are provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on an upper portion of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and an upper dish ball mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. The unit includes a unit before removal (not shown) and a unit after removal of the upper bowl 240 that is attached to the rear of the unit before removal of the upper bowl and behind the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower part to the left with respect to the left-right center in a front view, and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of a portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c, and the front and rear of the lower plate ball supply port 211c on the upper right side in front view. And an upper plate ball feed port (not shown) whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 with the front end opened and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper plate. After the ball is removed, the ball is fed from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 through the ball feed guide passage 241b and the ball guide passage 241c and the cutout portion 211d.

The upper dish ball feed port 211a is located in front of a ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper dish ball removal unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the dish base unit 210. The game ball B in the inside is supplied from the ball receiving port of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

Further, the dish unit base 211 of the present embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball hole 202a. The ball guiding portion 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper plate 201 by the ball removing guide path 241c to a position far from the lower plate ball removing hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (left part of the lower plate 202). is there. As shown in FIG. 50(a), the ball guiding portion 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a left inner wall opposite to a right inner wall where the ball removal guiding path 241c is opened in the inner wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c formed in a cylindrical shape. It is inclined so as to move to the left as it goes from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the inner wall on the left side (ball guide portion 213), at least one game ball B is formed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (the rear end of the lower plate 202) at a position directly behind the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. There is formed a distance (gap) through which can be distributed. As a result, when the game ball B flowing from the upper plate 201 through the ball guiding unit 241c comes into contact with the ball guiding unit 213 from the right side, the ball guiding unit 213 is guided to the left front by the inclination, and the game is played. The ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower plate 202 that is away from the lower plate ball removal hole 202a in the lower plate 202. That is, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest part (lower plate ball hole 202a) in the lower plate 202.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), since the lower dish ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as a conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, it is guided by the ball guide passage 241c. When the game ball B comes into contact with the inner wall on the left side of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while rolling back to the right, and is sent to a position far from the lower plate ball hole 202b in the lower plate 202. Instead, it is stored in the area on the right side in the lower plate 202 in which the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is provided. Therefore, in the conventional product, in the area on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202, the storage of the game balls B (shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 50(b)) concentrates, and the right side of the lower plate 202 When the game balls B concentrated in the area block the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are not discharged from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side, so that the tank is full. Although the detection sensor 154 operates, there is a possibility that the lower plate 202 is determined to be full even though there is still room in the left side region in the lower plate 202.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guiding portion 213 is provided, the gaming ball B flowing through the ball guiding portion 241c is guided to the left side area in the lower plate 202. can do. Further, in the lower plate 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the site of the lower plate ball hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (the front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. The foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) are passed between the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the mouth 211c and the rear end of the lower plate 202. The game ball B released to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower plate 202, and the game ball B can be stored over the entire lower plate 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game ball B remains in the lower plate 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

In order to support the above-described effects, the inventors of the present application store the products in this embodiment and the conventional product in the respective lower trays 202 when the full tank detection sensor 154 operates. The number of game balls B was counted. The counting of the game balls B was carried out 10 times in each. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), the number of stored game balls B is lower in the lower plate 202 of this embodiment (the product of this embodiment) than in the conventional product at any time. It is significantly higher, and it was confirmed that the game balls B can be stored on average about 40% more than the conventional products.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges more toward the front than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. The upper plate body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the portion that bulges the most forward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the dish unit 200 so that the upper end portion near the right end of the upper dish main body 212 is closed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decoration board 273, the dish right decoration board 278, and the operation section relay board 332. It is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and then lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, display the amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or a ball lending machine. It is for subtracting and returning the amount of cash or a prepaid card thrown into the rented game ball B, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged to the right of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 and has a light-transmitting property, and a ball lending button 224, which is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. The return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display section 226 arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base portion 221. A volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227 are provided.

The upper bowl ball removal button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has a character of "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball type LED, and can be favorably viewed from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. In addition, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented gaming ball B is subtracted from the cash or the prepaid card loaded into the ball lending machine and the card is returned. The ball lending display section 226 displays the amount of cash or the amount of the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display unit 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

The volume control button 227 controls the volume of sound for production such as music, voice, and sound effect output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. It is for adjusting. The volume control button 227 is formed in a gourd shape of a double circle like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one circle (upper side) and a "-" character at the center of the other (lower side) circle, and between the two circles. A pattern that sounds like a sound coming from a speaker is applied to the part. The volume adjustment button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. When the volume adjusting button 227 is pressed on the "+" side, the volume is increased, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume is decreased.

The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of the LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light quantity adjusting button 228 is formed in a bi-circular gourd shape like a combination of two circles. The light amount control button 228 has a "+" character at the center of one circle (upper side) and a "-" character at the center of the other (lower side) circle. A light bulb design is applied to the part. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the “+” side is pressed and becomes dark when the “−” side is pressed.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 have different colors from each other (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player does not make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the light amount are adjusted by using the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. At this time, after operating the effect operation unit 301 as appropriate, a menu for setting for adjusting the volume, light amount, etc. is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the volume of the volume and the brightness of the amount of light are changed, it takes a lot of time (time) to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be adjusted directly (directly), and it is troublesome to adjust the volume and the light amount. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper bowl]
The unit before removing the upper bowl and the unit after removing the upper bowl 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 49. The upper bowl removing unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper bowl removing button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the game balls stored in the upper bowl 201. It is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

The upper bowl removal unit 240 is attached to a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port from the rear, and is attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. An upper dish ball removing slider 242, a spring (not shown) for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

The rear base 241 is a ball receiving port (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, as it projects upward from the site where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and a ball. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the receiving slot downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a rearward direction on the rear surface of the rear base 241 below the ball feeding guide path 241b. The game ball B is guided downward from the position, and then the ball guide route 241c for guiding the game ball B to the right in rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port, which is assembled to the plate base unit 210, opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. Is formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c projects to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. A rear cover 244 is closed on the rear side of the region extending to the left and right of the ball guideway 241c. In the state in which the ball guide passage 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion (not shown) projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion and is moved rearward. And a projecting operation transmitting portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242 has the operation receiving portion penetrating the tray unit base 211 from the rear side and protruding forward in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper tray removing ball is placed on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, the upper tray ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball pulling member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

In the upper bowl removal unit 240, the upper bowl removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper bowl removal slider 242 receives the upper tray ball through the operation receiving portion of the upper bowl removal slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is located at the upper moving end. Further, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition part 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in a state in which the upper bowl ball-removing button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving opening. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the contacting ball removing member 143 can move downward, and the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143 causes the ball removing member 143 to rotate so that the partition 143a and the ball inlet 141a are removed. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving opening and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball removal port 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball removal guide path 241c, and then down from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring, and the upper bowl ball removal button 222 moves up and abuts on the operation transmission portion 242b. The operating rod 143c that is rotating causes the ball-stripping member 143 to rotate, so that the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-stripping port 141b, and the original state is restored.

In this way, by the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower plate 202 side. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The dish unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and the dishes which are attached to the upper front portion of the dish unit main body 252 so as to be separated from each other in the left and right directions. The left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50. The lower plate body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear part is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction projects further forward than the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom plate body 251 is inclined such that its bottom surface is lowered toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal lid 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the lower dish main body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is the lower dish ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the upper surface thereof has the lowest center in the left-right direction. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is opened rearward.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right sides toward the center in the left-right direction in the upper portion, extends downward, and is spaced apart from the left and right sides. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b which bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulging portions 252a.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's finger to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the top and bottom thereof become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Further, although not shown, the dish unit main body 252 is provided between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a at the center in the left-right direction and includes a performance operation unit mounting portion to which the performance operation unit 300 is mounted. .. The effect operation unit attachment portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the dish unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. ..

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and stores the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharges the game ball B from the lower dish 202 by opening and closing the lower dish ball removing hole 202a. It is for making things happen.

The lower dish ball removal unit 260 includes a lower dish ball removal button 263 and a lower dish ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower dish ball removal button 263.

When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b of the dish unit body 252, and the lower dish ball removal lid is provided. 265 closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 moves to open the lower dish ball removal hole 202a, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a opens the lower dish 202 inside. The game ball B can be discharged below the dish unit 200.

In addition, when the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains moved, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open. Then, the game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pushed backward and then released, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is released. Returns to the position of the normal state, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 on the plate unit 200.

The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has a translucent dish left decoration 271, and a translucent dish left decoration that penetrates the dish left decoration 271. A lens 272 and a plate left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left decoration 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The plate left decoration 271 is formed in milky white.

The plate left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the plate left decorative body 271 in a state of being coincident with the front surface of the plate left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate left decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate left decoration 271 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The plate left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the plate left decoration unit 270 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate left decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical right and left translucent dish right decoration body 276 and a translucent dish right decoration body penetrating the dish right decoration body 276. A lens 277 and a plate right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the plate right decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate right decoration 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Has been formed. The plate right decoration 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish right decoration lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the dish right decoration body 276 so as to match the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and the plate right ornamental body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The plate right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end thereof is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate right decoration body 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate right decoration board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate right decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 partially project upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled to the door frame 3. It is possible to form a raised step between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 side. As a result, the player can use his/her step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a to catch his/her finger, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when performing or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. Further, the level difference between the dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing out forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the lower front side. is there. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in the state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is in the position of the upper moving end, and FIG. 55(b) is an effect operation from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the production|operation production unit in the state which the partial unit moved to the raising position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the position of the moving end downward.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player to make a contact operation, and a push operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player, and can accept the operation of the player or move the effect operation unit 301. (Vibration) can be performed so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the production during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 of the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction and has a spherical outer shape of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside, and is provided on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and a plurality of LED operation units 320 provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 for mounting the upper portion (unit upper cover 312) of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 with light emission decoration. Outer peripheral decoration board 320, outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to operation section base 315 so as to cover performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 from above, and operation section relay board unit attached to the rear surface of operation section base 315. 330 is provided.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the production operation unit unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for elevating the production operation unit unit 350, and the projection output of the production operation unit unit 350. And a thrust output adjusting mechanism 380 for The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by an effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Stage control unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment part of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has an annular shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is opened upward and backward, and an insertion port 312a that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. And a unit upper cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and the bottom of the operation portion base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the outer surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed into a substantially spherical shape. Incidentally, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The production operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the entire width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

In the effect operation unit cover unit 310, at least the unit upper cover 312 has a light-transmitting property, and light emission decoration can be performed by light emission of a plurality of LEDs of an effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 described later.

The effect operation section cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that protrudes farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. Further, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the plate left decorative body 271 and the plate right decorative body 276 extend outward from the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation section base 315 is attached on the rear side to the effect operation unit attachment section 212a of the upper dish body 212 of the dish base unit 210. The operation section base 315 is covered by the unit lower cover 311 at the front and the lower side, and is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation section 301 at the upper side. The operation portion base 315 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation portion base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a having an open upper side, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body portion and having a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body 315a accommodates the effect operation unit unit 350 inside. In addition, a pair of guide shafts 362 and a lower end of a central shaft 366 of a production operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in a production operation unit unit 350 described later are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the substrate base 331 of the operation unit relay substrate unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

The effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange portion 315b. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral substrate cover 325.

In the state where the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located substantially flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay substrate unit 330 covers the substrate base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay substrate 332 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay substrate 332 from the rear side. And a substrate cover 333 attached to the substrate base 331.

The operation section relay board 332 is a performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), button outside decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor body 358, button inside decoration board 364, operation button. The lift drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lift detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 are relayed to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Stage operation unit]
The effect operation unit unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. Is.

The effect operation unit unit 350 has a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 having an upper end side closed, a disc-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to an upper portion of the button body 351 and a button body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 that is inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and that is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down, and is arranged above the button base 354. And a ring-shaped button outside decoration substrate 355 having a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof.

Also, the effect operation unit unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. And a contact detection sensor main body 358 connected to and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 has a disc-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. And a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape forming a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation portion cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to have a diameter of about ½ of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery, and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side of a constant width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is bulged obliquely upward and the inside thereof is formed flat. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has flat plate-shaped downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends of the outer peripheral edge and the rear end. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes of punching metal to suppress the electrostatic capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 can be made excellent. It can be illuminated and decorated in various states.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connection connector in the contact detection sensor body 358. Accordingly, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the electrostatic capacitance, and can detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) on the upper surface or the side surface of the button body 351. You can That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 includes a tubular sleeve body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and the length thereof is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is a disc having a diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at a portion symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and a central hole protruding from the inner surface toward the center. And a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough for the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further includes a flat plate-shaped detection piece 354d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation portion lifting mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked on the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The bottom of the button base 354 is in contact with the upper ends of a pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outside decoration substrate 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a line on a double circumference of a concentric circle. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided on a portion of the button sleeve 353 slightly outside the sleeve body 353a and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately causing the LED 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 to emit light, it is possible to make the area on the upper surface of the button main body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button main body 351 emit light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged such that the rotation axis extends in the direction orthogonal to the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation unit 301. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided in a straight line portion that passes through the pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation unit 301 (effect operation unit unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the performance operation unit 301. Further, the vibration of the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although not shown in detail, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to the sensor IC including a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, an output circuit, and the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the electrostatic capacitance of the sensor electrode included therein. Further, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. That is, the contact detection sensor body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the electrostatic capacitance by the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the predetermined electrostatic capacitance set by the external resistance is exceeded. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined value, but a plurality of stages of signals may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

In the effect operation unit unit 350 of the present embodiment, the contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting the electrostatic capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358 is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. Further, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body with the effect operation unit unit 350 protruding upwards. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) on the side surface of 351. Therefore, the effect operation unit unit 350 can cause the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be vertically movable. In the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like a sphere. Then, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is in a state of protruding above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, it is possible to function as the pressing operation unit 303.

More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), even if it is pressed, it does not move further downward, and it is in a state in which the pressing operation cannot be performed. .. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the effect operation unit raising/lowering mechanism 360 moves the effect operation unit unit 350 to a state higher than the normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. .. When the upper surface of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing. It is detected by the sensor 373. Accordingly, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

Further, since the effect operation unit unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button main body 351, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button main body 351 is touched when operating the contact operation unit 302. This means that the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having the unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button main body 351, by forming fine irregularities, a plurality of streaks or the like on the surface (upper surface) of the button main body 351, an arbitrary tactile sensation can be given to the contact operation unit 302. Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the player can be more entertained.

Although the button body 351 is transparent in the above description, the button body 351 is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be opaque or semi-transparent so that the lower side is difficult to see. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable that it has a light-transmitting property. Accordingly, the button main body 351 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the LED 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355, the LED 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364, and the like provided below, and the player can be illuminated by the button main body 351. Can entertain.

[3-5e-5. Stage operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation section lifting mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation section base 315, and can raise and lower the effect operation section unit 350. The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 is mounted below the effect operation section unit 350 in the main body portion 315a of the operation section base 315, and includes an elevating mechanism base 361 having a substantially circular outer periphery and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of cylindrical columns are arranged symmetrically, the lower end is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and the upper end penetrates the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354 and extends upward. The guide shaft 362 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are connected at their upper ends to each other, and the disk-shaped upper base 363 whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353 is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 so that light is emitted upward. And a button inner decoration board 364 on which a plurality of illuminatable LEDs 364a are mounted.

In addition, in the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted to urge the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. And a central shaft 366 having a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Further, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is mounted on the lower surface of the lifting mechanism base 361 such that the operation shaft lifting drive motor 367 is mounted so that the rotation shaft projects upward and the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367. A spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 and meshes with the lift driving gear 368, and is rotated by the driven gear 369. And a lifting cam drive gear member 370 that is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 therethrough.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end thereof, is rotatably attached through the central shaft 366, and rotates to elevate and lower the button base 354. A member 371, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361, and the pressing detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevation detection sensor 374 that detects the elevation of the effect operation unit unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevation cam member 371), and an elevation spring lower holding member of the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 that is attached to the elevation mechanism base 361. The projection output detection sensor 375 that detects the projection output of the effect operation unit unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385.

The elevating mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a and an elevating spring. And a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a protrusion output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button lift drive motor 367, a lift detection sensor 374, and a protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. In the lifting mechanism base 361, the lower ends of the legs 361b are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. As a result, a space in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at positions at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a.

The pair of guide shafts 362 penetrates through a pair of through holes 361c provided in the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a. .. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. Lower ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315, and upper ends thereof are attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. The upper base 363 may form a space for accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower protrusion into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372. it can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button middle decoration board 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration substrate 364 can cause the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 to emit light by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the guide shaft 362 is inserted in each of them. The lower ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 are in contact with the lower elevating spring holding members 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper ends are in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downward from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 374. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided at its lower end with a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed in. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371 a can guide the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354, and the elevating spring 365 urges the button base 354 upward (effect operation unit unit 350 ). Can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space for accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper protruding portion into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The press detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the lowest position (normal state). The pressing detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state when the effect operation unit raising/lowering mechanism 360 moves the effect operation unit unit 350 upward from the normal state, because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the push detection sensor 373 causes the button base 354. It is possible to detect the pressing piece of the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d.

The up-and-down detection sensor 374 detects the up-and-down detection piece 370c of the up-and-down cam drive gear member 370, so that the up-and-down cam member 371 is connected via the connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the up-and-down cam drive gear member 370. The rotation position of is being detected.

The protrusion output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lower spring support member 385 in the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380.

The effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can support the effect operation unit unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down through the button base 354 by the pair of front and rear guide shafts 362, and the button base 354 can be supported by the pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation unit unit 350 can be urged upward via the above. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the effect operation unit unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be made In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can cause the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button inside decoration board 364 to emit light.

In the normal state, in the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the lifting cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a)). See). In this normal state, the effect operation unit unit 350 is located at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward, effect operation is performed. The sub-unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 are in agreement, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310. And the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the raising/lowering drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 in a normal state (the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the lowered position), it meshes with the raising/lowering drive gear 368. The lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the engaging portion. While rolling from 371c to the left of the locking portion 371c of the first cam 371b, the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

Then, when the guide pin 354c that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 354c At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The lower spring holding member 385 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the vertical spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various vertical positions by the projection output adjusting drive motor 381, which will be described in detail later. it can. Then, since the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the elevating spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit unit 350 is raised with a protrusion output according to the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. Can be projected into position.

In the state where the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. Further, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation portion 303) of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in this raised position, the effect operation unit unit 350 causes the elevating spring 365 to move. The button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 against the urging force of the button base 354. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 354c). Therefore, the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When the effect operation unit unit 350 is returned to the lowered position, the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lower elevating spring holding member 385 downward to reduce the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. The state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also exerted. It becomes weaker, the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371 can be reduced, and damage (failure) of the operation button lift drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button lifting drive motor 367, an inexpensive one with low torque can be used.

When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 is stopped and the guide pin 354c moves the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the effect operation unit unit 350 is returned to the original lowered position.

In the above description, in the effect operation portion raising/lowering mechanism 360, by rotating the raising/lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b( An example has been described in which the button base 354 (button body 351) is moved from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d so that the button base 354 (button body 351) suddenly protrudes from the lowered position to the raised position. However, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves up and down. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) is moved to the lowered position by being locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 causes the lifting cam member 371 to be viewed in plan view. You may make it rotate in the direction of rotation. Incidentally, the ascending/descending distance of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in the normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to cause the guide pin 354c to move to the third cam 371e. Will move upwards along. When the guide pin 354c is in the middle of the third cam 371e and the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the lowered position and the raised position. It can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed. Can function as.

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 should be moved downward to weaken the urging force of the lifting spring 365. Is desirable. As a result, the load on the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operation button lifting drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be lightened.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) can be changed according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, and therefore, depending on the game state (for example, the first starting opening 2004 or By varying the protrusion amount of the button body 351 according to the lottery result of the special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2005), the player can be made to suggest the expectation for the game. it can.

It should be noted that at least one shallow recess that can hold the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thereby, the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same protrusion amount, and the variation in the protrusion amount can be prevented. Further, when the recess is provided at least at one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess so that the operation button lift drive motor 367 stops the lift cam member 371 from rotating. It is not necessary to continue, and the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. The projection output adjustment mechanism 380 changes the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 that biases the effect operation unit unit 350 upward, so that the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) projects upward ( It is possible to change the sudden output). The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 includes a protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 meshing with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshing with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a. An adjusting screw 384 that extends downward in a cylindrical shape and that has a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery and that has a central shaft 366 inserted therein and is rotatably supported, and an adjusting screw. And a lower elevating spring holding member 385 with which the lower ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 abut, and which engage with the screw portion 384b of the 384 and through which the pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate.

The protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the protruding force adjusting drive motor 381 and the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft protruding in a gap between the protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 and the base body 361a.

The adjusting screw 384 is formed such that the upper and lower sides thereof extend from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lower elevating spring holding member 385 includes a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b vertically penetrating at the center of the main body portion 385a, and screwed into the screw portion 384b, and the front and rear portions of the main body portion 385a. It has a spring holding recess 385c provided at both ends and capable of accommodating the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. .. The elevating and lower unsprung holding member 385 has the guide shafts 362 passing therethrough at the centers of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the bump output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

When the protrusion output adjusting drive motor 381 rotates the pinion gear 382, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can rotate the adjusting screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 to move the lower elevating spring holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 is reduced (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the effect operation unit unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be increased, and the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved downward. As a result, the urging force that urges the effect operation unit unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit unit 350 upward.

The detection piece 385d of the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is most raised. That is, when the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 is maximized, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375. As a result, when the protrusion output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the up-and-down spring holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, the up-and-down spring holding member by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 is detected. By stopping the upward movement of the 385, it is possible to prevent further compression of the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to prevent damage to the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380.

Further, as described above, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit unit 350, so that the button main body is touched by the contact detection body 352 while the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the lowered position. Detecting contact or approach of a detection target (for example, a player's finger or the like) to 351 causes the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to project the production operation unit unit 350 and bring it into contact with the detection target. At this time, the vertical position of the lower elevating spring holding member 385 may be appropriately selected so that the protrusion output of the button body 351 is made different. As a result, when the button body 351 projects upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button body 351 strongly contacts, something good for the player may occur. It is possible to increase the player's expectation of the game. Therefore, according to the rush output adjusting mechanism 380, depending on the game state (for example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005). By increasing or decreasing the thrust output of the button body 351, the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is possible to change the biasing force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to project the effect operation unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it is different from the original use. Since various stresses will act on the compression coil spring, there is a risk that the internal tissue will deteriorate early and be damaged. On the other hand, in the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the projection output of the effect operation unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the up and down springs 365 by moving the up and down spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Since the urging force) is adjusted, unreasonable stress does not act on the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to reduce early deterioration of the elevating spring 365, and the effect operation unit unit 350 can be provided. It is possible to stably project over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 and the like. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board, the button outer decoration board, and the button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. 58A is a front view of the dish unit in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and is provided with an effect operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed. The contact operation part 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation part 303 (button body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state where the pressing operation section 303 (effect operation section unit 350) capable of protruding upward is inclined such that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300. This makes it easier for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the effect operation unit 301.

In the normal state, the production operation unit 300 has the pressing operation unit 303 (the production operation unit unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the production operation unit unit 350 has the production effect. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament and can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 57, the effect operation unit 300 has an effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 arranged below the unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350). An annular button outer decoration substrate 355 is arranged inside the outer periphery of the pressing operation portion 303, and a button middle decoration substrate 364 is further arranged inside thereof. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged with the button inside decoration board 364 as the center, and the button outside decoration board 355 and the operation operation unit outer circumference decoration board 320 in this order outward. The LED 355a inside the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the button outer decoration substrate 355 is arranged below the contact detection body 352. However, since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, it has a light-transmitting property. Since it has, the light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (on the player side).

In the effect operation unit 300, the annular unit upper cover 312 can be illuminated and decorated by the LED 320a of the effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320. In addition, the LED 355a of the outside-button decoration substrate 355 allows the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated near the periphery of the upper surface and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the LED 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364 can make the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 emit light.

The plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the middle button decoration substrate 364 are arranged in a row on the circumference, and therefore, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are concentrically arranged, a light emission effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or light from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303 is emitted. It is possible to show the luminescent effect that converges to the player.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 58( a ), the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) is at a lowered position where the upper surface of the operation unit 300 is aligned with the surface of the unit upper cover 312. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 to be touched is displayed. It is displayed on the device 1600, and voice, sound effects, etc. are output. Then, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the process moves to the next presentation stage. When the contact is detected, the button main body 351 is illuminated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 or the LED 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364 to recognize that the contact operation is accepted by the player. The touch operation unit 302 may be given an operation feeling. At this time, the expectation level for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, such as a “big hit” game) is expected to the player by the emission color of the button body 351, the emission brightness, the emission pattern, and the like. You may make it suggest.

Alternatively, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356 when the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the touch operation unit 302, and to make the player strongly recognize that the touch operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may give a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation for the game. good.

Further, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image prompting the player to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a sound or a sound effect is output. After that, when the contact detector 352 detects the contact of the player (the hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) up and down. It is caused to pop up (pop up) by the biasing force of the spring 365. More specifically, when the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift cam member 371 counterclockwise in a plan view in a normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 causes the cam portion 371a (first cam) to move. 371b), the effect operation unit unit 350 (the button body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 vigorously projects upward by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. Then, as the button body 351 projects upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351. This can greatly amaze the player, and It can attract a lot of interest.

After that, the process shifts to the effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303), and the player is allowed to enjoy the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button body 351 (rendering operation unit unit 350) is opened. When the button body 351 is moved downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed triggered by the pressing operation to entertain the player by the player participation type effect.

At the time of the above-mentioned production, the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 strengthens or weakens the projection output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to project. May be suggested. Also, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed.

In the effect of causing the effect operation unit unit 350 to project, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is pressed. The main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, since the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers or the like and is given a shock, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may make the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion output.

Further, in the effect of causing the effect operation unit unit 350 to protrude, the touch detection body 352 causes the player's finger or the like to fall outside the protruding range of the button body 351 protruding upward within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the button body 351 is approaching. Thereby, since the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers or the like, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the projection output of the button body 351 so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation for the game due to the strength of the wind pressure on the player's fingers or the like. You may do it.

Further, as the effect of projecting the effect operation unit unit 350, the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is caused to project with a strong projecting force by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects vigorously and a sound (projecting sound) is generated, so that the projecting sound surprises the player. You can When the button body 351 is caused to project with a weak projecting force by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects quietly, which makes it difficult for the player to notice the projecting of the button body 351. The player can be surprised by the fact that the button main body 351 projects before it is noticed.

As the effect after projecting the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is weakened by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is generally used. You may make it perform the same effect as a pressing button similar to a pressing button. Alternatively, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 may be increased by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the player may be made to perform an effect of pressing the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as the effect after projecting the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), an effect may be executed in which a contact operation is performed on the protruding button body 351. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has the downwardly extending piece 352a extending downwardly, the side surface of the button body 351 may be contact-operated. Further, at this time, it is desirable that the urging force of the elevating spring 365 be strengthened by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation The contact operation of the portion 302) can be easily performed.

In the above description, as the effect of projecting the effect operation unit unit 350, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction to cause the button base 354 to rotate. The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d so that the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the lift cam member 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is moved up and down. The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in plan view by the drive motor 367, and the elevating cam member 371 in the middle of the third cam 371e. Alternatively, the button body 351 may be stopped from projecting upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lower elevating spring holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365.

As described above, even when the button main body 351 is made to project partway by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button main body 351 can be pressed and operated, and the button main body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Thus, the player participation type production can be enjoyed by the player. In this case, the protrusion amount can be made different above the button body 351 depending on the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, so that the expectation level for the game can be suggested according to the protrusion amount of the button body 351. Can entertain the player.

Further, as an effect of pressing the projected operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), after the operation unit unit 350 is protruded, the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the elevating spring 365. To the minimum state. As a result, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is enhanced to perform the pressing operation. Can entertain. In addition, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is set to an appropriate position in the vertical direction in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbols that have been randomly selected. The biasing force may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can press the effect operation unit unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that it is possible to entertain the player due to the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit unit 350, and more versatile. The effect can be presented and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detection object can be detected at a plurality of contact steps (approaching steps) with respect to the contact of the player's fingers or the like with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351). It is also possible to provide a plurality of levels of threshold values according to the capacitance of 352 and change the effect according to each level. That is, attention is paid to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the player's finger or the like approaches the button body 351 (contact detection body 352), and a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. It is also possible to detect in multiple stages by providing the above, and to utilize it for production. Specifically, for example, the player's fingers and the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, the player's fingers and the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within the predetermined distance from the button body 351, and the game is played. The touch detection sensor main body 358 presents a variety of effects to the player by changing the effect according to each step, such as a step in which a person's finger or the like is in contact with the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to prevent a decrease in interest.

In the above-described embodiment, as a normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the lowered position and the lower elevating spring holding member. Although the state in which 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56(a), the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved to the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved. It may be moved downward. As a result, in the normal state, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed, it is possible to suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the elevating spring 365. Further, it is possible to suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower elevating spring holding member 385 by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that is strongly compressed.

As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for player participation type effects of various patterns, it is possible to entertain various effects to the player and make the player tired. It can be made difficult and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

By the way, in the effect operation unit 300, a ring-shaped (two arcs are combined) effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is provided on the upper part of the spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation unit outer circumference is provided. A contact detection sensor body 358 is provided in the effect operation unit unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit unit 350, a button inner decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting the electrostatic capacitance, when the performance operation unit unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode). ) Approaches the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 or the button inner decoration substrate 364, and the electrostatic capacitance of the sensor electrode changes due to the approach of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 or the button inner decoration substrate 364, and the contact detection sensor The main body 358 may make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 and between the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. Accordingly, by moving the effect operation unit unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 or the button inner decoration substrate 364 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358. And the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 or the button inside decoration board 364, the shield connected to the ground (GND) whose distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change. It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in electrostatic capacitance due to the approach of the button inner decoration substrate 364, and prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor body 358.

[3-5f. Another Embodiment of Dish Unit]
Next, a plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and FIG. 60B is a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies in FIG. And (c) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching section is provided between the plate unit and the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body in the front side and back side of an operation unit etc. FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a touch detection body having a decorative property, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. 59 to 61, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, on the lower side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350, the contact detection body 352 is divided into the left and right sides of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, and The contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his/her fingers or the like from the left side to the right side, first, if the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the contact detection body left 390L changes and the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes detection, and the capacitance of the contact detection body right 390R does not change, and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains undetected. Becomes When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitances of both the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R change, whereby the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body. Both of the right 391R are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button main body 351, the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body left 390L returns to the original value and the contact detection sensor main body left 391L becomes non-detection, and the contact detection body right 390R electrostatic. The capacitance has changed and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R remains detected.

As described above, the movement of the player's finger or the like is caused by the combination of the detection/non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, and the change pattern. Can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a contact operation with more various movements, and to present the player with a player participation type effect that enables the contact operation unit 302 to perform various contact operations. The player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 can be further enjoyed. It should be noted that if a contact detector is added, it becomes possible to detect a more complicated motion.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor body 392. According to this embodiment, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects the contact of a human body or the like with any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state where the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at different positions. can do.

For example, by disposing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in a distributed manner inside (bottom side) of the button body 351, even if a finger or the like of the player touches any part of the surface of the button body 351 The contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and the detection accuracy for the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 may not be touched by the player in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a part where the player may be injured, or another player may be annoyed). It may be provided in a certain portion, a portion where fraudulent acts may be performed, etc.), and when any one of the contact detection bodies 393 detects a human body or the like, a warning or a warning may be notified.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b), between one contact detection sensor body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, switching is performed to connect only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor body 392. This is an example in which the section 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect the contact of the human body or the like only at a desired portion (contact detection body 352). .. As the switching unit 394, "switching by a switching circuit including a relay or a transistor", "switching by another electronic circuit", "movable member (for example, a movable plate left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c)) The unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300) are switched according to the movement."

For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type effect in which the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are sequentially touched is executed. At some times, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is switched in the order of touching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection body 393 detects whether the player's finger or the like has touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a player-participation-type effect having a high game property by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first operation is performed on the front side of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact detection body 393a is provided, and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 300 and the like are projected forward, When the switching unit 394 connects the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392, and when the performance operation unit 300 or the like is retracted, the switching unit 394 connects the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392. You may make it switch so that it may do.

Accordingly, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detection body 393a detects the contact or approach of the player, and stops the effect operation unit 300 or the like from moving forward. To As a result, it is possible to prevent the production operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and avoid giving the player uncomfortable feeling. be able to.

On the other hand, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and in the state in which the player's finger or the like is inserted, the effect is produced. When the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect operation unit 300 that has been moved to the front is moved to the rear, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detection body 393b to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped and the finger or the like is separated from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. Is notified to the player, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is in the non-detection state, the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 and the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the outer shape of the contact detection body 395 for detecting the contact of a player's finger or the like is made star-shaped to have a decorative property (design property). The shape of the contact detection body 395 having the decorative property is not limited to the star shape, but a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a predetermined item is imitated. The shape may be a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame shape, or the like. As a result, since the contact detection body 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has a decorative property (design), the contact detection body 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed by punching metal, but the contact detection body is not limited to this, and the contact detection body may be a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as the above can be obtained. It should be noted that the contact detection body is preferably provided on the back surface side of the transparent front surface member so as not to be directly touched by a player's finger or the like, and it is possible to avoid wear of the contact detection body and to provide a tactile sensation by the surface member. It can be smooth.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button inner decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61(b), The contact detection body 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and the decoration body 398 may be provided below the contact detection body 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be improved and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. it can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 prevents the decorative body 398 provided below from being visually recognized. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397. good.

Further, the contact detector 352 may be formed so that it cannot be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detection body include "a body formed of a transparent member", "a body formed so as to be integrated with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body", and the like. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, and therefore does not detect the contact of a finger or the like with the player or perform the contact operation. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and the player's finger or the like comes in contact with or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By projecting to, the player becomes aware of the presence of the contact detection body 352 (contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, and entertains the player to suppress a decrease in interest. You can

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62A is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 62B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 62C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Wu in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 which is attached to the left outside of the door window 101a in the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 421. And a door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a vertically arranged at a certain interval are mounted on the front surface and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. So as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed up and down at a certain interval on the front surface are mounted, and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. A left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421; a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423; The door frame left side decorative body 426 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front sides of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guiding member 427 that guides light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 to the front, and upper and lower parts of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. From the left side middle light guiding member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction to the front, and from the first LED 423a below the center in the up-down direction of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. And a left-side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light in the forward direction.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two kinds of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, and a part of the inner layer 3a is the outer side. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. The LED 422b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the decoration substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, that is, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the decoration substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 422a having the second LEDs 422b provided on the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) the second LEDs 422b. Further, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of emitting light in a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are three sets of two pieces on the top, three pieces from the third to fifth pieces from the top, and three pieces from the sixth to eighth pieces from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups in full color. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

On the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, although not shown, two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. The wiring cable consisting of the electric wire of is connected. Then, when the LED driver 422c of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 is formed in the shape of a strip plate that extends vertically, and the right side is formed to be uneven. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. The LED 423b is mounted. In addition, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame.

In this door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, a total of 18 full-color LEDs including six first LEDs 423a and twelve second LEDs 423b are mounted. Further, the first LED 423a having the second LEDs 423b provided on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Further, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into two groups, each of which is two in sequence from the top. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. No. 3 and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems and can emit 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 sets and 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 sets in full color. Thus, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

The door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c, although not shown. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. The wiring cable consisting of the electric wire of is connected. Then, when the LED driver 423c of the lower left side decorative board 423c of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left upper reflector 424 is formed with a through hole 424a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending forward and backward is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a contacts the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the front side around the through hole 424a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 holds the light-guiding shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting a cylindrical light-guiding shaft portion 427a of the left-side upper light-guiding member 427 described later. Is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 which penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and projects forward, the second side of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 facing through the through holes 424a on both upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is applied to the light guide shaft portion 427a with an equal amount of light from the upper and lower sides, and the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, in the left side upper reflector 424, a mounting hole for mounting the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The left side lower reflector 425 is formed with a through hole 425a penetrating forward and backward at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame lower left side decorative substrate 423, and also corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending forward and backward is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the front side around the through hole 425a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

The columnar light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. Accordingly, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 which penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and project forward, through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 that faces the door frame 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a is evenly illuminated from above and below the door frame left side, and the door frame left side. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a or the light guide shaft portion 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

In the left side lower reflector 425, an attachment hole for attaching to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decoration 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating forward and backward along the center of the width in the left-right direction in the vertical direction at regular intervals. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding barrel 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 and the holding barrel 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, The respective tips of are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 further has a decoration portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a and has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape. is doing.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , Made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are vertically provided at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left side upper reflector 424. The light guide shaft portion 427a extends in the front-rear direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426, and the front end surface thereof is the door frame left side. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit light brightly.

The left-side center light guide member 428 includes three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are vertically provided at regular intervals so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426, and the front end surface is the door frame left side. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. The left-side center light guide member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left-side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a, and irradiate the light outward from the tip, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit light brightly.

The left side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are vertically provided at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface is the door frame left side. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. This left side lower light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit light brightly.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295. In addition, the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same as the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the up-down direction slightly protrudes forward from the lower portion, and a portion near the lower end is gently curved to the right. This door frame left side unit 420 has its upper end located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and its lower end below the door window 101a, and the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. Is located above the speaker opening 211b. The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are located at a position somewhat rearward of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Since the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the light is radiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. The left side decoration body 426 can be uniformly illuminated.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided at the position rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. Light), so that the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit light in a dot shape brighter than the other portions.

Further, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, and the left side middle light guide member 428. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decoration body 426 from the rear, the shadows are hard to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 is evenly arranged. It is possible to decorate the surface with light emission.

Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 is provided with a decoration portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. Accordingly, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the door frame left side decoration body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b. Since the portion on which the shadow is projected has the decoration portion 426b, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to see, and the door frame left The appearance of the side decoration body 426 in the light emission decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from back. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 69 is a sectional view taken along the line A-E in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 which is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a in the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. And a door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a that are vertically arranged at a certain interval are mounted on the front surface and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. Door frame right side lower decorative board 433, in which a plurality of first LEDs 433a installed up and down at a certain interval on the front surface are mounted, and door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and the door frame right attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. And a side decoration body 435.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guiding member 436 that guides light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 first. The right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from one LED 433a to the front side.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the left side surface decoration body 438, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438, and the door frame right side base body 431 so as to close the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. A light-transmitting right-side left lens 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of right-side left lenses 439, which are covered and attached so as to cover the right side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and which penetrate right and left in a predetermined shape. The door frame right side right surface decoration body 440 having the decoration hole 440a, and the door frame right side right surface decoration body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 are provided between the door frame right side right surface surface. The light-transmitting right-side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440.

The left and right sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend vertically with a substantially constant width. The rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side bends rearward when the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the vertical center. After extending diagonally rearward, it curves vertically in the vicinity of the lower portion and extends vertically to the lower end.

The door frame right side base 431 includes the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 (the decoration portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens 439). A plurality of reflector portions 431a, which are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end, are provided at the height of the decorative portion 441a). The rear end sides of the reflectors 431a, which are the insides of the decorative portions 439a and 441a, are inclined toward the side surface side and the bottom surface is curved.

Further, the door frame right side base 431 is a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided in the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 at the rear side with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to the (decoration portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decoration portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion other than the decoration portion 439a and the portion inside the decoration portion 441a. , It penetrates in the left-right direction (it is recessed from the left and right sides and is connected to each other).

The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 is provided with left and right light emitted rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. By reflecting in a direction, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are illuminated and decorated (see FIG. 70 and the like).

The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. The LED 432b is mounted. In addition, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame.

On the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted. Further, the first LED 432a having the second LEDs 432b provided on the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. In addition, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are in three sets of two above, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

Since the first LED 432a is divided into two sets, the second LED 432b is divided into three sets, and the third LED 432c is divided into two sets, each of the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 432b, Since the third LED 432c and the third LED 432c are caused to emit full-color light, there are a total of 21 systems including 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the 21 systems described above, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 described later is provided. A total of 24 systems of 3 systems for one group above the third LED 433c divided into 2 groups are controlled.

Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. Then, when the LED driver 432d of the decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received in accordance with the command. The four first LEDs 432a divided into three sets, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three sets, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two sets, and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 with 2 The two third LEDs 433c of the upper group of the grouped groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame lower right side lower decorative substrate 433 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. The LED 433b is mounted. In addition, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433 at intervals vertically. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433.

On this door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs including six first LEDs 433a, twelve second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c are mounted. Further, the first LED 433a having the second LEDs 433b provided on the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between the second LEDs 433b). Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame lower right side decorative substrate 433, the six first LEDs 433a are sequentially divided into two sets from the top, three sets each. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. No. 3 and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is divided into three sets of the first LEDs 433a, four sets of the second LEDs 433b, and two sets of the third LEDs 433c, respectively. Therefore, the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, Since the third LED 433c and the third LED 433c are caused to emit full-color light, respectively, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame lower right side decoration board 433 can control only up to 24 systems, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 has two sets of the third LEDs 433c. Of the above, one set of three systems is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the remaining 24 systems (the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). The lower two) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the door frame lower right side decorative board 433. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 supplies two electric powers for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is a ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected to one clock wire. When the LED driver 433d of the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received in accordance with the command. Each of the six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower set divided into two sets. Light can be emitted with an appropriate color and intensity for each.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with a through hole 434a penetrating forward and backward at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. At the same time, a tubular holding tube 434b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 434a contacts the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 or the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The periphery of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 has a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, inserted therein. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that pass through the holding cylinder 434b and project forward, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 facing the through holes 434a on both upper and lower sides thereof, and the like. The light from the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is applied to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a with an equal amount of light from the upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of the 435.

In the right side reflector 434, an attachment hole for attaching to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decoration 435 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating forward and backward along the center of the width in the horizontal direction in the vertical direction at regular intervals. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The tip ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. The door frame right side decoration body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration body 426. Further, the door frame right side decoration body 435 further has a decoration portion 435b which has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. is doing.

The right side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending in the front-rear direction in a column shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , Made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided from above the right side reflector 434 at a fixed interval in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the front end surface thereof is the door frame right side. The surface of the decorative body 435 coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This right side upper light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light brightly.

The lower right-side light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending in the front-rear direction in a column shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , Made of transparent material. The six light guide shaft portions 437a are provided from below the right side reflector 434 at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. The surface of the decorative body 435 coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This right side lower light guide member 437 can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate it outward from the tip end, The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light brightly.

The door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating in a left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The front end side of the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 is formed in two colors by synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 is formed in two colors by two kinds of resins of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b like the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, so that a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438, and protrudes leftward to decorate the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a matches the outer surface (left side) of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 in a state of being fitted into the decoration hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. The decoration portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decoration portion 439a facing the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 has a radial pattern in which two colors are formed in the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. It looks similar to the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative portion 439a that is light-emitted and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically and has a plurality of decoration holes 440a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (a radial pattern shape). Further, the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a key hole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130. The door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the entire height of the door frame 3. Further, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed such that the front end side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in two colors by using synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 includes an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438. The two layers are molded in two colors, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, so that a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440, and projects rightward to protrude to the right of the door frame. The side right side surface decoration body 440 has a decoration portion 441a that fits into the decoration hole 440a from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a coincides with the outer surface (right side) of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. The decoration portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decoration portion 441a facing the decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 has a radial pattern formed in two colors in the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. It looks like the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 441a that is light-emitted and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 is the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the side base 421, and outside the circular or radial pattern of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440. The color of the portion is formed to be the same as the color of the portion of the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side base 421 outside the circular or radial pattern.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the up-down direction protrudes forward more than a portion of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side at the same height. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 largely projects forward from the top to a portion at a height of approximately half, forming a partition. As a result, in the island facility of the game hall, it is difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a partition shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, making it difficult for another player to see the entire game area 5a. By making it difficult for the player to feel like being seen by another player, the other player can play the game without hesitation.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a position somewhat rearward of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Since the light is emitted from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them, the light is emitted to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate provided at a position rearward from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided (guided) to the front by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 to guide the door frame. The part of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a dot shape brighter than the other parts.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 causes the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 to emit light, thereby reflecting the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. Through the 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted in the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are fitted. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 that is present can be decorated with light emission. In addition, part of the left and right side surfaces of the partition-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the portions of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) can be illuminated and decorated, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be conspicuous and has a high appealing power to the player.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to lighten and decorate the door frame right side decoration body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side. With the third LED 433c on the rear surface side of the lower decoration substrate 433, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration body 435 are illuminated and decorated. Therefore, due to the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b causes the rear door. The frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 are illuminated to perform light emission decoration, and light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiates the front door frame right side decoration body 435. By doing so, it is possible to prevent light emission and decoration. Accordingly, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 on the rear side can be made completely independent to perform light emission decoration. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting the player with a luminous effect having a higher effect.

The door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. And the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, since the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with light from the second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides with an equal amount of light, the door frame right side decoration body 435 is provided. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are hard to see, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly light-emitted and decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is configured such that the door frame right side decoration body 435 has a decoration portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. .. Accordingly, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected by the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadows are projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the portion where the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are located, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be difficult to see and the appearance of the door frame right side decoration body 435 in light emission decoration is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 that is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, and covers both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that is connected to the lower end of the.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456 which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. (See FIG. 72).

The door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and the front of the door frame top base 451. A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover above the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top top cover 452 has a semicircular arc shape that projects forward in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends in the left-right direction in a semi-circular shape along the front end of the top top cover 452 in a plan view. Further, the door frame top decoration 453 has a front surface formed in a semi-circular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. As a result, the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decoration board 455 are full-color LEDs. In this door frame top central decoration substrate 455, the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. In this door frame top left decoration substrate 456, the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 can be light-embellished by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. In this door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 can be made to emit light by appropriately lighting the plurality of LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters, and output the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, the door frame top right decoration board 457, the top center speaker, and the top side speaker, and the door frame sub unit of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are sunk from the front to a position behind the inside of the upper portions of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. Has been done. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers and the pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, 71, and the like. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in a state where the two-color molded outer layer is opaque in the door frame, and FIG. 71(b) is the outer layer with the inner layer left unchanged in (a). FIG. 5 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the state in which is transparent. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, a unit upper cover 312 and a button body 351 of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a half tube shape. Since the door window 101a is formed, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the unit upper cover 312, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, the production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame. Since the right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, these decorative boards By making the LED of the device properly emit light, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, or the player can be made to see the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper dish 201 in the front-rear direction is attached at the center in the left-right direction. Accordingly, in the dish unit 200, since the large spherical performance operation unit 300 is located in the center, the appearance impact can be enhanced, and the performance operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302 or pressing operation of the performance operation unit 300 can be improved. It is possible to make the operation unit 303) stand out.

In addition, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous with each other, thereby forming a single sphere, and thus the player. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be operated, and the effect operation unit 300 formed of a huge sphere allows the player to look at other things at a glance. This pachinko machine can be recognized as a pachinko machine 1 different from the pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can enhance the appealing power to the player, and this pachinko machine is a pachinko machine for playing. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

Further, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302). The upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) faces the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible for the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the dish unit 200 is the effect operation unit 301 to easily see the whole effect operation unit 301, and You can look big. In addition, it is possible to strongly inspire the player to operate the giant spherical effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to increase the expectation for execution of the player participation type operation that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player can actively operate the effect operation unit 301, and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 makes the player participation type effect entertaining. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Subsequently, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5. In FIG. 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns provided on the outer surface are colored in two colors by using two kinds of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The exterior portion of the door frame 3 where the pattern is applied is two-color molded with two kinds of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

For example, when the door frame right side unit 430 is described as an example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), if the inner layer 3a is provided with a honeycomb-shaped pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the inner portion of the circular pattern is inside. The honeycomb-shaped pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the parts other than the pattern, and the outer appearance is an appearance in which a circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-shaped pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and a relatively circular or The radial pattern becomes hard to see. That is, the outer appearance is such that the honeycomb-shaped pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 which is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decoration portion 441a fitted in the decoration hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main member forming the exterior of the door frame 3 is formed by two-color molding, the material used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (composite) By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the light transmittance, and the like, the appearance can be greatly changed even when the shape is unchanged.

Therefore, for example, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen at the time of a minor change, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b may be changed for each manufacturing lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots may be shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island facility to give a colorful feeling to the player. It is possible to increase the appealing power for.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the case where the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 of two-color molding is shown. The frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the circular or radial pattern is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various patterns may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 and other decoration bodies are two-color molded (multicolor molded) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and a polka dot pattern decoration is performed by the two-color molding. Since the decoration is formed into a desired shape at the same time as the decoration is applied to the decoration, a desired shape can be obtained like the decoration of a conventional pachinko machine. Since it is not necessary to apply a desired decoration by coating or the like after forming it, it is possible to reduce the labor for decoration and suppress an increase in cost.

Moreover, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, in the case of forming a polka dot pattern decoration by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot pattern circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle are respectively light-transmitting. When formed in the same color with different ratios, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, so that the circle with a polka dot pattern becomes difficult to see, and the appearance does not appear to be decorated with a polka dot pattern. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b The polka dot circles are now clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background with white polka dots. As described above, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used. The cost can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used. If you change the combination of synthetic resin used for each lot and ship different pachinko machines 1 of different lots to the same game hall and install them in a line at the island facility, make the island facility colorful Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal that can give a strong impact to the player who is traveling around in the game hall and can attract the player.

Further, a handle cover 295 having a decoration formed by two-color molding with a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances is provided on a portion of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a facing the front, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438, and the door frame right side right side surface surface decoration body 440 are provided, so that the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decoration body to improve the appearance. You can

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a may be difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. This makes it possible to relatively clearly see the border of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a, and to make the decoration clearly visible.

Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is reduced. The inner layer 3a should not be seen through from the outside as a low rate, and when the model is changed, a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. As a result, it is possible to greatly change the perspective of the decoration of the ornament, and it is possible to easily change the appearance (decoration) without changing the shape of the ornament.

Further, as described above, the inner layer 3a can be made invisible by the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b and is transparent to the outer layer 3b when the model is changed. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a different synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the ornamental body can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the ornamental body. , It is possible to suppress an increase in cost required for model change.

Further, inside the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board which can emit light. Since the inner layer 3a is provided with the third LED 433c of 433 and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than others, the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 The part of the layer 3a (polka dot part) can be brightly illuminated and decorated, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be illuminated and decorated to improve the appearance and to the right of the player's door frame. It is possible to enjoy the light-emitting decoration of the side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Also, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c with which the outer layer 3b is irradiated through the inner layer 3a can also cause the outer layer 3b to emit light. The entire left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right surface decoration body 440 can be illuminated and decorated, and the door frame right side left surface surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right surface surface decoration body 440 can be displayed neatly and played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting the interest of the person can be provided.

In addition, as described above, the decoration of the decorations such as the door frame right side left side surface decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration body 440 is a two-color molding (multicolor molding of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances). Since it is formed by molding, LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are caused to emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface, the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used, and the like. The decoration that can be seen when there is no light and the decoration that can be seen when the LED is emitting light can be different, and the decoration can be changed to strongly attract the player's interest. More specifically, for example, two-color molding will be described as an example of multi-color molding. When a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence state, only the portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion of the inner layer 3a where the holes are formed, so that the surface of the outer layer 3b is not exposed to the inside The hole shape of the layer 3a becomes visible, and the exposed portion of the inner layer 3a and the hole portion can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not illuminated can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated and decorated. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit green (or white), both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion of the surface are illuminated and decorated. The parts to be illuminated can be different, and the decoration to be illuminated can be changed. As described above, the decoration of the ornamental body can be changed by the light emission of the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. Further, by causing the LED to emit light in accordance with the game state, it is possible to change the decoration of the ornamental body so that the player has a chance or changes the driving operation (for example, "right hitting"). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be made to suggest and which can produce various effects.

In addition, since the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 provided on both left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different protrusion amounts in the front-rear direction, Since it is possible to have different impressions (visual appearance) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the left front side and the right front side, the pachinko machine 1 is moving around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player passes the front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance is different from that at the time of the previous migration, which attracts interest to the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 can be attached to the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal and can attract a player who is traveling around the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. ..

[3-10. LED arrangement and system in door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, which drives the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by being rotated by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b with the central hub portion 195a extending outward, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b. And has an appearance similar to the steering wheel of a car.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with a handle front lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, there is provided a handle cover decoration substrate 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface.

The handle decoration board 184 is one in the center, three are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six are provided at constant intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10 The individual LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric shape. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by broken lines in FIG. 72, and two in the upper left of the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, which are respectively connected by the broken lines. , And two on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LED 184a divided into these 5 groups is controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and the LED 184a of each group can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a line at intervals in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 72, these twelve LEDs 293a are connected to the lower left two from the center, the two left, the upper left two, the upper right two, and the right two. It is divided into 6 sets, 2 at the bottom right. The LEDs 293a divided into these 6 groups are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and the LEDs 293a of each group can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

In this way, since the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293 are provided on the handle 195, a light-emission effect in which light rotates around the handle 195 and a direction toward the center of the handle 195 are provided. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emission effect in which the light is spread toward the outside of the handle 195. In addition, the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293 allows the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 to be illuminated and decorated.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the rendering operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side decoration 426, and the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decoration body 435 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are in a half-tube shape. Since the door window 101a is formed, the player can see a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, the plate left decorative board 273 behind the plate left decorative body 271 that surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the plate right decorative board 278 behind the plate right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decorative body 435 A side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided toward the front.

More specifically, the plate left decoration board 273 has four LEDs 273a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and LEDs 273a of the plate right decoration board 278 described later to emit light. (Not shown). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two groups are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each group of LEDs 273a can emit light in a full color of an appropriate color.

The plate right decoration board 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled by 6 systems by the LED driver of the plate left decoration substrate 273, and each group of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

On the decoration frame 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are mounted side by side between the first LEDs 422a. Eight second LEDs 422b and a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are provided to emit light, and an LED driver 422c is provided. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected to the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided into three sets, up to the first three. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and the first LED 422a and the second LED 422 of each group are controlled. The LED 422b can emit light in an appropriate full color.

On the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are mounted side by side between the first LEDs 423a. It is provided with 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for making a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, one by one in sequence from the top two as indicated by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top, and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the one-dot chain line in FIG. Are divided into four sets, that is, three from the top to the ninth and three from the top to the twelfth. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by the LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LED 423a and the second LED 423a in each group are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in an appropriate full color.

On the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, four first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 432a. It is provided with eight second LEDs 432b that are mounted and four third LEDs 432c that are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. In addition, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 emits a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 to emit light. The LED driver 432d of FIG. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected to one another by a dashed-dotted line, the second two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided into three sets, up to the first three. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the one-dot chain line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third divided into two sets in the door frame lower right side decorative board 433. One set of the third LEDs 433c on the upper side of the LEDs 433c is controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set have an appropriate color. It can emit light in full color.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 has six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. And an LED driver 433d for emitting light. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, each of which is a set of two in order from the top, as shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. Further, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth as shown by the dashed line in FIG. Are divided into four sets, that is, three from the top to the ninth and three from the top to the twelfth. Furthermore, the four rear third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by broken lines in FIG. Six first LEDs 433a divided into three sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and one lower two third LEDs 433c divided into two sets The LED driver 433d controls 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in a full color of an appropriate color.

In the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The board 432 and the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are also different from each other in the front-back direction. .

The door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are mounted on the front surface of each. The number of the one LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b and the number of the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b are the same as each other, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72). System connected by chain line and two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the LED lighting pattern for performing the light emission effect.

The door frame top central decoration board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, an LED 455a, an LED 456a of the door frame top left decoration board 456, and an LED 457a of the door frame top right decoration board 457. And an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two LEDs from the left, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver in nine systems, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color of an appropriate color.

The door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a that are mounted on the front surface in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in an appropriate full color.

The door frame top right decoration board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a which are mounted on the front surface in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in an appropriate full color.

According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432. And light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the left side lower guide member. The light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 allow the opening portion of the door frame left side decoration 426. It is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, the player can be made to see the luminous effect of brightly emitting light in a dot shape on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, and in a dot shape not present in the past pachinko machines. The player can be made to be “hatched” by the light emission effect of shining a spot light.

Further, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative substrate 273, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative substrate 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Second LED 423b of decoration board 423, second LED 432b of door frame right side upper decoration board 432, second LED 433b of door frame right side lower decoration board 433, LED 455a of door frame top central decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board The LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are appropriately made to emit light so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and the light is emitted so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown or shown to the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 72 executes a light emission effect of spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. It is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 emit light in a planar shape (surface emission) by the system of LEDs connected by the one-dot chain line in FIG. You can

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided by the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. With the shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, light is guided to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and from there the front side. Since the irradiation is performed on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, compared to the general surface of the opening frame 426a and the opening 435a, it is possible to make the spot light emission with high brightness and high brightness. .. At this time, since the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426. Also, even if the area of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 is made to emit spot light with high brightness, the glare does not make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a facing the door window 101a, and the game is performed through the door window 101a. It is possible to visually recognize the game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a in a good state.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are projected forward of the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening portion 426a and the opening portion 435a are connected to the ridge portion that is the front end of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 projecting forward (connecting the front ends projecting forward in an arc shape in plan view). Since it is provided on the vertical line), spot emission light is not emitted to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the light of the spot emission in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is reflected toward the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and the light is emitted from the rear side of the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a does not become difficult to see, and the spot light emission with high brightness can direct the interest of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the spot-light-emitting portion is provided on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 that project forward outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot-light-emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emission part is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot-emission light. As a result, when spot light emission is performed on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, high-luminance spot emission light can be seen by other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine in the game hall can be selected for selection. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of attracting a player who is traveling around to the pachinko machine 1.

The spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spotting the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are sandwiched on both sides. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides sandwiching the light guide pin (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) that guides the light of the spot LED. Since the surface LEDs are in the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation section 302 in the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is provided. The effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is divided into two, a front decoration substrate 321 and a rear decoration substrate 322.

Eighteen LEDs 320a of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration substrate 321 of the effect operation unit outer periphery decoration substrate 320. The eighteen LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are provided such that six are spaced apart on the circumference close to the inner circumference and three are spaced apart on the middle circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration substrate 322 of the effect operation unit outer periphery decoration substrate 320. Of the 13 LEDs 320a of the rear decoration substrate 322, 4 LEDs are provided in 2 pieces at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and 3 LEDs are provided between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. It is provided at intervals on the circumference of the circle, and the remaining six pieces are provided at intervals of three on both sides of the arc on the circumference close to the outer circumference.

The eighteen LEDs 320a on the front decorative substrate 321 are three sets of two on the inner circumference, two on the inner circumference, and three on the middle circumference, as connected by a chain line in FIG. Is divided into three groups of one each, and nine groups on the outer circumference are divided into three groups of three in the circumferential direction, for a total of nine groups. In addition, the eighteen LEDs 320a of the rear decoration substrate 322 are connected in a two-dot chain line in FIG. 73, four on the inner circumference are two in pairs near the ends, and two on the middle circumference. There are three sets of three, one for each, and nine on the outer circumference, two for each of the three near the ends, for a total of seven sets. That is, in the effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 groups are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and the LEDs 320a of each group can emit light in full colors of appropriate colors.

According to the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, by appropriately emitting 31 pieces of the LEDs 320a of 48 systems, the effect operation section 301 emits light such that the light rotates or the light concentrates at the center. It is possible to show the player and a light-emitting effect in which light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the game area 5a extends vertically along the door window 101a outside one of the left and right sides of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a so as to have different protrusion amounts in the front-rear direction. A door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body are provided. Door frame left side upper decoration board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted behind each 435 and door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted A board 423, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and a second LED 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and a second LED 433b are mounted, Is provided, and guides the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 to the front. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member to be irradiated. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side The door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are formed by causing the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 to emit light. Light emission decoration (surface emission) can be performed in a planar shape, and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, they are radiated forward from their front ends (front end surfaces). Guide in the frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 A portion corresponding to the tip of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a can be made to emit light in a dot shape (spot light emission). ..

Therefore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 of the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a. The door frame left side decoration provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by appropriately emitting the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b. 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are entirely illuminated with light, or a part of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is illuminated with dots and the door frame left Since the side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be light-emitting decorated in a planar shape while part of them are light-emitting decorated, a variety of light-emitting effects can be shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and entertain the player, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the second LEDs 422b, the first LEDs 423a, and the second LEDs 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are divided, and the door frame right side The side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are symmetric with respect to each other and the system in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LEDs 432b, the first LEDs 433a, and the second LEDs 433b are separated from each other. Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the first LEDs 423a, the first LEDs 432a, and the first LEDs 433a and the plurality of second LEDs 422b, the second LEDs 423b, the second LEDs 432b, and the second LEDs 433b are different systems, the door frame left side Lighting patterns of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b on the side of the decorative body 426, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the side of the door frame right side decorative body 435. When creating the data of, for example, the data for the door frame left side decoration body 426 side is diverted to the data for the door frame right side decoration body 435 side, or the door frame left side decoration body 426 side and the door frame Since it is possible to use the same flow data as the right side decoration body 435 side, or the like, it is possible to simplify the time and effort required to create the lighting pattern data. ) It becomes easier to construct more complicated lighting pattern data, and it is possible to show the player various luminescent effects of the lighting pattern to the player, and it is possible to show various luminescent effects with high effect to the player. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a sufficient effect on the light emission effect in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the 101a.

In addition, since the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b that are provided with the first LED 422a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a in between are in the same system. , The first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) are sandwiched. Since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light guide shaft portion 427a by the light from each of the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b is guided. The optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are thinned so as to be cancelled, and are projected on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly light-emitted and decorated.

Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which are light-emitted and decorated by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the first LED 423a. A part corresponding to the front end of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a is illuminated and decorated with dots by the one LED 432a and the first LED 433a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as emitting light in spots while emitting light in a plane, and it emits bright dots. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player by light emitting effects, etc., and it is possible to make the player "hat" by the light emitting effect that emits a spot-like glittering spot light that is not available on conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

Further, one side (left side) of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the other side (right side) door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower. Since the decoration board 433 and the decoration board 433 are asymmetrical with each other, at first glance, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and the door frame right Since the side lower decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to avoid making a mistake in the lower right side decorative substrate 433, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Next, the door frame 3 will be taken as an example to identify in detail the various decorative boards on which the LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1, mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 are shown. The side upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 will be described in detail as an example.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used as the decoration board on which the LEDs are mounted, and LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. other than white that are mounted on the decoration board are mounted on the rear surface side of the board. I am trying. Thereby, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is reflected to the front side so that the front decorative body and the like can be brightly illuminated and decorated, and the front side (player side) Makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the plate material of the substrate itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, different identifying portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that the respective decorative boards can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 includes a character identification unit 7a formed of characters such as Chinese characters, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, and model numbers, and a color identification unit 7b formed of different colors (shown by shading in FIG. 74). And have.

More specifically, as the character identifying portion 7a, the character "lower left" on the plate left decorative board 273, the character "lower right" on the plate right decorative board 278, and the upper left on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. Is "lower left" on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, "upper right" on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and "right lower" on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. On the door frame top central decoration board 455, the characters are "upper middle", on the door frame top left decoration board 456, the letters "upper left", and on the door frame top right decoration board 457, the letters "upper right". , Respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is provided over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is not provided on the entire rear surface, but is provided partially so as not to hinder the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. ..

The identification portion 7 is provided on the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a seal, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types provided in the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like. The decorative substrate may also be provided with the identification unit 7 such as the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the identification portion 7 (the character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to form a decoration board having a similar shape. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembling work, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembling.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the front side of the decorative board can be made white as much as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board can be used. Light can be reflected on the front side of the decoration board to make the decoration body and the like in the front lighter and brighter, and the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front side (player side), which makes it look good. I can do better.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification section 7b as the identification section 7 is provided over substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is possible to obtain a desired (desired color by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) It is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative substrate is a decorative substrate. Therefore, at the time of assembling, even if a plurality of types of decorative boards are overlapped, if a part of the decorative boards can be seen, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor required for the assembling work can be reduced. Can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification portion 7b is different for each decorative substrate, when preparing the decorative substrate required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly, the same color is used. When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identifying portion 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when there is not enough color in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is an unprepared decorative board. Therefore, when preparing a decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare the required number of decorative substrates, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, the time required for the assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identifying portion 7a as the identifying portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the character of the character identifying portion 7a. Thus, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front surface and the rear surface of each decorative substrate are white and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. Also, the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front side (the player side), the appearance of the decoration body can be improved, and the white front surface of the decoration board reflects the light from the LED forward. Therefore, it is possible to make the decoration body brighter and lighter, and it is possible to entertain the player with light emitting effect having a high effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front side (the player side). It is possible to prevent the appearance of the ornamental body (game machine) from being deteriorated by being visible, and to improve the appearance of the ornamental body (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional parts white (or yellow) so as to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the labor of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Effect of door frame]
According to the present embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at positions different from each other in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired portion where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of the player. And the contact detection sensor main body 392 are switched by the switching unit 394, so that when the player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. This means that the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, so that the player's approach to or contact with a desired portion can be detected. Predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, and the effect display control section 1512 according to the detection of the contact detection sensor body 392. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 in a desired portion are connected by the switching unit 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided in the other portion. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 provided in the other portion changes due to the player approaching or contacting the other portion, the contact detection body 393 is Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, it is possible to reliably detect only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at a desired portion without detecting the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393. Therefore, false detection can be prevented.

As described above, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions. Capacitance can be detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control section 1511, an effect display control section 1512, and the like. It is possible to reduce the number of channels required for detecting the approach or contact of the player in the control means, and relatively increase the number of channels that can be used for the effect. Therefore, since it is possible to control more effect means (for example, the movable decoration body, the light-emitting decoration body, the effect display device, etc.) by the control means, the player can be provided with a variety of effects by increasing the effect means. It can be presented, and the player can be prevented from getting tired, and the player can be fully entertained, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are respectively provided at a plurality of portions of the pachinko machine 1 which are not desired to be touched by the player, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at desired portions by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. Control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1512, etc. by connecting the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting the approach or contact of the player to a desired part. Since it becomes possible to leave predetermined cautions and alarms by means, it is possible to relatively monitor the number of channels that can be used for performance while monitoring a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor body 392. The number can be increased, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In addition, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the electrostatic capacitance by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor main body having the electronic parts such as the sensor IC and the output circuit can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the pachinko machine 1 looks good and appeals to the player. Can be increased.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has a connection terminal for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily assembled. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and only by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392, the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 are connected. Since it is possible to connect with the contact detection sensor main body 392, a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode, and the number of parts is reduced as compared with the case where the contact detection body 393 is connected via the conductive member. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the arrangement of the conductive member for connecting with the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom in disposing the 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

Further, since the switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided. When the player participation type production in which the plurality of distributed contact detection bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order is executed, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player sequentially touches. It is possible to detect whether or not the player touches the contact detection body 393 in order by switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the player. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can further entertain the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the button body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of a metal plate of a metal plate whose side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. Therefore, the button body via the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (effect operation unit unit 350).

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button outside decoration substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, and the effect operation unit ascend/descend. A predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button inner decoration board 364, and the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, so that the player is entertained by the effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350, a predetermined effect is output, so that the effect operation unit unit 350 is controlled by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. It can function as a contact operation unit. Since the player can press the production operation unit unit 350 that functions as the non-contact operation unit or the contact operation unit when the production operation unit unit 350 is projected, the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the press operation by the production operation unit unit 350. Since various production operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons that can only be pressed, and other pachinko machines. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player by making a distinction from the machine.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in response to the detection of the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the electrostatic capacitance is the contact detection body 352 (button main body 351). Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity threshold values and output different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player to the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) to the contact thereof in multiple stages, and thus to produce an effect corresponding to each stage. By doing so, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 for detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection including electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a part of the effect operation unit unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, since various operation operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation can be performed by the operation unit, the player participation type effect that enables the player operation operation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of production operations, it is possible to make the player less tired, and it is possible for the player to enjoy the player participation type production, which reduces the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 whose electrostatic capacity is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed therein, the player attaches to the button main body 351 by the plurality of holes. It is possible to reduce the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in a state where the contact detection body 352 is not approaching or touching, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in electrostatic capacitance, and thus the button of the contact detection body 352 can be increased. It is possible to widen the range of detecting the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range, so that the button body 351 (production operation unit unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is enlarged as in the above embodiment. When the contact detection body 352 has the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect. When requested, the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, so that the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350. The movement distance becomes shorter, the production operation unit unit 350 can be operated quickly, it is possible to make it difficult to miss the operation timing in the player participation type production, and it is possible to surely participate in the player participation type production. The effect can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. A light emission effect from the LED 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the light emission effect can be surely entertained by the player to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the touch detection body 352 is provided in the production operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) that can be pressed, the touch detection body made of punching metal that is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. The production operation unit unit 350 can be reinforced by 352, and even when the production operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or struck when the player performs a pressing operation, the production operation unit unit It is possible to make it difficult for 350 to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since it is possible to make the production operation unit unit 350 less likely to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, it is possible to allow the player to press the production operation unit unit 350 without being distracted and operate the production operation unit unit 350. It is possible to make the player participation type production more entertaining and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be made smaller than in the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same plate thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, it is possible to facilitate the installation of the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing, which is more appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant as compared with the expanded metal, so that the contact detection body 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to make the shape suitable for detecting the approach or contact of the player to the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350), and to realize the above-described operational effects reliably.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button main body 351 is formed. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching it, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by touching the contact detection body 352 in which a plurality of holes are formed, and at the same time, the button main body 351. It is possible to operate the button main body 351 without a feeling of strangeness in the player participation type production in which is used as the operation unit, and it is possible to entertain the production and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button main body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink is attached to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, the time and effort required for cleaning can be facilitated, and the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced as the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean.

In addition, the production means such as the outside-button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section raising/lowering mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, and the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit unit 350. It is possible to surely entertain the effect output through (through) the operation unit unit 350 and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the production means such as the outside-button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decorative board 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since the contact detection body 352 covers the rendering means because it is provided, the contact detection body 352 (rendering operation unit unit 350) and the rendering means can be compactly assembled, and thus, the above-described configuration is provided. Provided is a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can easily provide the effect operation unit unit 350 and effect means having the above-described effects at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1, and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. It can be done easily.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward, thereby effecting Since the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit unit 350 changes, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, the player approaches the effect operation unit unit 350. Alternatively, contact can be detected. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player with respect to the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, when the effect operation unit unit 350 projects while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect operation unit unit 350 abuts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit unit 350. When the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected, an effect can be presented to the player by a physical force such as pushing the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by an effect that has not been found in the conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the effect operation unit unit 350, and to the player. It is possible to make sure that the projection of the effect operation unit unit 350 is noticed.

When the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected, if the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end side of the elevating spring 365 (upward), the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. The biasing force can be increased, and when the lifting spring 365 is moved in the direction away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the lifting spring 365 is weakened, and the biasing force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the effect operation unit unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the effect operation unit unit 350 can be projected with various projecting outputs, it is possible to increase the variation of effects by physical force, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to effect the operation. The effect due to the protrusion of the unit 350 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the projection output of the effect operation unit unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit unit 350 with a finger or the like, the effect operation unit unit is exerted with a strong force. When 350 abuts, a strong impact is given to the player, so that it is possible to strongly think that something good (for example, an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous) occurs. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit unit 350 is the pressing operation unit 303 capable of pressing operation, when the player participation type effect is executed, by causing the player to operate the effect operation unit unit 350, the game is played. It is possible to allow the player to participate in the player-participating type production, and to entertain the pressing operation of the production operation unit unit 350, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit unit 350 can be pressed, a player who puts his/her fingers or the like on the effect operation unit unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) can be pressed at any time. Then, when the player participation type effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 is executed, by causing the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to project the effect operation unit unit 350, the player participation type by effect images, sounds, etc. It is possible to promptly let the player recognize the start of execution of the player participation type effect without guiding the execution start of the effect, and increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 to realize the player participation type effect. Can be even more entertaining.

Further, since the effect operation unit unit 350 is caused to project by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, as compared with the case where the effect operation unit unit 350 is caused to protrude using the drive motor. Thus, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be easily and vigorously projected, and the above-described action and effect can be more easily achieved.

In addition, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350, and the electrostatic charge of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity differs depending on the distance between the effect operation unit unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity threshold values and cause the effect operation unit unit 350 to project with a different projection output for each threshold value. Becomes Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the effect operation unit unit 350 to the contact in multi-steps, so that it can be detected in each step. By projecting with a sudden output, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, by popping up by executing the player participation type effect, the player is added to the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can move forward and backward. When is approached or touched, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 with which the player of the effect operation unit unit 350 comes into contact changes. On the other hand, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit unit 350 detects the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the contact by the approach or contact of the player is made. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be captured, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 can be detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 or moving (pressing) the effect operation unit unit 350 by the player, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, the button outside decoration substrate 355, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inside decoration substrate. A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as 364, the thrust output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, since the predetermined effect is executed by the player moving the effect operation unit unit 350 back and forth or approaching or contacting the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect can entertain the player, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by the player.

At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit unit 350, the effect is executed, so that the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is used as the effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit or contact operation unit). Can be made to work. On the other hand, when the player moves (presses) the production operation unit unit 350, the production is executed, so that the production operation unit unit 350 can function as a production operation unit (press operation unit). Because of this, it is possible for the player to perform a variety of effect operations, so by performing a player participation type effect that allows the player to perform an effect operation, entertaining a variety of effect operations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the player participation type production, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided in the vicinity of the portion of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 with which the player comes into contact (below the upper surface 351a). Since the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact detection body 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds for executing a predetermined effect are provided, and each of them is provided. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach to the contact of the player's finger or the like to the rendering operation unit 350 in multiple stages, and thus to present the rendering according to each stage. Thus, it is possible to present the player with a wider variety of effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to the (contact operation), and to make the player more entertaining the effect operation.

Furthermore, the player is provided with a production operation unit unit 350 that can be moved forward and backward (pushable), a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit unit 350. Therefore, in the player participation type production, the player performs an operation (pushing operation) for moving the production operation unit unit 350 forward or backward, or an operation for bringing a finger or the like close or in contact with the production operation unit unit 350 (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc. can be requested, and the various operations can increase the player's willingness to participate in the player-participating performance, and facilitate the participation in the player-participating performance. You can Then, when the player participates in the player participation type effect, various operations using the effect operation unit unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting tired. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit unit 350 is locked to the engaging portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to lock the effect operation unit unit 350 in a forward and backward direction. Therefore, the effect operation unit unit 350 is prevented from advancing and retracting by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371 until an effect that moves the effect operation unit unit 350 is executed. It is possible to prevent the 350 from freely moving or shaking. Therefore, it is possible to avoid making the player feel a sense of distrust or anxiety by the production operation unit unit 350 moving or shaking without permission, and to make the production by the production operation unit unit 350 more enjoyable. Can be set.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor body 358 is provided at a position distant from the contact detection body 352. The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, the contact detection body 352 for detecting the electrostatic capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC for detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352, an output circuit, and the like are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected independently of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be replaced by the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350. The pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player is attached to the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 which covers the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398. When a finger or the like approaches or contacts with a finger or the like, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398. Changes the electrostatic capacity, and according to the change, a predetermined effect of irradiating the player side with light is executed by the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398, so that the player side The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the out-of-button decoration substrate 355, the button-inside decoration substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 by the light emitted to the player, and the player can be entertained by the executed effect. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 is the button body 351 or Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is like a part of the decoration portion. It can be made unrecognizable to the player that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is unrecognizable from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is compared with the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (production) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a good effect by the button outside decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, by detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the effect of irradiating the player with light is executed on the decorative board 355, the button-internal decoration board 364, or the decorative body 398, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is connected to the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). 302), and at the same time, the player can be given a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are made to approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 approaches or touches the fingers or the like. By detecting the contact, the effect is executed by the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decorative body 398, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player can participate in the player. You can entertain the type production.

Further, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's finger or the like. Since it is possible to change the effect by the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 in accordance with the distance between the button outside decoration board 355 and the button outside decoration board 355 depending on the movement (position) of the player's finger or the like. It is possible to change the effect produced by the or button middle decoration substrate 364 or the decorative body 398, and to show the player a wider variety of effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the various effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

Further, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the outer decoration substrate 355, the button middle decoration substrate 364, and the decoration body 398 changes, the game to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is performed. It is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a person's finger or the like, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects.

Further, since the change in capacitance is detected by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member. When the contact detection body 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and by making the vapor deposition film thick to have metallic luster, it looks like a part of decoration. You can Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are punched metal having an outer shape having a design property such as a star shape and a heart shape, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made to look like a part of the decoration. be able to. Because of this, the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 395, and the contact detection body 397 that cannot be recognized by the player can be provided, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance is generated by the player's fingers or the like approaching or contacting the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). Depending on the change, a predetermined effect is provided by the effect presentation means such as the button outside decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. The contact detection body 395 and the like (including the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body left 390L, the contact detection body right 390R, the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 397) for presenting Since the pachinko machine 1 is formed in the outer peripheral shape, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detection body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance and a high appeal to the player can be provided. Further, the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and presentation is presented in accordance with a change in electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented by the means via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, the predetermined effect is presented according to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like with the button body 351. As a result, the button body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation unit 301. Since the contact detection body 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design property, the effect operation unit 301 looks like having a design property, which is not available in conventional pachinko machines. As the pachinko machine 1 including the operation unit 301, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Further, as described above, since the contact detection body 395 or the like having a design property can give a strong impact to the player, the contact detection body 395 or the like (button body 351) can be strongly interested. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the operation of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect for operating the button body 351 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the contact detection body 395 or the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 is formed in the outer peripheral shape having a design property, at the first glance, depending on the player, the presentation presentation is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is first effected by the contact detection body 395 or the like by prompting the player to approach or contact the button body 351. It can be noticed that the operation unit 301 is provided, and the player can be given unexpectedness to further enjoy the player participation type effect. Alternatively, when a player participation type production that operates the production operation unit 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button main body 351 with a finger or the like without knowing the production operation unit 301, the contact detection body 395 or the like is stopped. Since the electric capacity is changed and the effect is presented by the effect presentation means, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to easily detect the approach and the contact, and it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects. Further, since the effect is presented according to the change in the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player touches the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like from the approach of the finger or the like of the player. Since it is possible to detect up to (distance) in multiple stages, it is possible to present a more diverse production to the player by presenting the production according to each stage, and the player can be presented. It is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the outer circumference of the contact detection body 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh is used as the contact detection body 395 or the like having conductivity, The contact detection body 395 and the like can be provided with a design property, the appearance of the contact detection body 395 and the like can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the contact detection body 395 and the like can be made conspicuous, and the above-described action and effect can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design having a design property without forming the contact detection body 395 or the like in a three-dimensional shape. it can. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can have a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost required for manufacturing the contact detection body 395 and the like can be reduced.

Further, since the transparent button body 351 covers the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 or the like, dust or food or dirt is not attached to the contact detection body 395 or the like, and cleaning work is easy. It can be anything. More specifically, since the contact detection body 395 and the like that have irregularities such as punching metal are used, dust and food and other stains are likely to adhere to the irregularities, and it is troublesome to clean the stains. However, since the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detection body 395 or the like having irregularities such as punching metal is used, Thus, it is possible to prevent the attachment of dirt and reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed for easy cleaning.

Further, the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detection body 395 and the like, so that a metal vapor deposition film or the like is used as the contact detection body 395 or the like. In the case of using a material such as a foil stamping which can improve the design, it is possible to prevent the player from wearing the touch sensor early and to improve the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Further, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, since the player does not directly touch the contact detection body 395 etc. with the transparent button body 351, the contact Since it is possible to use a detection object 395 or the like that does not feel comfortable to the player or one that causes the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detection object 395 or the like and meet the needs. The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed of a corresponding material.

Further, when the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like is changed by bringing the finger or the like of the player close to or in contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the buttons, etc., the player has brought fingers or the like close to or in contact with the button body 351 by the effects presented via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the action of fingers and the like.

In addition, an effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, and the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 is executed, the button body 351 can be made to function like a touch operation unit, and the operation feeling can be provided by the presented effect. Can be added, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type effect) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player brings his or her finger or the like close to or in contact with the button body 351 to cause the contact detection body 352. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects entry of a finger or the like into the detection area, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outside decoration substrate 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inside decoration substrate 364 emit light to play through the button body 351. A light emitting effect in which a player is irradiated with light, an effect of vibrating a player's finger or the like that is in contact with (through) the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and a projection operation unit elevating mechanism 360 projects above the button body 351. By means of this, effects such as impact, push-up, wind pressure and the like are given to the player through the button body 351 (through), so that the button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can enjoy it. I can do it. Further, at this time, since effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, the effect can surprise the player and entertain the player. Therefore, the motivation for operating the button body 351 can be increased. Then, when the player's finger or the like is in contact with the button body 351, the button body 351 functions downward as the button body 351 by appropriately moving the finger or the like to push the button body 351 downward. By the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351, it is possible to entertain the player with a variety of effect operations, which makes the player less likely to get tired and entertaining. Can be suppressed.

Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 separated from the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 prevents the button body 351 from moving. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like on the upper surface portion 351a of the player, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection sensor body 358 provided with the detection circuit. Can be disposed on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 which is separated from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, so that the contact detection sensor body 358 can be disposed on a less noticeable portion, and the pachinko machine can be used. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, since the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (downward) of the button body 351, these are used to light the player through the button body 351 to the light and It is possible to easily apply effects such as vibration, impact, pushing up, and wind pressure, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed Mounted as possible.

The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and a main body frame. Main body lower hinge assembly attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached And a solid 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 which is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base unit 500 so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 is played. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, a reverse L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 mounted along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and the dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that covers the rear side of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank that is attached to the payout base 551 and extends upward in the shape of a box that extends left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape that is opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and is separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Or a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is such that the rear part is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front is held.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape in which a front view extends vertically and a lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b which penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height and in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 on which the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b is formed is placed. It is provided with a placement portion 501c and a game board regulation portion 501d which projects upward from the center of the game board placement portion 501c in the left-right direction and which restricts the lower end of the game board 5 from moving to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540, and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f, which penetrates the front and back on the right side of the front side of the portion 501e when the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and back, which penetrates the front and rear on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view, the substrate unit. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating in the front and rear direction at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 501 has a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame opening switch is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch releases the pressing and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch is released from the pressing and can detect the opening of the main frame 4. The detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

On the main body frame base 501, a game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction at a position below the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the site where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a that extends left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the left and right sides that penetrate through the guide body 502a in the front and rear directions. A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In the state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a of 502, the left-right direction of the plurality of through holes 502d formed at both upper and lower end sides of the guide body 502a is It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 83(a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (desirably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 83(b)).

The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases as the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the leading end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502 and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle that intersects the tangent line to the circle that passes through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. A main body frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a front view in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have it.

The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged such that the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is spaced apart from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. To be The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-section in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U shape with the right side opened in plan view. The groove portion 530a is for inserting the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is an unauthorized tool. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4 as a game board. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is mounted on the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the ball hammer 543, which has a base end attached to the rotary shaft of the firing solenoid 542, the firing solenoid 542, which is a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541. The launch rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left, and the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle 195 is rotating, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

Note that, due to the driving strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach within the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, and passes through the foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view in the front-rear direction with a width substantially the same as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c of the front plate portion 551a, which has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extends downward downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. From the rear plate upper part 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate part 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate part 551b to the right side to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and from the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g that extends to substantially the same position as the right side of the left back plate 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h that connects the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is opened inward of the front and the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing base 551 A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward is provided.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and is located on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and the rear, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located at an upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By rectifying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B circulating in two stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying it so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, the inside of the tank rail 553 Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the rear. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper tank ball path unit 600 for guiding the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper tank ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the upper full ball path unit 580b. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game sphere B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 from the rear, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guide unit 570 has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that has a guide path 570a extending in a meandering shape in which the game ball B can flow, and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guide unit base 571. The flat guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the flag (see FIG. 91).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while being repeatedly folded back and forth between the widths of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at the right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a and not protruding. Becomes

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guide passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 has a box-like opening to the rear, through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583; , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and meshes with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583. A payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582, and project into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear side. The ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing path 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing path 580a by the lid 582, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-removing path 580b is closed. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end located near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there. It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right widths and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer circumference of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape of a concentric circle with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

The ball drop passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the payout passage movable piece 592 is attached in the part where the payout passage 580a and the takeout passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a protruding rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend rearward at a position at a height of about 1/3 from the top in the rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball passage passage 580b. The ball-removing movable piece 592 rotates through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout vane 589 is provided with a plurality of vane pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at three intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in a portion that extends toward the rotation axis from above in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout vane 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in rear view when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball-removable movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. The ball pull-out lever 593 partially penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 89).

When the ball-removing piece 592 is made rotatable by raising the ball-removing lever 593, the game ball B, which was in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, becomes the ball-removing movable piece 592. It will flow down to the side of the ball passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that restricts the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is closer to the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

Thus, in the state in which the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-removing passage 580b, so the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the game ball vigorously, the ball-removing movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the contacting force moves the ball-removing movable piece 592 to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the withdrawal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from exerting a strong force on the ball removal movable piece 592. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and damage of the piece 592.

From this, since it is possible to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b faster, and thus pachinko. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball-removing movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-removing movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball-removing passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the gap is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, by blocking the movement of the game ball B to the outside by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is based on the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, the ball-ball movable piece 592 can be less likely to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a front view extending vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 which is attached to the dispensing base 551 and whose rear side is open, and a upper open tank base 601 which is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and whose front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and that can push the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

Further, the upper tank ball path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends about 3/4 of the overall width to the right in front view and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in a front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c and an upper portion. An upper tank full discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and opens upwards near the right end in front view on the upper surface and is substantially vertical downward. And an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in order and open downward. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is discharged downward from either of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower full dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a front end of the lower full tank base 611 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A payout passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank ball path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are lined up in order from the left as viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in front view, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 as viewed from the front, and the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to contact the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are respectively installed at the upper full. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

Further, the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613. Rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of a ball out by the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied/stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it can be seen that the game balls B are stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game ball B housed in the ball storage portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B emitted from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball delivery path unit 600 passes through the upper ball storing passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full-ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out further, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-filled ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is in the upper ball storage passage 600b. While the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received by After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

In addition, when the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further dispensed, the lower plates are discharged. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed by voice (for example, "please pull out the ball!") that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is set to the non-detected state of the full tank detection sensor 154. Temporarily stop until.

When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-removing movable piece 592, so the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower back. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine taken along the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The speaker unit 620a is directed to the front in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b which projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends obliquely downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. In addition, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The body frame speaker 622 is mainly a cone type speaker that outputs a low tone.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and a portion that is the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most to the rear side. Is formed so that the protrusion of the is small. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 as viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. This enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in front view in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43a so that the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inserted. And the curtain plate inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622, an enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the lower outer frame assembly 40 side through the connection tubular portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 by being resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in the state in which the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the main body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear a heavy bass sound. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives the game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 and that is open upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball drop guide 627 and the discharge ball receiver 628 is discharged downward.

The upstream end of the ball drop guiding part 627 is open to the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end is open to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving part 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball drop guiding portion 627 is opposed so that the opening at the upstream end thereof coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long in the left and right directions. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guide portion 627 at the front end, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball removal guide portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628, and then the ball. Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632. 96), and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the like. This is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

The interface unit 620e covers the rear side of the interface board 635 and the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634. An interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost of the body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 has a right side in a front view attached to a rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically and rotatably around an axis extending vertically, and a left side of the back cover 640 has a dispensing base 551. Are attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the dispensing base 551 is assembled to the body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 which is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 which project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the outer hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

In addition, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the locking unit 650 assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are located forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and keeps the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the key hole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, when a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of locking cylinders 650 are transferred via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, so that the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 or the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the lower hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachable from the outer frame 2 and hinged by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shape attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream side end, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out the game ball B to the player side. Is equipped with.

The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangle that extends in the left-right direction in a plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that its left side is lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed into a container shape with the upper side opened. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (on the side of the right side wall 552e) of about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. Is formed over the entire length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side thereof extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream side to the downstream end at the bottom, and the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game ball B is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed. Have The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left side in front view. In addition, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward after extending from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel to an axis extending leftward from the right end in the plan view. It is formed in a crank shape that extends obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. .. In the tank guide rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a that extends from the left end to the right in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to the site where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in a row in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b which bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and whose width direction narrows from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By the bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can arrange the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes one line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated from the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Therefore, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the abutting bulging portion 553b. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the generation of spherical balls in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since it becomes difficult to disperse the reaction force, the game ball B inside is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape, and ball clogging (ball clogging) easily occurs. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, and therefore flows through the inside. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball clogging) can be made difficult to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, which is of interest to the player's game due to the interruption of the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 When a malfunction occurs in the movable production unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. The effect of can be achieved.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. Extending toward the left (to the left), in order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface part 501m while tilting so that the side (left side) farther from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower. And a bypass passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the outer sides in the left-right direction of the bypass passage 552g, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Is provided at a position lower than the overflow portion 501m on the side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j having a lower height than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear and the upper side of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface overflows. The terminal cover 551k extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, to a rear side. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left upper portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both laterally outer side, the upper ends are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, and extend in the front-rear direction in the shape of a strip plate. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is flush with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501m is The left end of the right-hand side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left-right direction of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right-side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region enclosed by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also only called the ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and has a front end that is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end becomes lower 552h. And a weir portion that extends upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552d of the passage surface 552h to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side in a front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g has its rear end along the front end side of a portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right crank shape in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made less likely to occur.

The detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end of the detour passage moves toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553. When discharged, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow, It is possible to suppress the generation of ball gam inside the tank rail 553 by discharging the sphere into a wide area.

In addition, the part that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this portion, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, and thus the detour passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, in the front surface view, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length, extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extending in the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, It is formed in parallel with the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about ⅓ of the entire length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end of the front wall 552b and the end of the rear wall 552c in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. The ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange extending outward in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Are formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion that extends obliquely in the left-right direction in the left-right direction are positioned behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )is doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The discharge portion 551j in the ball tank 552 is assembled in the main body frame 4 so as to be lowered stepwise rearward from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, and then becomes higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after extending to the (nearby position).

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a mounted on the rear surface thereof in a state of being aligned in the left-right direction. The wire connecting terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion is opened by the operation of the lever and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal board 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. . The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow end surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g become lower on the rear end side, as shown by white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side thereof becomes lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge. It is possible to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501m, and at the same time, to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a further increase in the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball crush) due to the engagement of the game balls B with each other.

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side which is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

Further, at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than that of the overflow portion 552f, so that the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is more than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also higher, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. The flow can be made to flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and being bitten by the directions of the pressures applied to the game balls B being scattered, and the occurrence of the jamming of the game balls B. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are lined up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the site where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a line in the width direction as they head toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B that have been stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are circulated to the downstream side through a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, by the tank rail 553, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) while being aligned in a line.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it is possible to make it difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface section 501m, or to make it difficult for the game ball B to fall from the rear side even if it rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j can be prevented from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g by these inclinations, and a problem occurs due to the game ball B spilling outside the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

Further, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game ball that is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Subsequently, a second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the pachinko machine including the tank rail and the like of the second embodiment is viewed from the rear. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, FIG. 107(b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and FIG. FIG. 3A is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. FIG. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the curve line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing in cross section the flow of the game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107. In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 553A and the like of the second embodiment different from the above include the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A that are the same as the tank rail 553 of the above embodiment. , The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are different, and the same components will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of the present embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and transfers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward. On the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A is provided so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A in a front view, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A. The provided ball rectifying member 556A is attached, and a ball stopper member 557 capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. By the meandering portion 553c, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed. The first rail cover 554A is attached on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction on the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A so as to cover the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protection walls 555b that extend upward from the front and rear ends upstream of the center of the cover portion 555a in the left-right direction. It has an opening 555c penetrating the cover 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b is formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a sphere rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A has an upstream end extending in the front-rear direction and is attached rotatably around an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided between the pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and projects into the tank rail 553A. It has a flat plate-shaped rectifying piece 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A abuts against the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby making it easy to collapse the stages of the game balls B and arrange them in a line, and at the top. The game ball B is prevented from moving rapidly to the downstream side to prevent ball catching on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protection walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protection wall 555b. ing. Thereby, the electric wire (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached, It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from being contacted from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connecting terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A. May not be able to rotate upward, and there is a risk that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exerted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A, the balls can be prevented. When the game sphere B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the sphere rectifying member 556A can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action can be sufficiently exerted to catch the ball in the tank rail 553A or the ball. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper gaming ball B of the gaming balls B stacked in a plurality of stages first moves to the downstream side, ball catching easily occurs. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B, so that the upper game ball B may move to the downstream side first. It can be suppressed, and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

Further, as described above, the protection wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging. Arranging near a terminal board (for example, an external terminal board 558) to which electric wires are connected or a control board, or arranging a terminal board or a control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arrangement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Subsequently, a third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the right rear. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame including the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the left rear. FIG. 113(a) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal board, and FIG. 113(b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 114(a) is a sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 114(b) is a sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 115 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). FIG. 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear side, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of (a) from the lower right back. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 seen from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG.

The tank rail and the like of the third embodiment are the tank rail and the like of the above-described first embodiment (ball tank 552, tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball rectifying member 556, and ball stopper member). A protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added to the configuration of (557), and the same configurations as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The tank rail and the like of the present embodiment are attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and extend in the left and right directions. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side of the existing portion, is open upward, and extends to the left in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and the rear, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 has an opening through which dust, dust, and the like in the tank rail 553 can be dropped on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion whose height decreases toward the downstream side). A plurality of parts 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided below the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d is opened downward and rearward of the tank rail 553, extends leftward and rightward, and is formed in a size such that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B is present on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from the rear through the opening 553d. Further, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger or a thin stick through the opening 553d. This makes it possible to eliminate the ball clogging that has occurred at the site through the opening 553d. Further, through the opening 553d, the ball rectifying member 556 can be lifted through the game ball B of the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail or the like closes to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes a predetermined range upward from the right end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends leftward with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction to the left. The second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part from the portion spaced apart between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 in the tank rail 553 to the left end, and the first rail at the upper end of the tank rail 553. The ball rectifying member 556 provided in a portion between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, the ball stopper member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the second rail cover 555 from the middle in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction across the ball rectifying member 556.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. .

The ball rectifying member 556 is located at an upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a) and the like).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in a single stage, but when the stacked game balls B decrease from two stages to one stage, the upper game balls B are When attempting to overtake the lower game balls B, those game balls B may be engaged with each other and become immobile (so-called ball clogging due to ball clogging). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B flows through the tank rail 553 in two upper and lower stages, the upper game ball B contacts the rectifying piece 556a, By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent trying to overtake the lower game ball B. As a result, the game balls B on the lower side first move to the downstream side, and the game balls B on the upper side move to the rear side, whereby the game balls B can be aligned further. At this time, since the upper game sphere B presses the rectifying piece 556a from below, the ball rectifying member 556 moves so that the rectifying piece 556a moves upward, and its own weight causes the upper game to play. The ball B can be pressed downward, and the ball rectifying member 556 (rectifying piece 556a) can be swung in the up-down direction to promote the movement of the game ball B on the upper side to the lower side, and the tank rail. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the relevant portion of 553 (the portion whose height becomes lower toward the downstream side).

The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

The protective cover 559 includes a strip-shaped top plate portion 559a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-shaped rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of a rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. Has a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front side and the left side, and a flat plate-shaped guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The guide plate portion 559d is formed such that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left side, and the rear end of the portion is aligned with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. Therefore, a space is formed between the ball straightening member 556 and the ball straightening member 556 so that the ball straightening member 556 can be vertically swung. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball rectifying member 556.

The right end side of the front plate portion 559c extends to the right of the top plate portion 559a, and extends to the ball tank 552 along the tank rail 553. The guide plate portion 559d has a portion on the front side of the top plate portion 559a that protrudes forward from the front plate portion 559c by a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, so that the game ball B can be guided to the left. Has been done. The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the inclination of the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap with the rear surface of the payout base 551 so that the game ball B cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent external contact with the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed by inserting a thin rod into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 and contacting it from below, or by inserting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 through the opening 553d. It can be confirmed by pushing it upwards by, for example, lifting it up through the game ball B.

In addition, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B, which has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, to the left by the guide plate portion 559d and discharge it to the outside of the left side surface of the main body frame 4. ..

In the present embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559, and the like are formed of a transparent material, and the inside of the tank rail 553. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

Further, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, and the like from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

Moreover, since the upper side of the tank rail 553 is covered by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, the ball rectifying member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, when dust or dirt is attached to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the one rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, and the like, but in the present embodiment, the tank rail 553 It is significant that a plurality of openings 553d are provided on the bottom. More specifically, when dust, dust, etc. are attached to the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553, the game ball B inside is touched through the opening 553d and the game ball B or the game ball B is passed through. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be swung, dust and dirt attached to the game ball B and the like can be dropped. Then, dust, dust, and the like dropped from the game ball B or the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the main body frame 4, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends to the left in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant depth is provided behind the external terminal plate 558, so the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 is provided. When the electric wire connected to the ball contacts the ball rectifying member 556 from above, the ball rectifying member 556 rotates upward even if the game ball B contacts the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556 due to the weight of the electric wire. There is a possibility that it will not be possible, and there is a risk that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556 cannot be sufficiently exerted.

Further, since the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 is connected to the electric wire whose tip is stripped, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal board 558 for some reason, the electric wire connection terminal If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to 558a is insufficient, a short circuit may occur due to the remaining game ball B.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper side of the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the wire connecting terminal 558a from contacting the ball rectifying member 556. can do. With this, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the sphere rectifying member 556, the sphere rectifying member 556 can be rotated upward, so that the rectifying action can be sufficiently exerted and within the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, if the electric wire is pulled out from the external terminal board 558 for some reason and its tip comes into contact with the game ball B existing behind the external terminal board 558, a computer in the game hall provides necessary information due to the occurrence of a short circuit. I can not receive it, and there is an error in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the protective cover 559 is provided with the guide plate portion 559d, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason is guided to the left and the main body. It can be discharged to the outside from the left side surface of the frame 4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal board 558, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a short circuit due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding the short circuit of the electric wire, the necessary information can be surely received by the computer in the gaming hall (hall controller), and the occurrence of counting error in the gaming hall can be suppressed. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 causes the game ball B to be discharged to the left side surface side of the main body frame 4, so that the game ball B is located behind the main body frame 4. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem such as disconnection or short-circuit by coming into contact with various electric wires or wirings provided on the side.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of Board Unit]
Subsequently, a board unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. 119(a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. FIG. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 120(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the back. FIG. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key line in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line of (a), and (c) is (a). FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K) in FIG. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine including the board unit of FIG. 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same configurations as those of the board unit 620 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The base unit 660 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and the rear side of the front base 661, and the power supply unit 620c is attached to the rear surface. A rear base 662, an out ball passage 663 in which a game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 flows, which is provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, and a game in which the out ball passage 663 flows. An out sensor 664 for detecting the balls B one by one, and a ball pulling-out guiding section 627 for receiving the game ball B discharged from the lower ball-drawing passage 610c of the lower full-ball ball path unit 610 and guiding it to the right in a front view, The game ball B guided by the ball drop guide 627 circulates, and the ball drop discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball drop discharge passage 665 are closed. And a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662.

The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and is long in the left and right. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending in the left-right direction at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out-ball passage 663 and a ball-pulling guide portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. In addition, a ball discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is opened rearward.

In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the insides of the ball guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge passage 665 can be visually recognized well from the upper side and the lower side of the base unit 660, and it becomes easy to confirm the ball clogging and the like. There is.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed in the front side of the rear wall 662 in the front side of the flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending in the left-right direction in the vertical direction at a substantially constant height, and is open. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out ball passage 663 is a ball discharge receiving portion 663a which is opened upward and extends to the left and right at a substantially central position of the pachinko machine 1 and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the lower guiding portion 663c, an out ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while largely meandering in the left-right direction, a lower guiding portion 663c that guides the gaming balls B that are rectified in a row by the out ball rectifying portion 663b, and downward. It is opened downward and has an out ball discharge port 663d for discharging the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side becomes lower.

The out-ball rectifying portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from the position on the right side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a so that the left end becomes lower. Further, the out-ball rectifying section 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that narrows toward the downstream side (left side), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a. It is deep. Further, in the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, a portion on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a vertical height that decreases toward the downstream side (left side), and near the downstream end, the gaming ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. This allows the game balls B to be aligned in a line in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

The lower guiding portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partitioning wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction. It is curved in a small curve toward the rear so that As a result, the downstream end (out-ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guiding portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranked portion of the lower guiding portion 663c. The lower guide portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that the crank-shaped portion does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, and therefore passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent in the crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the existing part, it does not bounce upward to the side of the out sensor 664, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is durable and has a long life because the game ball B frequently passes therethrough.

The ball removal guide portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. In the hollow guide portion 627, the upstream end is opened to the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, the downstream side is bent backward, and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , And is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123(a), etc.).

The ball discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 while being opened rearward, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The ball discharge passage 665 has a rear end located forward of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, between the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap of at least one game ball B is formed.

An upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to a downstream end of the ball discharge guide portion 627, the inclination is the same as that of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge receiving portion 663a is smaller than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. A horizontal guide portion 665a extending rightward, a vertical guide portion 665b vertically extending downward from a downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide portion 665a to a lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ), a ball discharge outlet 665c opening downward. The ball discharge outlet 665c is provided slightly rearward of the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

In addition, the ball discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately project inward on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665b at regular intervals in the vertical direction. In the ball discharge passage 665, the game ball B flowing through the vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward alternately abuts the plurality of protrusions 665d, so that the game ball B flows down in a zigzag shape and flows therethrough. It is possible to suppress an increase in speed, and it is possible to suppress the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball discharge outlet 665c.

Since the ball discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage by the horizontal guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, when the ball discharge lever 593 is operated to discharge the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , A lot of game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 is received. Is detected and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (pull out) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the game ball B discharged to the ball discharge passage 580b side is operated by operating the ball discharge lever 593 of the dispensing device 580, and the out ball passage 663. The ball is guided to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball-feeding guide portion 627 and the ball-balloon discharge passage 665 which are independent of each other. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is accurately performed. Can be counted. Therefore, by the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664, an accurate game ball B The pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating the payout rate (ball output rate) can be provided.

The number of game balls B (the number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first The number of gaming balls B received from the winning holes such as the big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007, etc. and discharged from the game board 5 and which winning hole is received after being hit in the game area 5a. The number of game balls B that have been received in the out port 1008 and discharged from the game board 5 without being added, and the number of game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls). That is.

Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the gaming state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is “payout within a predetermined period. The number of out-balls within a predetermined period=the payout rate within a predetermined period” is calculated.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, and the out ball. The game ball B flowing in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. Therefore, the "out ball" is detected on the game board 5. It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided between the rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. Therefore, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are separated from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are filled with many game balls B. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like due to the electrical noise generated by the distribution of static electricity, induced current, and the like, and the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to malfunction due to the circulation of the game ball B. Can be

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball straightening unit 663b of the out ball passage 663, the game ball B is distributed. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out sensor 664 is worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, when the payout rate per predetermined time (ball output rate) calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visually recognized by the player, Since the player desires to pay out a lot of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is highly likely to pay out a lot of game balls B. It is possible to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. Further, in the case where the payout rate is visibly displayed from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out, the displayed payout rate becomes higher than usual. , Other players, staff members of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are more likely to notice the fraudulent activity, and thus can hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity. Can be

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible to the player, the staff in the game hall, etc. can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraud. When the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay) Since it is possible that there is a problem with the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the problem early and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, It is not necessary to provide an out ball detection unit), the cost required for the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space is secured in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the discharged game ball B. By providing the effect device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be more entertained by the player.

In addition, since the ball discharge passage 665 has the vertical guiding portion 665b in which the plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game ball B is distributed through the vertical guiding portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, the inside of the ball discharge passage 665 is damaged by the impact of the circulating game ball B, or the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665 is damaged. Etc. can be prevented.

Further, a meandering out ball rectifying portion 663b is provided in the out ball passage 663, and a vertical guiding portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are protruded is provided in the ball discharge passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the existing power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 less likely to malfunction due to the circulation of the game ball B.

Further, since the out-ball passage 663 and the ball-out discharge passage 665 have their respective out-ball outlets 663d and 665c opened downward, the out-ball passage 663 and the ball-out discharge passages are opened. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with other pachinko machines and walls provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines It is possible to prevent the machine, the wall, etc. from being damaged. In addition, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 on the island facility side. The discharged game balls B can be easily collected.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with the game unit 5. Since it is possible to deliver the game ball B driven into the area 5a downward to the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660, the structure for discharging the game ball B in the game board 5 is set. , A simple (simple) configuration can be achieved, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball discharge outlet 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided rearward of the outer frame 2, the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are provided. Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B flowing through the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 vigorously collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is not easily damaged.

Further, since the ball discharge outlet 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island facility side ( It is not necessary to move the out receiving portion, the bucket, etc.) to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and the labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and the labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another Embodiment of Sphere Ejection in Board Unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. FIG. 126(a) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 126(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at a portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a merging portion 663e that joins the ball discharge passage 665 is provided near the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663. The merging portion 663e is opened downward, and its opening end serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball-removal discharge port 665c). Then, the guide piece 667 is shortly projected rearward from the front wall of the out-ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, whereby the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely rearward and downward. .. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, a portion (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island facility) of the island facility. It is possible to easily release the game ball B to the side), and it is possible to reliably collect the game ball B on the island facility side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely rearward and downward by the guide piece 667, so that the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if it is provided in a position near the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position near the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, it is possible to arrange the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) at the front position as much as possible, so that the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, the out-ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and due to static electricity or electric current generated by a large number of game balls B flowing through the out-ball passage 663, due to electrical noise. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game ball B can be provided.

Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 can be attached/detached from below to the portion of the out ball passage 663 at the out ball outlet 663d. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f that is formed at the downstream end of the lower guiding portion 663c in the out-ball passage 663 and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. And a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of 664.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the lower guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side and the lower side of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f, and has a base end rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 and a detection of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f of the main body 668a. A through hole 668b that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough at a portion that coincides with the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the opposite side to the base end side of the main body portion 668a. Have

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outer side opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b at the base end side. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the out-ball rectifying portion 663b side.

In the sensor cover 668, the locking claw portion 668c is moved upward in a state where the out sensor 664 is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g to close it, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, and the downward movement of the out sensor 664 is regulated. The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126(a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and then the through hole 668b. It passes through and is discharged downward. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When the out sensor 664 is replaced (removed), the locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw 668c to release the locking with the locking part 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated around the base end side of the main body portion 668a and opened so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, whereby the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 is placed on the lower surface of the out sensor 664. Then, the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in the present embodiment, with the sensor cover 668 rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end (for example, the outer frame 2) of the contact threatened object indicated by the chain double-dashed line. To the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, or the lower end of the main body frame 4 to some extent. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with a dangerous contact object, and damage to the sensor cover 668 is prevented. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. However, as described above, since the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even when the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state where the sensor cover 668 is opened, the sensor cover 668 comes into contact with a contact threatened object such as the outer frame 2. Instead, the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come into contact with each other. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may be disengaged due to the vibration caused by and the sensor cover 668 may be opened. When the sensor cover 668 is opened during the game and the out sensor 664 falls down, the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B despite the fact that the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a. Since it is not performed, the occurrence of an abnormality will be notified by the main control board 1310 and the like. Due to the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality, a person in charge at the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a space between the sensor cover 668 and the like, the main body frame 4 can be opened and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged, without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact dangerous object.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor attachment recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be satisfactorily viewed from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is clogged in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, and thus the place where the game ball B is clogged can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and upright in an upside down state, and the work of replacing the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668 and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom surface side through the transparent base unit 660 are possible. It is possible to easily perform a check operation inside or inside the ball discharge passage 665.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted early. , It is possible to alleviate the frustration of the player due to the interruption of the game and suppress the decline in interest, and it is also possible to suppress the reduction in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the gaming hall side. it can.

Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 is not separated from the base unit 660. The sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being lost because it is in a suspended state and does not fall off.

Further, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, the base unit 660 is an outer portion near the out ball passage 663 through which a large number of game balls B flow, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). Since the game balls B are rotatably attached to each other, the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 by the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side. Of the base unit 660 and becomes relatively small on the side of the locking claw portion 668c (the other end side) that is locked by the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is exerted on the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 as a result of many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, the one is rotatably mounted on the one end side. Since a large amount can be received, it is difficult to release the locking by the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. ..

[4-14. Third Embodiment of Board Unit]
Next, a substrate unit 700 of a third embodiment different from the above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown without the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit, viewed from the front right, and FIG. 127(b) is the board unit of FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. 128A is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 128B is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127A as viewed from the lower right rear. 129(a) is a plan view of the board unit shown in FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 127(a), and FIG. FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line, and FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XIV in FIG.

131 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit shown in FIG. 127 as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit shown in FIG. 127 as disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 133(a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 seen from the front, and FIG. 133(b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127 seen from the back. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing elimination of ball clogging in the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram showing the prevention of intrusion of a linear illegal tool in the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 127.

The substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment is different from the above-mentioned substrate unit 620 and substrate unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same, so here, the above-mentioned substrate unit 620 and The same components as those of the board unit 620A are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. 127 to 136, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or the board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The board unit 700 is provided behind the first ball path 701 and the first ball path 701 through which the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 can flow, and is discharged downward from the game board 5. The second ball path 702 through which the game ball B can be distributed, the first ball sensor 703 for detecting the game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701, and the game ball circulating through the second ball path 702. A second ball sensor 704 for detecting B, and a ball removal passage 705 through which the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flows are provided. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are open upward, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 respectively detect the game balls B one by one. Discharge downward.

In the present embodiment, in the game board 5, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 flows through the first ball path 701, and the game board 5 receives the general winning a prize. The game ball B received in the mouth 2001, the first start opening 2004, the second start opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 is configured to flow through the second ball path 702. ing. That is, the out sphere is configured to flow in the first sphere path 701 and the safe sphere to flow in the second sphere path 702, and the number of all out spheres can be counted by the first sphere sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe spheres can be counted by the second sphere sensor 704. As a result, with respect to winning holes (winning hole sensors) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 of the game board 5. When an illegal act is performed, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side is different from the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, and it is possible to detect an illegal act for a winning opening. ..

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 is mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear side, and on the rear side of the front base 711. The first base path 701 and the second base path 702 are provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and the rear base 712 having the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface and having the ball removal passage 705. The front base 711 and the rear base 712 in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent the intrusion of illegal tools. A cover 714 that is openable and closable, a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705, and is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. And a frame relay board 716 that is installed. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed.

The front base 711 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear and above and is long in the left and right. The front base 711 has a ball path member 713 housed therein from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that is long in the left-right direction on the upper peripheral wall portion, and a elimination opening 711b that is open at a position to the right of the left-right center of the lower peripheral wall portion. ing. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving port 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports a security cover 714 rotatably around an axis extending in the left-right direction at the front end side of the elimination port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear and is long in the left and right. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball removal passage 705, Have The ball passage 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712, and is opened to the rear as a whole. The ball passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715. A portion of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 in the hollow passage 705 (a portion on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. The rear side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

Further, the rear base 712 receives the game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and the second base of the ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guiding portion 712b that receives the game ball B flowing through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide portion 712a is open forward. The inlet of the second discharge guide portion 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide 712a and the second discharge guide 712b are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b are opened rearward from the front wall and closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located on the left side in the front view as compared with the elimination port 711b of the front base 711, and the left side is left. Are arranged in order from to right. The outlet of the ball passage 705 has a front end side that greatly expands forward and a rear end side that expands slightly rearward with respect to the outlets of the first discharge guide 712a and the second discharge guide 712b (FIG. 128(b). See)). That is, the outlet of the ball passage 705 is formed to be larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide 712a and the second discharge guide 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted and accommodated in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear side. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a vertically extending downward from an upper end at a right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. A step wall portion 713c vertically extending downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and an upper right shelf portion 713d inclined downward from the lower end of the step wall portion 713c toward the right, A straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a position separating from the right side to the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e to the right and becoming higher toward the right side and the upper right shelf. A lower shelf portion 713f extending rightward from the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g vertically extending upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and the right An upper wall portion 713h extending leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shape that is connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opens upward. And the groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located on the right side of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

In addition, the ball path member 713 extends vertically upward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e to the left, and from the left end of the lower wall portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The protruding middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k to the left, and vertically downward from the vicinity of the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f. It has a depending wall part 713m extending and a lower wall part lower part 713n extending leftward in parallel to the lower wall part upper part 713j from the lower end of the hanging wall part 713m. A portion of the lower wall portion 713n, which is located below the lower end of the flow regulating wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, is notched vertically so that the game ball B can pass therethrough.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h, and is provided with a plurality of obstacles provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. Further, the ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, It has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 713p that partitions the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower portion 713n into front and rear.

Further, the ball path member 713 is a plurality of notches that are recessed from the front end and the rear end of the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f toward the partition wall 713p side. Has a notch 713q. Each notch portion 713q is provided so as to form a gap in the front-rear direction smaller than the radius of the game ball B between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled in the board unit 700, Dust, dust and the like in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

In addition, the ball path member 713 is provided in a portion between the flow regulating wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide protrusions 713r extending left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by the lower wall upper part 713j, the hanging wall part 713m, and the lower wall part lower part 713n on the front side of the partition wall part 713p, and the first ball sensor 703 is housed in the sensor housing. The front part 713s and the rear side of the partition wall part 713p are surrounded by the lower wall upper part 713j, the hanging wall part 713m, and the lower wall part lower part 713n, and the second ball sensor 704 is housed in the rear part of the sensor housing part. 713t.

The detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the site between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. In other words, the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are housed with the detection hole on the right side. Although illustration is omitted, the wiring cables extending from the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 extend from the front of the sensor housing portion 713s and the rear of the sensor housing portion 713t to the left of the inner wall portion 713k. ..

In addition, the ball path member 713 is provided on the lower surface of the lower wall lower part 713n at a position in front of the partition wall part 713p, and has a first ball guiding part 713u protruding downward and opened rearward, Have When the first ball guiding portion 713u is assembled to the substrate unit 700, the right half on the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the inlet side of the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. Facing. In the front of the partition wall portion 713p, the first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B, which has flowed downward from between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, to the right and then to the rear, It can be delivered to the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, a portion opened below the lower wall portion 713n (a portion of the detection hole of the second sphere sensor 704 accommodated in the rear portion 713t of the sensor accommodating portion). ) Is located below the second discharge guide 712b of the rear base 712. Thereby, behind the partition wall portion 713p, the game ball B flowing down from between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can be delivered to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf 713d is located closer to the right than the right end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the upper portion of the front base 711 immediately above the elimination port 711b is covered with the flow regulating wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the straightening wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side is directed vertically downward. The distance (height) between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so that the left end side becomes a height at which one gaming ball B can pass, and becomes narrower toward the left. .. With this straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, it is possible to straighten a plurality of game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

Between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, as described above, since the upper and lower dimensions are narrowed toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B flows), the game Depending on the amount of circulation of the balls B, a plurality of game balls B may be caught between the flow regulating wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and ball clogging may occur (see FIG. 134). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the elimination port 711b, when a ball clogging occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the elimination port 711b. In a state of being opened, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the elimination port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below, and the game ball B is bitten by the tool. You can eliminate the ball clogging by poking.

By the way, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a cutout portion 713q for removing a ball clogging or dropping dust or dust downward, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter is provided. From above into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702) through the cutouts 713q, and the tip of the illegal tool is further connected to the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk that fraudulent acts will be performed on the game board 5 provided above by extending the ball path 702) upward. The insertion of such an unauthorized tool is not limited to the lower shelf 713f, and there is a similar risk in the upper left shelf 713b and the upper right shelf 713d provided with the cutouts 713q.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat plate-like obstruction ribs 713o are formed on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h so as to be separated in the left-right direction and extend downward. Therefore, even if the tip of the linear illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h, it comes into contact with the inhibition rib 713o and the tip Movement can be blocked and further insertion of tampering tools can be blocked (see Figure 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent against fraudulent activity.

In addition, in the right side of the middle wall portion 713k in the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower and left and right sides thereof are the straightening wall portion 713e not provided with the cutout portion 713q and the lower wall. Since it is closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool is not inserted from below through the cutouts 713q of the corresponding parts of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b, and the part of the part concerned is not inserted. No fraudulent activity is performed through the cutout portion 713q.

As described above, since the ball path member 713 is provided with the plurality of cutouts 713q in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f, dust and dust are directed downward through the cutouts 713q. (See FIG. 136). The dust discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t in the upper left shelf 713b is rectified wall 713e, lower wall upper 713j, and middle. It is housed in the space surrounded by the wall portion 713k. This prevents dust and the like from adhering to the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 accommodated in the front of the sensor housing portion 713s and the rear of the sensor housing portion 713t.

A wiring cable is connected by a connector to the left end sides of the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 accommodated in the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. It protrudes leftward from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 project to the left of the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends leftward from a portion above the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t on the left side surface, it is formed in the upper left shelf 713b. The dust or dust that has dropped downward through the cutout portion 713q is guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protruding leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the wiring cable and the connector from falling, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect caused by dust or the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 is formed. Left side wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, and rear base 712. The second ball guide path 702 is formed by the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 such that the front end side is rotatable about an axis in the left-right direction. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the security cover 714 closes the elimination port 711b when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is horizontal, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. Is released and the rear end side is rotated downward so as to be positioned vertically, and the elimination port 711b is opened. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the elimination port 711b.

Since the crime prevention cover 714 can close the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 by closing the crime prevention cover 714, a linear incorrect tool is introduced from the elimination port 711b into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or It can be prevented from being inserted into the two-ball path 702). Further, the security cover 714 is opened when the ball clogging occurs between the flow regulating wall portion 713e of the ball path member 713 and the lower shelf portion 713f, thereby opening the elimination port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, it is possible to remove the ball clogging of the game ball B by inserting a rod-shaped tool between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the elimination port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below. You can The work for eliminating the ball clogging is performed with the main body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

In this security cover 714, the lower end (end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) of the crime prevention cover 714 in the state in which the elimination port 711b is opened (vertical state) is a contact threat (here, after the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the member 43 (the height indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713, after the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is left open with the security cover 714. Even if the user tries to close the outer frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with the contact threatened object (the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. Thus, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and the security cover 714 can be surely closed so that the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the security cover 714 is opened for some reason while the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, even if the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. However, the threatened contact object comes into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front, but since the front end side of the crime prevention cover 714 is rotatably attached about the axis in the left-right direction, the threatened contact object from the front side. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when is abutted against, the body cover 4 can be opened without the security cover 714 being caught by the dangerous contact object, and the damage of the security cover 714 or the dangerous contact object can be avoided. ..

The security cover 714 of the present embodiment is rarely clogged with the game ball B between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and is basically closed. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so that it is difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball-removing passage 705 opened rearward. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open rearward on the outlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and the first discharge guide portion 712a and the first discharge guide portion 712a. The game ball B flowing through the second discharge guide portion 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192 of the door frame 3, the one-shot button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704, and the main control board 1310. ..

In the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129(a), the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 are partially separated from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711. All the game balls B facing upward and emitted downward from the game board 5 can be received. The game ball B dropped to the upper left shelf 713b and the upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving port 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d to the lower shelf 713f. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the lower shelf 713f rolls the lower shelf 713f to the left. At this time, when a plurality of game balls B are vertically stacked on the lower shelf portion 713f, they are collapsed by the upper flow straightening wall portion 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled the lower shelf portion 713f to the left falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is stored in the front sensor housing portion 713s. After being detected by the one-ball sensor 703 and passing through the first sphere guiding portion 713u, it is discharged downward through the first discharging guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, in the case of being behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing portion rear 713t, it is discharged downward through the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. To be done.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B circulate and discharge downward through the paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and the partition wall portion 713p. The front side is defined as the first ball path 701, and the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p is defined as the second ball path 702. Therefore, the game ball B dropped from the game board 5 to the front of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B dropped from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

In addition, the base unit 710 removes the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610, and the game ball B is released from the rear base 712 in the ball removal passage 705. Can be discharged downward. The game ball B discharged downward from the first discharge guide 712a (first ball path 701), the second discharge guide 712b (second ball path 702) of the base unit 710, and the ball passage 705 is an island facility. The game ball B on the side is delivered to a part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting.

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of the present embodiment, since the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are provided with a plurality of cutouts 713q, dust is passed through the cutouts 713q. Since dust and the like can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from obstructing the circulation of the game ball B, and suppress the occurrence of ball clogging or the like. Can be made

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 causes the game board to be opened. By removing 5 from the upper side of the base unit 710 (board unit 700), the presence or absence of ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). Can be easily confirmed. And since the cutout 713q is provided in the lower shelf 713f at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the straightening wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f in the ball path member 713, the straightening wall 713e and the lower shelf are provided. When a ball clogging occurs with the portion 713f, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and the security cover 714 is opened, so that a rod-shaped tool is inserted from below through the elimination opening 711b and the cutout portion 713q. It can be inserted between the flow regulating wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball clogging can be eliminated by the tool.

Further, since the lower opening 711b is provided with a solution opening 711b that is opened downward and a security cover 714 that closes the solution opening 711b is provided at a site below the flow rectifying wall 713e, the solution is removed through the solution opening 711b. As described above, the ball clogging can be eliminated, and in a normal state, the crime prevention cover 714 closes the elimination port 711b, so that the linear illegal tool can be operated from the elimination port 711b to the first ball path 701 or the first ball path 701. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being inserted into the second ball path 702 and having a high deterrent against fraud.

Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by rotating about the axis in the left-right direction at the front end side, the main body frame 4 can be opened without closing the security cover 714. When attempting to close the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 comes into contact with the contact threatened object (the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43) and the body frame 4 cannot be closed. It can be noticed that the security cover is forgotten to be closed, and the crime prevention cover 714 can be surely closed so that the crime prevention function of the crime prevention cover 714 can be exerted.

Further, since a plurality of flat plate-like obstructing ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h so as to be separated in the left-right direction and extend downward, Even if the tip of the illegal tool of No. 6 tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf 713b, the lower shelf 713f, and the upper wall 713h, it can come into contact with the inhibition rib 713o to prevent the movement of the tip. It is possible to prevent further insertion of an illegal tool. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Further, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank by the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Therefore, even if a linear illegal tool is inserted from the outlet side of the first discharge guide 712a or the second discharge guide 712b, the complicated route prevents the intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Further, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all the game balls B emitted from the game board 5, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 are detected. It is not necessary to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detecting unit) for detecting, and the cost required for the game board 5 can be reduced, and the game board 5 for detecting the discharged game ball B can be obtained. It becomes possible to secure a space corresponding to the configuration, and by providing the production device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

Further, since the out sphere flows through the first sphere path 701 and the safe sphere flows through the second sphere path 702, respectively, the safe sphere count in the game board 5 and the safe sphere by the second sphere sensor 704. It is possible to determine whether or not a fraudulent activity is being performed on the game board 5 by comparing it with the count number of, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against the fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, when the payout rate per predetermined time (ball output rate) calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visually recognized by the player, Since the player desires to pay out a lot of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is highly likely to pay out a lot of game balls B. It is possible to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. Further, in the case where the payout rate is visibly displayed from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out, the displayed payout rate becomes higher than usual. , Other players, staff members of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are more likely to notice the fraudulent activity, and thus can hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity. Can be

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible to the player, the staff in the game hall, etc. can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraud. When the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay) Since it is possible that there is a problem with the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the problem early and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball removal passage 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704. The game ball B without a ball is not counted in. Therefore, only the game balls B emitted from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the out sphere flows through the first sphere path 701 and the safe sphere flows through the second sphere path 702, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first sphere path 701 is not limited thereto. The safe balls may be arranged so that the out balls circulate in the second ball path 702, respectively, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is the first ball path 701 and the second ball regardless of the safe ball and the out ball. Any of the ball paths 702 may be used for distribution.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the solution opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the crime prevention cover 714, but the invention is not limited to this, and the solution opening 711b is opened and closed by sliding it forward or backward or left and right. Good as a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is divided into the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 by partitioning by one partition wall portion 713p. Although it is shown that the ball is discharged through any one of the three ball paths, the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 seen from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 seen from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. . FIG. 141 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board with the center accessory and the like made transparent. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the table unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145 in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG. 145 in an enlarged manner.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general prize hole 2001, a gate 2002, a variable prize hole 2003, which gives a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game ball B, A first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, and a second big winning opening 2007 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, and a second winning opening 2006 in the game area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the operation of hitting the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so that they can be received or passed through the two major winning openings 2007 and the like.

The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component member 1000 whose outer shape is a substantially quadrangular shape in front view, and a rear end of the game region 5a that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 145 to FIG. 147, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the game is carried out by hitting the game ball B mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160 etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000, which is provided.

The effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (in this case, four) general winning openings 2001 that are capable of receiving the game balls B driven into the game area 5a and are always open. The gate 2002 for detecting the passage of the game ball B, and the variable winning port 2003 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002. And, the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 which are provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and are always open so as to receive the game ball B, and the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. The first special winning opening 2006 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first prize. According to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol which is provided at a position different from the mouth 2006 and is drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting mouth 2004 or the second starting mouth 2005. It is provided with a second big winning opening 2007 that allows the game ball B to be received, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is further provided with a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, which are respectively provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and are always open so as to receive the game ball B. ..

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2004, and the front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has four general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit, which is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front side. 2300, and a lower right unit 2400 which is provided on the right side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a and which has the second starting opening 2005 and the second sub-out opening 2022, It is provided above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. The variable winning opening 2003, the first big winning opening 2006, the second A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a special winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is provided near the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the gate 2002. And a gate member 2600 having

The table unit 2000 is provided on the right side in the game area 5a and includes a specific obstacle nail group 2700 including a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall, and a back wall of the back box 3010. A rear box rear unit 3030 detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back substrate unit 3040 arranged behind the rear box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 are provided. There is.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower portion near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 in which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flows and the front end in the back box 3010. Inside the back box 3010, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, the back front front effect unit 3300 provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the front front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction. In front of the back lower front effect unit 3200 provided behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and in the back box 3010 behind the back front effect unit 3300 provided behind the rear effect unit 3500 (FIG. 155), and a back lower back effect unit 3600 provided behind the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stopper 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front component member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view in the frame. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 matches the notch portion 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 penetrate the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component member 1000 is formed substantially transparent, and the game panel 1100, the rear unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 holds a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 145 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole and a short long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge are separated from each other in the left-right direction, and the plate thickness is thin. And a plurality of engaging step portions 1114 (see FIG. 148). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion 1114 is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. Is.

In the panel plate 1110, a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset to the upper side of the center in a front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game ball B (circumferential direction of the frame shape) is left side and The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and a holding step portion (not shown) which is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion has a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of projecting pins projecting forward from the holding step portion and inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and outside the holding step portion. Three engaging claws that are arranged and elastically engage with the engaging step portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel protruding upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. The plate 1110 is provided with a pair of engaging pieces that engage with the two engaging step portions 1114 on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above, and moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to incline the upper side and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion 1114 of the existing portion with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in a state of being accommodated in the holding stepped portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component member 1000 attached to the front side, when the game panel 5 is assembled, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a, and thus the player. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and the size of the actual game area 5a does not change, but it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is provided on the rear surface. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008, and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the bottom surface. From the discharge portion 1201 formed in the above, it can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 141, 143, 144, and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of a polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side or the back surface side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or an unauthorized IC is mounted) It can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrent to the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2601, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a first big winning opening sensor 2525, and a second big winning opening. It is connected to the sensor 2561, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first big winning opening solenoid 2524, the second big winning opening solenoid 2563, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirmation of the set value, a setting switch button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the set value, The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the set value is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connector-connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is a harness. Via, may be electrically connected). By this connector connection (board-to-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension of the right side and left side of the main control board 1310. The center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, which are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the centerlines passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder for rotating a setting key by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, and a setting including a pressing operation portion above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp that is provided with a change button 1311b and can emit a single color (for example, red) to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting change button 1311b) on the center line of the setting change board 1311. 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310g composed of a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged near the connector MSCN above the center line of the main control board 1310, and the center line of the main control board 1310 is arranged. A base monitor 1310h that is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a line from the center to the right side is arranged below the main control board 1310 toward the center. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation portion is arranged in the.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening extends in the vertical direction). At the initial position, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion port, another line is installed in a row opposite to the island facility of the game hall. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and then the first ON operation is performed, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON, and this setting key ON signal is set. Input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder can be turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and then the second ON operation can be performed to set the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the original position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the decision key is turned on. The setting key cylinder 1311a is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned off so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned to its initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder 1311a is turned off). Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions that are completely different from each other, that is, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized by only the setting key switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed collectively by only the setting key switch 1311a alone.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are inserted through the openings formed in the corresponding cover bodies of the main control board box 1320. "Gap" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the openings corresponding to each other, though they are exposed. In order to prevent modification of the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 by intruding a wire or the like from the wire, a wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body for each of these openings. .. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch As a routing of the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted, do not bring them close to each other on the setting change substrate 1311 (separate from each other). In addition to being formed, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. In the main control board 1310, various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed. Wiring pattern (that is, a wiring pattern in which a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of (1) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f It is formed so that the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from is not close to each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, a brief description will be given of the case of changing the setting of the set value, and a brief description of the case of displaying the confirmation of the current set value. In addition, the setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current setting values that have been set in addition to changing the setting values. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure), power is restored to the outer frame 2 with respect to the body frame. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed. The "predetermined set value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on needs to be satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then the outer frame 2 Setting is performed by opening the main body frame 4, then inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotating clockwise by 60 degrees, and performing the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned on, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. The “predetermined set value change permission condition” may be a condition that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is further operated and an operation signal is input. That is, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 and power restoration at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs), and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees and is turned on for the first time, and thereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting change of the set value may be executable when the “predetermined set value change permission condition” that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

The person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then the main frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. Perform the work of opening, then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation for setting. The key switch 1311a turns on the setting key. Then, the power switch 630a (see FIG. 7) is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current setting values stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON). The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the extinguished state to the lit state.

When a person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting change button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 causes a detection signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is input to. Every time a person who performs setting change of the setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting change button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a causes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the set value 6, which is the maximum value, is reached, the value returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and the set value is increased again by 1 to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value rotates the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the cylinder rotation position to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then perform the OFF operation. The setting key switch 1311a is set to the ON key by operating the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a.

It should be noted that the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (that is, the setting key cylinder). When the switch 1311a is returned to the OFF position of the setting key cylinder for turning OFF, the ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, the setting key switch 1311a is simply turned off to determine the setting value and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder as it is. It becomes possible to improve workability.

The person who changes the setting of the set value returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder whose decision key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder which turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key cylinder 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from a lighted state to a lighted state.

The person who changes the setting of the set value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the set value. To complete.

When confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set, the outer frame 2 is displayed after the power is restored when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to make the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by being operated. In other words, the person who actually performs the confirmation display of the set value that is currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). , The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to make the first operation. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

The person who confirms and displays the set value currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the first ON operation is performed by rotating the setting key switch 60 degrees clockwise. This turns on the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current setting values stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON). The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, even if the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains off, and a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation section of the setting switching button 1311b, the pressing operation is still performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

After confirming the currently set setting value, the person who performs confirmation display of the currently set setting value turns the setting key switch 1311a to the original position (that is, The setting key switch 1311a is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the setting key cylinder turning position (turning position). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set set value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and sets the current setting. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is that the predetermined set value change permission condition is the power when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, so that the setting key cylinder moves clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by being turned by 60 degrees and then turned on by the first ON, the predetermined set value display permission condition is that the pachinko machine is operated as described above. After the power is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set. It is necessary that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder and turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In this way, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder insertion port. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is inserted into the setting key, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the setting key is turned ON by the first ON operation. The setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the preset setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, to briefly describe the set value, the "set value" means, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery and the probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit, from the time of probability change to normal. It is possible to change the probability for lottery determination when moving to time, the distribution ratio to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, what the player acquires Probability (the degree of advantage) in which the number of game balls B that can be played can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, as the set values, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the proportion of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern). Big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of determination values, small hit determination table that defines the percentage of small hit determination values that indicates that you have won a small hit, ratio of determination values that determine small hit symbols The small hit symbol determination table, the normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability change time to the normal time is specified) is selected, and is used in various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which a distribution time is defined, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, and the like) are selected. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, the various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and various tables used in various distribution rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. Some of them may have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned set values, the six set values (integers) in the range from the set value 1 to the set value 6 are set, but the set values may be set in a smaller range or set in a larger range. It may be one. For example, there may be four set values (integers) in the range from set value 1 to set value 4, or eight set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a when the power is restored to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the power-off process on the main control side does not end normally when the power is shut off, there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM incorporated in itself (or you trust it). Cannot be done), and an error message is displayed to inform that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 among the game balls B shot in the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B is displayed. Of the game balls B launched in the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 160 and the like), and this detection signal is mainly transmitted via the panel relay board. It is input to the control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the count result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It is possible to input the signal of the decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but set the setting key switch 1311a from the initial position to set the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only within the range up to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on. In this case, the counterclockwise clock is used to return the setting key switch 1311a′ from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a′ can be turned on by pressing the setting key switch 1311a′ by rotating the setting key switch 1311a′ in the direction of 60 degrees, and the signal of this setting key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be described as “modification example (1) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It is possible to input the decision key ON signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation section. A determination key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation part of the enter key button. The wire intrusion prevention unit is provided on the cover body so that the wire cannot be modified through the opening and the "gap" formed in the setting change substrate 1311 and the main control substrate 1310. The structure will be molded. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The setting key button may be arranged on the setting change board 1311 in the vicinity of the setting key switch 1311a or in the vicinity of the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker in which the name of each button is printed is provided at a position corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused with each other. Is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation part of either the enter key button or the setting switch button 1311b (for pressing the pressing operation part It is necessary to open the cover.), or the pressing operation part having a different color may be adopted, and the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation. It is also possible to adopt a switch having a different shape, or to use another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as a decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the decision key button and the wiring pattern for the setting change button 1311b are laid out. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted do not come close to each other ( (Separated from each other). Further, when the determination key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A setting key switch 1311a′ that can be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the set key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be referred to as a “variation example (2) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. However, the signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the handle unit 180 in the handle unit 180 has a palm or a palm. Detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and detection from a single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is not touching the handle 195. It can be determined that the decision key is not ON when not touching, and/or the decision key is ON when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single shot button operation sensor 194. On the other hand, when it is possible to determine that there is, the determination key is not ON when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) Good)) may be referred to as a “variation (3) of the determination key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the firing control section of the payout control board 633 to be described later. From the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b, the firing reference pulse is branched at the payout control board 633 and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the decision key is based on these fire reference pulses. The presence/absence of ON may be determined. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B per minute to be launched toward the game area 5a, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, and the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as “Modification of decision key (4)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. Although the signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 is detected. If the distance measuring sensor capable of being provided is provided on the game board 5 and the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is It may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted from the light emitting portion passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension, The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving section, whereby the motion of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input through the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the enter key is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no motion, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be referred to as a “variant of the enter key (5)”). .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder moves counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating and turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the original position (that is, the setting position) that is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and the OFF is transmitted to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. As a result, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided in the setting change board 1311. However, instead of this, it may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633. . When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFF signals is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the serial circuit may be referred to as a “variation example (6) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder moves counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating and turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the original position (that is, the setting position) that is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and OFF is transmitted as a pulse signal to the outside. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. As a result, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided in the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633. .. The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit has, for example, a pulse width of 1 ms when it is information for transmitting the setting key ON, and a pulse width of 3 ms when it is information for transmitting the determination key ON. If the information is OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects the setting key ON, the enter key ON, from the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which of the two is ON or OFF is the information to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be referred to as "variation (7) of the enter key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder moves counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating and turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the original position (that is, the setting position) that is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the decision key ON signal, and the OFF key The voltage level of the signal is set in the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V among zero V to 5V) between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a causes the setting key ON signal ON/OFF, the decision key ON signal ON/OFF, and the OFF signal OFF. ON/OFF of may be determined. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be referred to as a “variation example (8) of the determination key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation section of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation section of the enter key button. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body so as to prevent the wire or the like from entering the opening and the open control part to modify the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The position of the determination key button on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. The cover body of the payout control board 633 is provided with a sticker printed with the name of each button at a position corresponding to the decision key button and the error release switch so that the decision key button and the error release switch are not confused with each other. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the decision key button with the error release switch, a button with a cover for covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the error release switch (a cover for pressing the pressing operation part is operated. Is required to be opened.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, the outer shape of the decision key button and the error release switch, or the shape of the pressing operation part. Different from each other, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button may be used. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision control button 633 is provided with a decision key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the decision pattern is provided as a wiring between the decision key button wiring pattern and the error release switch wiring pattern. The control board 633 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are also kept close to each other (separated from each other). ) Is formed. Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a′ that can be used may be described (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the set key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be referred to as a “variation example (9) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON is determined based on this signal. Good. As described above, the error cancel switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed after power recovery (power-on of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while based on the signal from the error release switch. When the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. This makes it possible to improve security depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode of the error release switch may be referred to as a “variant of the enter key (10)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. The logic of the signal from the error release switch is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and the command of the payout control unit power-on process described below is generated. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error cancel switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed after power recovery (power-on of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and informs that effect. When the command is received, it is possible to determine that the decision key is ON, but the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command to that effect. If so, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. This makes it possible to improve security depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as a “variant (11) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. 1311a is set to the OFF position by turning the setting key cylinder to OFF), and is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise to be turned OFF, and further 60 degrees counterclockwise to be turned ON) second ON operation By doing so, the enter key ON of the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of the enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 and branched in the payout control board 633. The presence/absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310 via the control substrate 633 and the main control MPU 1310a being input. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f operates when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), in the case of performing a setting change capable of changing and determining a set value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) in its own RAM. Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. The main control MPU 1310a can turn on the enter key when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it is determined that the enter key is not ON. You can As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the wire and the like cannot be penetrated through the "gap" formed in the part and the opening corresponding to the part to modify the dispensing control board 633. The structure will be molded into.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. The cover body of the payout control board 633 has a sticker printed with the name of each button at a position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused with each other. Affixed (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Further, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation unit of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (for pressing the pressing operation unit It is necessary to open the cover.), the color of the pressing operation portion may be different, the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, or the pressing operation. It is also possible to adopt a switch having a different shape or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. When the payout control board 633 is provided with the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. Are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) in the payout control board 633, and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error clear switch is transmitted are also kept close to each other (mutually). Are formed separately. When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a′ that can be used (the mode of the RAM clear switch (including the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′) may be referred to as a “variation example (12) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. 1311a is turned to the OFF position by turning the setting key cylinder to the OFF position), and is turned OFF by rotating counterclockwise by 60 degrees, and further turned by 60 degrees counterclockwise) Second ON operation By doing so, the enter key ON of the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of the enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 to the port input of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 which receives the command is monitored by the processing, creates a command, transmits the command created in the command transmission processing of the payout control unit power-on processing, which will be described later, to the main control board 1310. The presence/absence of the decision key ON may be determined. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f operates when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), in the case of performing a setting change capable of changing and determining a set value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) in its own RAM. Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. The main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 can be used. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of (3) and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thus, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode 2 of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) is referred to as "modification of the enter key (13)". May be stated).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It was possible to input the decision key ON signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb cutting detection sensor 574, or a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these input detection signals, or the logic of detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and creates a command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 which has transmitted this command to the main control board 1310 and receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (of the payout unit). The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “a modification key (16) of the determination key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. However, the signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the main control MPU 1310a is changed from the main frame opening switch. It is possible to determine that the determination key is ON when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 on the basis of the detection signal of the When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the main body frame is opened). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (17) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. However, the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the main control MPU 1310a is operated from the door frame opening switch. It is possible to determine that the determination key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 on the basis of the detection signal of, while the door frame 3 is kept closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (door frame opening). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (17) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn the decision key ON. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again and remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a to close the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). Setting switch 1311a by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turning 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON position. The decision key ON can be turned on, and the signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 may be provided (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as “variation (18) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a included in the setting change substrate 1311 is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON). Setting switch 1311a by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turning 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON position. The decision key ON can be turned on and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position and turning off the setting key switch 1311a. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the setting key switch 1311a′). Mode 2 (including the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′) may be referred to as a “variation example (19) of the enter key”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It is possible to input the signal of the decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation section. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation part of the enter key button. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body so as to prevent modification of the main control board 1310 by intruding wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation part of the enter key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The position of the enter key button on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is provided at a position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused with each other. Is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the press operation part. It is necessary to open the cover.), the color of the pressing operation portion may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, or the pressing operation. It is also possible to adopt a switch having a different shape, or to use another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part as a decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press operation portion as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for the determination key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other). When the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a' may be provided (the mode 2 of the enter key button (the mode of the set key switch 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as a "variation example (20) of the enter key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, a RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f operates when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), in the case of performing a setting change capable of changing and determining a set value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) in its own RAM. Be sure to clear all areas except the specified area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a surely clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed. Can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). Mode 3 (including the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′) may be referred to as a “variation (21) of the enter key”). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is output from the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310f also has a function of an error release switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error release switch.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the gate 2002 of the game board 5 provided Gate sensor 2601, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, second starting opening sensor 2401, variable winning opening sensor 2526, first big winning opening sensor 2525, second big The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the winning opening sensor 2561) and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various sensors, etc.). (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be referred to as “modification example (22) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to send the game ball B to the gate 2002, and various winning holes, in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to send the game ball B to or to send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. The signal of this decision key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a uses a stepping motor, a DC motor, The drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid is controlled to control the operation of the movable body (feature), and the movement of the movable body (feature) is detected based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measuring sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, the operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (optical type). The aspect of the object sensor (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be referred to as a “variation (23) of the decision key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the enter key is turned ON, and the optical sensor causes the optical sensor to move to its original position. It is necessary to move the movable body (feature) so as to detect the operation position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It was possible to input the signal of this decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, detect an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “variation (24) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. Although the signal of the decision key ON can be inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. By vibrating the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to various winning holes and gates (gate 2002) provided on the game board 5. When a vibration sensor for detecting a fraudulent act of entering a ball is provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is a fraudulent act based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and also based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. The presence/absence of the decision key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (25) of the enter key”). In this case, a person who changes the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the enter key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It was possible to input the signal of this decision key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to play the game. Provided on the game board 5 and the payout device 580 are radio wave sensors that detect misbehavior by improperly acquiring the game ball B by causing various sensors of various winning openings provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580 to malfunction. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence/absence of cheating based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence/absence of the decision key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ capable of rotating only the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the radio wave sensor). The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be described as “a modification example (26) of the enter key”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with a radio wave in order to turn on the enter key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise. It is possible to input the decision key ON signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, however, the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation section unit 350 is used. The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the touch detection sensor 373 and the detection signal from the contact detection sensor body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (production operation button The mode of the unit (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a′ may be included) may be referred to as “variation of decision key (27)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 configured by the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are caulked by a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion. The caulking portion is a sealing mechanism and is provided in plural. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the crimping portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 as described above can be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each of them. It is possible to modify the setting change substrate 1311 by intruding a wire or the like through "clearances" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the decision key button. In order to prevent this, the wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body with respect to the opening. As the structure of the setting change board box, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, when the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, An opening/closing switch for the setting change substrate cover body that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be performed. Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is released from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above (setting change board box). May be referred to as a “modification example (28) of the determination key”).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to prevent unauthorized modification. A wiring pattern for transmitting a key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key switch 1311a OFF signal, and a setting switching button 1311b The wiring pattern to which the signal from is transmitted is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) in the setting change board 1311 as a wiring arrangement, and the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (main control Connections to the connector MSCN of the board 1310) are also formed apart from each other, and the main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern (that is, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting key switch 1311a is ON) in which various signals are transmitted from the setting key switch 1311a. Signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern in which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a wiring pattern in which an OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and a signal from the setting switch button 1311b. The wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch are also formed so as not to come close to each other (separate from each other). One of the wiring patterns for transmitting the signal of the decision key ON of 1311a is transmitted via the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the wiring pattern. The main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). The other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 may be connected to the main control board. Other connectors provided in 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the wiring pattern may be referred to as a “decision key modification (29)”).

Further, among the modifications (1) to (29) of the decision key described above, a mode in which they are appropriately selected and combined may be adopted (the modification combination of the modification is referred to as “decision key modification (30)”. May be stated).

In addition, in the setting value described above, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit, in order to make a lottery judgment when shifting from the probability change time to the normal time It is possible to change the probability of, the distribution ratio to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and it is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of balls of the game ball B that the player can obtain is increased. Probability (advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, as the set values, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance, and from set value 1 to set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player has been set in advance. By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although there are a plurality of set values ranging from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player for other pachinko machines is high. In some cases, there is a single preset value that is preset. In other words, like the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of setting values in advance, and the game specification in which the setting needs to be changed is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification in which the probability (advantage) has only a single set value in advance and no setting change is necessary. However, if the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such a game specification, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are set. Depends on the game specification, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations are provided according to the game specification. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be commonly used without depending on the game specification, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player exists in advance with only a single set value, and there is no need to change the setting, the probability (advantage degree) of the setting value being advantageous to the player. Since there is no need to use it as, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 are dealt with by the design change by the software that assigns the following contents. You can

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns after clearing a predetermined area (the area excluding the specific area of the entire area of the RAM) of the RAM incorporated therein (after clearing the RAM). The pachinko machine 1 can be started up in various ways) and can be used as a set value. In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (feature) controlled by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of the light-emitting body such as the lamp or the LED, the setting value 1 is "all operations (movable body (role)". Object operation, lighting of the light emitter)) is assigned to the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, and the setting value 2 is assigned to actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies the "movable object (role) operation" and is set. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as the value 3, and the detailed value of the movable body (role) (variable moving speed, movement over the entire operation area, other The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "operations such as interference check with a structure or another movable body (feature) and operation order with another movable body (feature)" is assigned, and "5" is set as the set value. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter for each port (lighting of the light emitter for each predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, for each output port))" is assigned, and the set value 6 is "6". The actual machine confirming operation pattern 6 designating "no operation" is assigned (the change setting mode of the actual machine confirming operation after clearing the RAM may be referred to as "variant (1) with common hardware configuration"). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (role) and the lighting of light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs by repeatedly performing the main-machine-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, in the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared. The peripheral control board 1510 which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a movable body which is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the contents (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. It is possible to perform the operation of the (feature) and the lighting of the light emitter. Due to the mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Further, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the variation of the symbols to the demonstration (demonstration performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies “10 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies “15 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 2, and the time setting pattern 2 is set as “20 seconds”. , A time setting pattern 3 designating “25 seconds” is assigned as a setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 designating “30 seconds” is assigned as a setting value 5, The time setting pattern 6 designating "35 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of changing the time from the end of the variation of the symbol to the player waiting state is set to "a modification example (2) based on the common hardware configuration". )” may be described). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. Due to the mode of changing and setting the time from the end of the variation of the symbols to the state of waiting for the player, it is possible to have variations in the time from the end of the variation of the symbols to the demonstration.

Further, for example, it is possible to use as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of the demonstration (demonstration performed in the player waiting state) performed after the fluctuation of the symbols. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies “comical effect” as the setting value 1 is assigned, and the demo effect setting pattern that specifies “comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (role)” is set as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies “serious effect” as the setting value 3 is allocated, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies “serial effect, motion effect of the movable body (role)” is assigned as the setting value 4. 4 is assigned, a demo production setting pattern 5 that specifies “period play style production” as the setting value 5 is assigned, and a demo production setting that specifies “period play style production, movable body (role)” as the setting value 6 The pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration effect may be referred to as “variant (3) with common hardware configuration”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration effect, it is possible to give variations to the contents of the demonstration effect performed after the end of the variation of the symbols.

Further, for example, it is possible to use a plurality of default sound volumes adjusted by a sound volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510 as set values capable of being set. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 designating "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 designating "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. , A volume setting pattern 3 designating “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and a volume setting pattern 5 designating “volume 5” is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 designating "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of default volume change setting may be described as "variant (4) with common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. In the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, the default volume is set with the volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Also, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved to the direction in which the volume adjustment switch decreases the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is increased), and the movement to the minimum volume end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the sound is stopped in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of “volume 6” assigned to the setting value 6 is moved to the direction in which the volume adjustment switch increases the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is decreased), and moved to the maximum volume end. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be the maximum volume, or the volume may be a predetermined rate (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This default volume change setting mode allows the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510 to have variations.

Further, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sound in error notification of various problems, spots, and errors. The various error notification sounds are those that cannot be adjusted (that is, those that are not dependent) by the operation of the volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by setting the maximum volume is used in the game hall. Although a clerk such as a store clerk can easily notice it, the player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies “error notification volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies “error notification volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and the setting value 5 is “ The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies “error notification volume 5” is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies “error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)” is assigned as the setting value 6 (volume of error notification sound In some cases, the aspect of the change setting of (1) is described as "Modified example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that from the setting value 1 (a volume that does not mute, and a volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to a setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward the sound volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if it is several meters away from the pachinko machine that issues the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a performs control to emit the error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification sound volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light emitter that is the target controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies “brightness 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies “brightness 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is “ The default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as the setting value 5 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies “brightness 6” as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of default brightness change setting may be referred to as “variant (6) with common hardware configuration”). is there). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, thereby performing lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a becomes a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the existing light-emitting body so that the light-emitting body can be turned on, blinking, and gradation points. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the contents of the default brightness, it is possible to give variations to the default brightness of the light emitter such as a lamp or LED.

Further, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of luminances of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification of various problems, spots, and errors. The error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification brightness 1” as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp that is the target to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and the “error notification brightness 2” is set as the setting value 2. The error notification brightness setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 to specify "error notification brightness 3" as the setting value 3, and the error notification brightness to specify "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 The brightness notification pattern 4 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies “error notification brightness 5” as the setting value 5 is allocated, and the error notification brightness that specifies “error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)” as the setting value 6 The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be referred to as "variant (7) with common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that from the setting value 1 (the lamp brightness is low, but the brightness of the lamp is low, and when it stops in front of the pachinko machine, the brightness of the lamp at which error notification can be recognized) toward the setting value 6 (maximum brightness), The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly changing the brightness of the light emitter in error notification by performing a timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, to control lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. To do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the illuminant that is turned on, turn the illuminator on, blink, gradation points, and so on. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitter such as the lamp or the LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, the various set values assigned to the modified examples (1) to (7) according to the common hardware configuration described above satisfy the preset set value display permission condition in the set value confirmation display process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Although it is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to the power-off (setting value display). May be referred to as a “modified example (8) based on a common hardware configuration”).

Further, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) according to the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted as the modification (30) of the determination key described above.

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary for the setting key to be turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a causes the main control MRAM 1310a to specify a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing. The game is progressed by clearing except for, and then performing interrupt permission setting and the like. Further, when the preset set value change permission condition described above is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, to execute the setting change of the main control internal RAM. The game is progressed by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then making interrupt permission settings and the like. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and when the above-described predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then advances the game by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. It will be. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or at the time of power restoration at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs) The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (in some cases, it may be referred to as "a modification of a predetermined set value change permission condition"). is there).

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 after the power is restored when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary for the setting key to be turned on. When this preset set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value that is set in the set value confirmation display process that is performed as one process of the main control timer interrupt process described later. It is displayed on the vessel 1310g. As described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be pressed by the pressing operation unit when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the pressing period is limited. Therefore, as the predetermined set value display permission condition described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs) The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not have to be pressed (in the case of "a modification of a predetermined set value display permission condition"). There is). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, and the main control side power supply described later. In the process at the time of throwing in, the game is advanced by performing before the initial setting and the starting setting of the built-in WDT, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. When the modified example of the preset set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the interrupt permission setting yet, so the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. Without performing, the detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initialized. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key switch 1311a being turned 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and being turned on first. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key ON signal are not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame to detect the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when the preset value display permission condition is modified and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the modification of the preset setting change permission condition described above and the modification of the preset setting display permission condition described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power restoration at the time of power recovery after a momentary power failure (occurring), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the assumption that the key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees and then the first ON operation is performed to set the key ON. In some cases, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, to clear all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area, and then performs interrupt permission setting and the like. While the game progresses, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process described later, and thereafter, The game progresses by setting interrupt permission. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process even once when the progress of the game is started. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like, the current set value that has been set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed in the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process described later. The number of balls of the played game ball B is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the power-on process of the main control side which will be described later, and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 is monitored by the base monitor 1310h. To display. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-described base monitor 1310h (may be referred to as "variation of usage method of base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set value that has been set during the period from the power recovery to the start of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. It is possible to display the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission after power recovery. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

Further, any one of the above-described modification of the preset setting change permission condition, the modification of the preset setting display permission condition described above, and the modification of the base monitor using method described above is appropriately used. You may select and may employ|adopt in the modification (30) of the above-mentioned determination key.

In addition, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-described modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-described modification of the base monitor using method is appropriately used. You may select and may be employ|adopted by the modifications (1)-(8) by the common hardware structure mentioned above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game situation), a regular symbol lottery result, a special symbol lottery result, and the like. .

Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status and a drawing result of an ordinary symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of two LEDs and a normal reservation display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball B into the gate 2002.

In addition, the function display unit 1400, a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been lottered by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004, and the first start. A first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth 2004, and a second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005. Second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result, and a second special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2005 And are equipped with.

Further, the function display unit 1400, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "win" or the like, the number of times the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 is repeated. A round indicator including five LEDs for displaying (round number) is provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on and off, and turning on and off the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIG. 160).

The peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the rear side of the set plate 1650 that attaches the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 and the set plate 1650. The effect display device 1600, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front surface of the set plate 1650 that is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the approximate center (FIGS. 151 to 153). See). The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 while the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and is attached in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end projects into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are capable of receiving the game balls B driven into the game area 5a and are always open. The gate 2002 which detects the passage of the game ball B, and the variable winning port 2003 which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002. And, a first starting opening 2004 and a second starting opening 2005 which are provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and are always open so as to receive the game ball B, and the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. The first special winning opening 2006 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first prize. According to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the mouth 2006 and is lottered by receiving the game ball B into the first starting mouth 2004 or the second starting mouth 2005. It is provided with a second special winning opening 2007 that allows the game ball B to be accepted.

Further, the table unit 2000 is further provided with a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, which are respectively provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and are always open so as to receive the game ball B. ..

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part in the game area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the vertical center in the vicinity of the left end in front view in the game area 5a. The variable winning port 2003 is arranged at the upper right of the gate 2002. The first starting port 2004 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The second starting port 2005 is arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2004 in the lower part of the game area 5a and above the first starting port 2004. The first special winning opening 2006 is arranged directly above the variable winning opening 2003 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a. The second big winning opening 2007 is arranged close to the right end of the game basin 5a, slightly higher than the height of 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a.

The first sub-outlet 2021 is arranged between the second special winning opening 2007 and the left end of the game area 5a. The second sub-out port 2022 is arranged on the right side of the second starting port 2005.

The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2004, and a front opening left of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 which is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has four general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 which is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 in front view. , A lower right unit 2400 provided on the right side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a and having a second starting opening 2005 and a second sub-out opening 2022. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is provided above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and the variable winning opening 2003, the first A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a special winning opening 2006, a second special winning opening 2007, and a first sub-out opening 2021, and on the left side of the center accessory 2500 near the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. A gate member 2600 that is provided and has a gate 2002, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 that is provided at the right portion in the game area 5a and that includes a plurality of obstacle nails N are provided.

The lower right unit 2400, which will be described in detail later, is capable of accepting the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007, and is a pseudo special winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning opening 2007, and a pseudo. The game ball B not received in the special winning opening 2402 is ejected to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a pseudo-out opening 2404 is provided.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The starting unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, directly above the outlet 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2004 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

By attaching the starting opening unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting opening 2004 projects forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and then is opened upward, so that the center role object 2500 is in the left-right direction. Located just below the center. More specifically, the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 is located immediately below the central discharge part 2513a of the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 in the state assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the central discharge part 2513a of the stage 2513 is accepted by the first starting opening 2004 with a high probability.

The starting opening unit 2100, while attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and transfers it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. You can The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with four general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can always be received. The four general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. Each of the four general winning openings 2001 opens upward.

The side unit 2200 has four general winning openings 2001 projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower rightward.

The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf part 2301.

[5-8d. Lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. The lower right unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2005, a second sub-out opening 2022, and a second starting opening sensor 2401 (see FIG. 149 and the like) for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2005. , Are provided.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo special winning opening 2402 that extends left and right over the entire width in the left-right direction, and a pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. It has a pseudo outlet 2404 provided below the left end of the pseudo special winning opening 2402. The pseudo big winning opening 2402 and the pseudo out opening 2404 are open toward the front. The pseudo special winning opening 2402 is larger (wider) on the left and right than the second special winning opening 2007. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 in the left-right direction is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the normally used special winning opening.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo special winning opening door 2405 that opens and closes the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and a pseudo special winning opening solenoid 2406 that opens and closes the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 (see FIG. 149 and the like). ), and are provided. The pseudo special winning opening door 2405 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a lower side rotatably supported about an axis extending in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second starting port 2005 is arranged right above the pseudo out port 2404 and directly above the pseudo special winning port 2402, and the second sub-out port 2022 is on the right side of the second starting port 2005. Adjacent to each other.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end is located near the right side of the out port 1008, the right end is close to the right rail 1005, and the right and left direction is almost the right lower rail 1004. The length is formed so as to cover the upper side.

The lower right unit 2400 is a flat plate-shaped base plate 2407 that can be brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, and projects forward from the base plate 2407 to form a space (pseudo game region 2010) independent of the game region 5a. A possible partition 2410. The base plate 2407 and the partition 2410 are made of a transparent material. The second starting opening 2005, the second sub-out opening 2022, the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and the pseudo out opening 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403 is provided on the base plate 2407. It is provided on the rear side. Inside the partition 2410, a pseudo special winning opening 2402 and a pseudo out opening 2404 are provided.

The partition part 2410 extends to the left and right over the entire width and is inclined so that the right end side is higher, and the first standing wall part 2412 extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall part 2411. A right slanted wall portion 2413 that obliquely extends from the upper end of the first standing wall portion 2412 to the lower left, and a right lateral wall portion 2414 that horizontally extends from the lower end of the right slanted wall portion 2413 to the first standing wall portion 2412, The second standing wall portion 2415, which is separated from the right lateral wall portion 2414 to the left and extends upward from the first standing wall portion 2412 from a portion at the same height as the lower end of the right lateral wall portion 2414, and the second standing wall portion 2415 The left sloping wall portion 2416 extending obliquely to the lower right from a portion having the same height as the upper end of the one standing wall portion 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second standing wall portion 2415, and the second sloping wall portion from the lower end of the left sloping wall portion 2416 A left lateral wall portion 2417 that horizontally extends to the left of the standing wall portion 2415, and an inclined wall portion 2418 that obliquely extends to the lower left from the left end of the left lateral wall portion 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411. And a third standing wall portion 2419 extending downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position lower than the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411.

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to have a length that is approximately one gaming ball B shorter than the length of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction. The distance between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length of the second special winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction. The distance between the lower end of the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the lower end of the left slanted wall portion 2416 is approximately half the length of the second special winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction.

The second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are arranged in the left lateral wall part 2417 between the second standing wall part 2415 and the inclined wall part 2418. The pseudo special winning opening 2402 is arranged directly below the right lateral wall portion 2414, the left lateral wall portion 2417, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and a portion along the inclined wall portion 2418 is obliquely cut out with respect to a horizontally long rectangle. The shape opens to the front. The pseudo out port 2404 is arranged adjacent to a portion where the bottom wall portion 2411 and the third standing wall portion 2419 intersect with each other.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 has a flat lower right decoration portion 2431 that closes the front end side of a triangular frame formed by the first standing wall portion 2412, the right slanted wall portion 2413, and the right lateral wall portion 2414. And the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the second standing wall portion 2415, the left sloping wall portion 2416, and the left lateral wall portion 2417 is closed, and is forward of the second starting opening 2005 and the second sub-out opening 2022. It is provided in the center between the extending lower right and left decorations 2432, 2431 and the lower right and decorations 2432, and has a downward arrow shape from the base plate 2407 to the front. And a lower right middle decoration portion 2433 that projects (see FIG. 137 and the like).

Further, the lower right unit 2400 is provided behind the base plate 2407, and the pseudo special winning opening 2402, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 are independently provided. Further, a lower right decoration board 2434 having a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting and decorating light is mounted on the front surface.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo special winning opening door 2405, a lower right decoration portion 2431, a lower right decoration portion 2432, and a lower middle decoration portion 2433, each of which has a translucent decorative seal on the front surface thereof. Is pasted.

The lower right unit 2400 is provided in the lower right corner in the game area 5a in a state in which the game ball B cannot flow on the right side and the lower side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed to the front around the upper portion of each of the right sloping wall portion 2413, the second standing wall portion 2415, and the left sloping wall portion 2416, and a plurality of obstacles are present in the area. Nail N is planted. A portion between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is located below the second special winning opening 2007 in the center accessory 2500. Then, the upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, that is, the inside of the partition portion 2410 is the game. It is a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the area 5a.

Further, in the lower right unit 2400 assembled in the game board 5, the second starting port 2005 is located slightly to the right of the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500, and the inclined wall portion 2418. The lower end (left end) of is located below the first starting port 2004. Even above the second starting opening 2005, the second sub-out opening 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed to the front, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in that portion. It is set up.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, and the pseudo out port 2404 is separated from the out port 1008 to the upper right by about one gaming ball B. Further, the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent base plate 2407 and the like.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 to the rear of the game panel 1100, detect it by the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharge it downward. Further, the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo special winning opening 2402 and a pseudo out opening 2404 inside the partition 2410 (pseudo gaming area 2010). Inside the partition portion 2410, only the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 is formed to flow.

In the lower right unit 2400, in a normal state, the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is upright, and the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 closes the pseudo special winning opening 2402 so that the game ball B cannot be received. ing. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inside of the partition 2410 (pseudo game area 2010) passes through the front of the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 closing the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and the bottom wall portion 2411. After flowing down and rolling to the left along the inclination of the bottom wall portion 2411, further rolling to the left is blocked by the third standing wall portion 2419, and the portion is opened forward at the relevant portion. It is received in the simulated outlet 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 is not returned into the game area 5a, but is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall portion 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo out port 2404 is provided close to the out port 1008. It is possible to make the player illusion that the game ball B that has rolled to the side and received in the pseudo out port 2404 rolls on the lower right rail 1004 and is received in the out port 1008.

The pseudo special winning opening door 2405 closing the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is the lottery result or the first special symbol drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. When the pseudo special winning opening solenoid 2406 is energized according to the lottery result of the special symbol, etc., the upper end is rotated so that the upper end moves forward around the lower side, and the upper end is located slightly above the lower end. And the rear side is lowered, the base plate 2407 (game panel 1100) is in a state of being projected further forward. In this state, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can receive the game ball B. When the game ball B flows down in front of the pseudo special winning port 2402 while the pseudo special winning port 2402 is ready to receive the game ball B, it hits the pseudo special winning port door 2405 protruding forward. They come into contact with each other and are guided rearward by the inclination of the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 to be received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402.

The pseudo special winning opening 2402 is not received by the second special winning opening 2007 and extends to the left even to a portion below the right discharging passage 2565 for discharging downward from the center accessory 2500. When the game ball B is discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 while the special winning opening 2402 (pseudo special winning opening door 2405) is being opened and closed, the game ball B is also received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. It can give the illusion of a player.

Further, since it also extends to the left in the portion immediately below the second starting opening 2005 and the second sub-out opening 2022, it is received in the second special winning opening 2007 while the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is opening and closing. Instead, the game ball B, which is discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500 and is received in the second starting opening 2005 and the second sub-out opening 2022, is like being received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. It can be an illusion.

The game ball B received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. The pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403 can be viewed from the player side even through the open pseudo special winning opening 2402. By visually recognizing the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403, the player can be illusion that the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is a real big winning opening.

The pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403 is for detecting a game ball B to execute a predetermined effect, and counting the number of the game balls B to open and close the pseudo special winning opening door 2405. .. By opening and closing the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 according to the number of the game balls B received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, it is possible to make the pseudo special winning opening 2402 more illusion as if it is a real special winning opening. it can.

According to the lower right unit 2400 of the present embodiment, since it has the pseudo special winning opening 2402 which is wider than the maximum width of the commonly used special winning opening of 135 mm and extends left and right, the conventional pachinko machine. If you have a big winning hole that you have never seen before, you can give the illusion to the player, have a strong impact on the player, and as a pachinko machine to play for the player This pachinko machine 1 can be made easy to be positively selected, and appeal to the player can be enhanced.

According to the lower right unit 2400, the right and left sides of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 are located above the pseudo big winning opening 2402 in which the left-right direction is larger than the second big winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction. And the inclined wall portion 2418 is provided, and between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 (the right diagonal wall portion 2413 and the left diagonal wall portion) that are separated by a distance of about half in the left-right direction of the second special winning opening 2007. The game ball B is allowed to be received by the pseudo special winning opening 2402 through (between 2416). As a result, the plurality of game balls B received in the second special winning opening 2007 can be aggregated in a narrow range and directed to the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and thus the game received in the second special winning opening 2007. It is possible to make the player illusion that a larger number of game balls B than the balls B are received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, which can greatly entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-8e. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 150 and the like. FIG. 148(a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel plate and the obstacle nail, and FIG. 148(b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. 149(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. 148 as seen from the front, and FIG. 149(b) is the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate shown in FIG.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100, slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. ..

The center accessory 2500 will be described in detail later, but a variable winning opening 2003 that opens and closes so that the game ball B can be received according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002, and the first start. The first big prize that opens and closes the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the mouth 2004 or the second starting port 2005. The mouth 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 are provided.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion (a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and is driven into the game area 5a. The game ball B cannot enter the frame.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-like shape protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 in which the center accessory 2500 is inserted in the panel plate 1110. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

The thicknesses of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 are thinner than the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel board 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not project, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. In addition, the support portion 2503 has an end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within a range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player can exert the effect of reinforcement while exhibiting the effect. I try not to stand out.

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance 2511 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at a site on the left side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2511 can be discharged, and the warp outlet 2512 that is opened in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the game ball B that is discharged from the warp outlet 2512 are left and right. It is provided with a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided so as to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from bouncing from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame by bouncing the game ball B bouncing on the stage 2513 back to the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start opening 2004 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction when mounted on the 1110 is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction (central emission portion 2513a) and a lowest portion on both left and right sides (side emission portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be released from those parts into the game area 5a.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightwise central portion of the stage 2513 (the central discharge portion 2513a) is located directly above the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting opening 2004 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8e-1. First attacker section]
The center accessory 2500 includes a first attacker section 2520 having a variable winning port 2003 and a first special winning port 2006 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The first attacker section 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is in accordance with the variable winning opening door 2521 that opens and closes the variable winning opening 2003 and the drawing result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002. A variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 160, etc.) that is energized to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521, and a variable winning opening sensor 2526 that detects the game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003,

In addition, the first attacker unit 2520 receives the game ball B to the first winning opening door 2523 that opens and closes the first winning opening 2006 and the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. According to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol which are lottered by, the first big winning opening solenoid 2524 (see FIG. 160 etc.) is energized to open and close the first big winning opening door 2523. , A first special winning opening sensor 2525 for detecting the game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2006.

Further, the first attacker unit 2520 includes a variable winning port 2003, a first special winning port 2006, and a transparent plate-shaped center left front plate 2527 provided in front of the left second guide passage 2532. 137 etc.).

In the center accessory 2500, a first attacker portion 2520 is provided above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The first attacker unit 2520 has a variable winning port 2003 and a first special winning port 2006.

The variable winning port 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, and is on the front side of the flange portion 2502 extending outward on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and near the substantially center in the vertical direction of the center role object 2500. It opens to the left. Further, the first special winning opening 2006 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B just above the variable winning opening 2003.

The variable winning opening door 2521 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the lower end side, and can be placed in an upright state (normal state) to receive the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003. Can be closed. When the variable winning opening door 2521 is energized by the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates so that the upper end moves to the left, and the gaming ball B can receive the variable winning opening 2003 (open state). ) Can be. When the variable winning opening door 2521 is in the open state, the upper end side is higher than the lower end side and is inclined so as to be lowered to the right. It is possible to guide the user to the variable winning port 2003.

The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward. To be done.

The first special winning opening door 2523 has a flat plate shape that is inclined so as to be lowered to the left, and is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502. In a normal state, the first special winning opening door 2523 projects forward from the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B cannot be received in the first special winning opening 2006. In this state, the game ball B flowing down above the first special winning opening door 2523 is guided to the left by the inclination of the first special winning opening door 2523, and flows through the left second guide passage 2532. ..

When the first big winning opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first big winning opening door 2523 retracts rearward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B is moved to the first big winning opening 2006. It can be in an acceptable state. In this state, the game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2006 flows down in front of the flange portion 2502, and is provided at a height between the first big winning opening 2006 and the variable winning opening 2003. After being detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2525, it is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 directly above the variable winning opening 2003. After that, the game ball B is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guide passage group]
The center accessory 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is provided with a left guide passage group 2530 including a plurality of passages (two here) in which the game balls B can flow. There is. In other words, between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002, the left guide passage group 2530 including a plurality of passages (two here) through which the game ball B can flow is provided. Therefore, when the game ball B is hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so as to circulate, the game ball B is formed so as to always pass through the left guide passage group 2530.

When assembled to the game board 5, the left guide passage group 2530 is provided below the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and to the left, at a position about 2/3 below the game area 5a. ing. The left guide passage group 2530 is approximately three times as high as the diameter of the game ball B in the vertical direction. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the circulating game ball B can be visually recognized in a good state.

The left guide passage group 2530 includes a left first guide passage 2531 that is in contact with the inner rail 1002 and a left second guide passage 2532 that is provided on the right side of the left first guide passage 2531. The left first guide passage 2531 and the left second guide passage 2532 are partitioned by a passage wall 2533 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502.

A first special winning opening 2006 is provided downstream of the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532. Therefore, when it is desired to receive the game ball B in the first big winning opening 2006, it is necessary to perform the driving operation so that the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532.

[5-8e-3. Right guide passage group]
Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a right guide passage group 2540 that is provided in the upper right corner and includes a plurality of passages (here, two) through which the game balls B can flow. This center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end of the right guide passage group 2540 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the collision of the front component member 1000). The game ball B, which is almost in contact with the right rail 1005) near the stop 1006 and is driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the right guide passage group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 has a vertical length of about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. This right guide passage group 2540 can visually recognize the circulating game ball B in a good state.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided on the right first guide passage 2541 and the right first guide passage 2541 which are separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a right second guide passage 2542 which is open. The inlet of the right first guide passage 2541 and the inlet of the right second guide passage 2542 are separated left and right.

The right first guide passage 2541 extends rearward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a portion directly below the entrance, and then extends downward, and then from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a position on the left side with respect to a position immediately below the entrance. Also, after extending forward, the exit opens diagonally to the lower right. In addition, the right second guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the right, and is aligned with the right side of the outlet of the right first guide passage 2541, and the outlet is opened obliquely downward to the right. is doing. That is, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the right and left intersect.

The right guide passage group 2540 is located above the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. In addition, the right first guide passage 2541 has the right end of its entrance located immediately below the lower end of the hitting portion 1006 of the front component member 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the hitting portion 1006 are the right first. It is formed so as to enter the one guide passage 2541.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is discharged to the side close to the right peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is discharged to the side close to the right rail 1005 and enters the second guiding area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. Although the details will be described later, since the game ball B that has entered the second guiding area 2712 is highly likely to be received in the first sub-out port 2021 provided on the downstream side, the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542. When the game ball B is entered, it is more likely to be received in the first sub-out port 2021 than when it is entered into the right first guide passage 2541.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a circulation detection sensor 2543 capable of detecting the game ball B circulating in the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, when the number of detected game balls B by the distribution detection sensor 2543 is equal to or less than a predetermined number per hour in the game situation in which the player performs “right hit”, the game situation can be more enjoyed. In order to do so, it is possible to prompt a “right hit” or instruct a driving strength for avoiding acceptance into the first sub-out port 2021 due to entry into the right second guide passage 2542. Becomes

[5-8e-4. Space formation part]
The center accessory 2500 includes a space forming portion 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540 and a second attacker portion 2560 provided below the space forming portion 2550 (FIG. 147, etc.). See). The space forming portion 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height which is about half the total height of the game area 5a. The second attacker unit 2560 has a second special winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is provided in the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500.

In the space forming portion 2550, the flange portion 2502 extending rightward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5. The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right wall portion 2551 protruding forward from the right side of the flange portion 2502 and a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 below the space forming portion 2550 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502. It has a guide wall portion 2552 extending to the lower right, and an opening 2553 penetrating the flange portion 2502 back and forth at a portion between the right wall portion 2551 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552. ing.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a slight gap with the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right wall portion 2551 is provided with a cutout portion 2551a penetrating left and right in the vicinity of the upper portion. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided between the lower end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551 so that a space of about 3 times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the left-right direction.

The opening 2553 extends up and down over substantially the entire height of the space forming portion 2550. The side of the opening 2553 close to the peripheral wall 2501 and the guide wall 2552 is a constant distance from the peripheral wall 2501, and the side close to the right wall 2551 moves away from the right wall 2551 as it goes downward. That is, in the space forming portion 2550, the side of the flange portion 2502 near the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 extends vertically from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 to the right with a constant width, and the flange portion 2502. The side closer to the right wall portion 2551 extends vertically so as to widen to the left as it goes downward.

When the opening 2553 is assembled to the game board 5, a part of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inserted from the rear side. The plurality of obstacle nails N that are inserted through the openings 2553 are a group of specific obstacle nails 2700 that are implanted in a specific gauge arrangement, as will be described later in detail. That is, the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 forms a space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

In addition, the space forming portion 2550 has a plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 that bulge forward from the flange portion 2502 and extend leftward and rightward, and are provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The rear ridge portion 2554 is provided at a position corresponding to a plurality of front ridge portions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, which will be described later, and the front and rear directions are staggered. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be flown while meandering in the front-rear direction by the front ridge portion 2555d and the rear ridge portion 2554.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 is a transparent flat plate-shaped center right front plate 2555 that covers a space between the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the front end of the right wall portion 2551, and a light-transmitting property attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. And a center right front plate seal 2556 having (see FIG. 149 and the like). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and closes the front side of the right guide passage group 2540.

The center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a that penetrate the front and back and accommodate the heads of the plurality of obstacle nails N (braid nail portions 2701), respectively, and penetrate the front and rear to form one obstacle. The second accommodating portion 2555b for accommodating the head of the nail N, the peeling hole 2555c penetrating forward and backward at the portion to which the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached, and the swelling rearward from the rear surface and extending leftward and rightward. And a plurality of front ridge portions 2555d provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The center right front plate 2555 is attached so that it cannot be removed from the center accessory 2500 unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100.

The first accommodating portion 2555a is provided in the shape of an elongated hole that forms a constant gap with respect to the circumferential line that surrounds and is in contact with the heads of the plurality of obstacle nails N (braided nail portions 2701) that are accommodated. Has been. In the present embodiment, one first accommodating portion 2555a is formed to have a size to accommodate the heads of two obstacle nails N, and the center of the first accommodating portion 2555a is different from the center of the obstacle nail N. It is eccentric. The second storage portion 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are provided at positions that correspond to respective obstacle nails N of a specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later.

In addition, as a gap between the front end (head part) of the obstacle nail N in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, it is within a range of 1 mm to 3 mm, and further, 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. It is desirable to be within the range. If the gap is smaller than this range, when the center right front plate 2555 expands or contracts due to changes in the environment, the obstacle nail N may be affected and the obstacle nail N may be bent, and at the time of assembling on the game board 5, the first accommodation This is because it is difficult to store the front end of the obstacle nail N in the portion 2555a and the second storage portion 2555b and it takes time, which may increase the cost. If the gap is larger than this range, the degree of bending when the obstacle nail N is bent due to the impact of the contact of the game ball B or the like exceeds the allowable range, and it is difficult to distribute the game ball B in the intended flow. This is because there is a risk that

This makes it possible to limit the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N housed in the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b, so that the impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B. It is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an external impact or the like due to something, and to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow and to specify it. The game ball B can be circulated in the obstacle nail group 2700 in a stable state, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be continuously exhibited, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700. You can entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, since the deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to reduce the labor required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N.

Further, in the assembled state on the game board 5, the front side of the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, The obstacle nail N whose head is housed in the first housing portion 2555a or the second housing portion 2555b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent by the contact of a tool or the like at the time of maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. In addition, when the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is bent via the center right front plate seal 2556, a trace thereof remains in the center right front plate seal 2556, The defect of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

The peeling hole 2555c is a state in which the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, and a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side, and the center right front plate seal 2556 is inserted from the rear side by the rod-shaped member. By pressing forward, a part of the center right front plate seal 2556 can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2555. Then, the operator pulls the rolled portion of the center right front plate seal 2556 so that the center right front plate seal 2556 can be easily removed (peeled) from the center right front plate 2555. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as reattachment work of the center right front plate seal 2556 at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal.

The peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of a triangular portion surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501, the guiding wall portion 2552, and the closing wall portion 2566 when assembled on the game board 5, so that the peeling hole is formed. Through the 2555c, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or a portion where the game ball B circulates, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed. ..

Further, the peeling hole 2555c is hidden from the front by the center right front plate seal 2556 being attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2555c, and to provide the player with the result. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2555c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan fraudulent acts using the peeling hole 2555c.

The plurality of front ridge portions 2555d are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 that bulge from the flange portion 2502. These front ridge portions 2555d are provided so as to be staggered in the vertical direction with respect to the rear ridge portions 2554. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be flown while meandering in the front-rear direction by the front ridge portion 2555d and the rear ridge portion 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second attacker section]
The second attacker portion 2560 of the center accessory 2500 has a second special winning opening 2007 that is long and open in the left-right direction and a first sub-out opening 2021 provided on the right side of the second special winning opening 2007. And have. The second big winning opening 2007, the right end is located at a site slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B from the right end (lower end) of the guiding wall portion 2552 to the right, and the left end is the entire width within the game area 5a. It is located about 1/3 from the right side of. The second special winning opening 2007 is provided at a position higher than the upper end of the stage cover 2515. The right side wall of the first sub-out port 2021 is continuous with the right wall part 2551 of the space forming part 2550.

In addition, the second attacker unit 2560 can open and close the second special winning opening 2007 by moving forward and backward with the second special winning opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007. It is drawn by the second big winning opening door 2562 in the form of a flat plate that is closed at the bottom and tilts downward to the left, and the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. It has a second special winning opening solenoid 2563 which is energized and opens and closes the second special winning opening door 2562 in accordance with the drawing result of the first special symbol and the drawing result of the second special symbol.

Further, the second attacker portion 2560 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 and above the second special winning opening door 2562, and the attacker passage 2564 through which the game ball B can flow to the left, and the second large winning opening 2007. The right discharge passage 2565 which extends downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2564 on the left side and is capable of discharging the game ball B downward, and the front wall of the attacker passage 2564 which projects forward from the flange portion 2502. A closing wall portion 2566 that constitutes a part and extends leftward from the lower end of the guiding wall portion 2552 to the peripheral wall portion 2501.

The attacker passage 2564 extends so as to be lower to the left at a height that is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and the ceiling wall is configured by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the closing wall portion 2566. At the same time, the wall of the floor is constituted by the second special winning opening door 2562. In this attacker passage 2564, a plurality of rear ridge portions 2564a are formed at the portion of the attacker passage 2564 in the flange portion 2502 that bulges forward and extends in the up-down direction, and is provided at intervals in the left-right direction. , A center right lower front plate 2572, which will be described later, is bulged rearward and extends in the vertical direction at a portion of the attacker passage 2564, and is spaced in the left-right direction so as to be staggered with a plurality of rear ridge portions 2564a. And a plurality of ridges (not shown) provided on the front of the ridge. By the plurality of front ridge portions and rear ridge portions 2564a, the game ball B can be circulated in the attacker passage 2564 to the left while meandering in the front-rear direction, and the circulation speed can be suppressed.

The right discharge passage 2565 vertically extends downward with a left and right width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. The outlet of the right discharge passage 2565 is provided at a height between the stage 2513 and the upper end of the stage cover 2515. In the right discharge passage 2565, the right wall is configured by the attacker left wall portion 2568, and the left wall is configured by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, the second attacker portion 2560 projects to the front from the flange portion 2502 on the right side of the second special winning opening door 2562, is higher than the right end of the second special winning opening door 2562, and is slightly higher than the right end of the closing wall portion 2566. A position that is lower than the left end of the second special winning opening door 2562 that protrudes forward from the flange 2502 on the left side of the attacker right wall portion 2567 extending downward from the lower position and the second special winning opening door 2562. From the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567 to the left from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the right shelf portion 2569 and the right shelf portion 2569 in the left-right direction. It is provided in the center between the left shelf part 2570 and the left shelf part 2570, and the left shelf part 2570 that extends downward from the vicinity of the upper end of the attacker left wall part 2568 so as to form a gap. And an inner wall portion 2571 which is present.

The second winning hole 2007 is defined by the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the left-right direction. That is, the width in the left-right direction between the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 is the left-right width of the second special winning opening 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width of the second special winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction is 131 mm.

The attacker left wall portion 2568 extends downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567, and the lower end is bent short to the right. When the attacker left wall portion 2568 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 so that the game ball B cannot come and go to the left and right sides. There is. The lower ends of the right shelf portion 2569 and the left shelf portion 2570 are located above the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568. A second special winning opening sensor 2561 is provided between the lower end of the right shelf 2569 and the middle wall 2571 and between the lower end of the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571, respectively. The middle wall portion 2571 is located directly above the lower right middle decoration portion 2433 of the lower right unit 2400 when assembled on the game board 5.

The second attacker portion 2560 is located in front of the attacker passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, and the space formed by the attacker right wall portion 2567, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570. It further has a transparent lower center right front plate 2572 in the form of a transparent plate (see FIG. 137 and the like).

In the normal state, the second attacker portion 2560 has the front end of the second special winning opening door 2562 projecting forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and cannot receive the game ball B with respect to the second special winning opening 2007. Closed to. The second special winning opening door 2562, which opens and closes the second special winning opening 2007, is formed in a flat plate shape extending left and right and front and back, so that it is hard to see when viewed from the front. , It is difficult to understand the open/closed state.

In this normal state, the game ball B, which has been driven into the right side of the center role object 2500 and has flowed down the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming section 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700), has the guide wall section 2552 and the right wall. It will flow down to the second attacker section 2560 side from between the section 2551. At this time, the game ball B flowing down along the right wall portion 2551 is accepted into the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B that has not been received in the first sub-outlet 2021 and has flowed down onto the second special winning opening door 2562 is meandering in the front-rear direction by a plurality of front ridge portions and rear ridge portions 2564a while inside the attacker passage 2564. After rolling to the left, it enters the right discharge passage 2565 from the left end of the second special winning opening door 2562, and is returned from the lower end (exit) of the right discharge passage 2565 into the game area 5a.

The second attacker portion 2560 of this center accessory 2500 is located immediately above the lower right unit 2400 in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the attacker left wall forming the right wall of the right discharge passage 2565. The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 approaches the lower end of the portion 2568. As a result, the game ball B is prevented from moving back and forth between the right discharge passage 2565 side and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415. That is, a region (pseudo game region 2010) that cannot enter from the right discharge passage 2565 and the game region 5a is formed on the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415.

In other words, a pseudo game area partitioned by the front surface of the game panel 1100, the partition portion 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569 and the left shelf portion 2570 of the second attacker portion 2560. 2010 is formed. In the pseudo game area 2010, only the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 can be distributed.

Then, in accordance with the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, to the second big winning opening solenoid 2563. When energized, the second special winning opening door 2562 retracts, and the second special winning opening 2007 becomes ready to receive the game ball B. At this time, the game ball B flowing through the attacker passage 2564 and the game ball B flowing down from the space forming unit 2550 to the second special winning opening 2007 are accepted into the second special winning opening 2007.

The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 rolls on the right shelf part 2569 or the left shelf part 2570 and is then detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2561 to be discharged into the pseudo game area 2010 below. Will be done. In this second attacker unit 2560, since the two second special winning opening sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, even if a large number of game balls B are received in the second special winning opening 2007 in a short time, they will be delayed. Can be detected without.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the center right front plate 2555 accommodates the heads of the plurality of obstacle nails N of each of the combined nail portions 2701 that form the specific obstacle nail group 2700. Since the head of the obstruction nail N can be restricted from moving, the obstruction nail N is deformed by an impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or an impact from the outside due to something or the like. (Bending) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow, the game ball B can be circulated in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the operation effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be obtained. Can be continuously exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500, the second special winning opening door 2562 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2007 is formed in a flat plate shape that extends in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, and the second large winning opening. Since the second prize hole 2007 is opened and closed by moving the prize hole door 2562 forward and backward, the second prize hole door 2562 can be made difficult to see when viewed from the front. The presence of the special winning opening 2007 can be made difficult to notice. As a result, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 (pseudo special winning opening door 2405) provided below the second special winning opening 2007 can be made relatively conspicuous, so that the player's interest is increased to the pseudo special winning opening 2402. Can be strongly attracted to, and it is possible to give an illusion that the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is a real big winning opening. Therefore, if you have a big winning hole that you have never seen on a past pachinko machine, you can make the player illusion and give a strong impact to the player, This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played, and appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B contacts the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be released from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support part 2503 is shortly projected from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501 and is partially provided on the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is provided on the rear side. It is possible to reduce the obstruction of the visibility of the decorative object of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600.

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is provided because the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game with the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Are provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role object 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role object 2500 is better compared to the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side can be made more visible. In other words, when it is desired to make the non-circulation area (inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind when viewed from the front.

[5-8f. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The gate member 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is provided at a position slightly lower than the center skein in the vertical direction of the game area 5a and below the variable winning port 2003 of the center accessory 2500. Immediately above the gate member 2600, the outlet of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged. In addition, a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 opens to the left at the lower right of the gate member 2600.

The gate member 2600 has a gate 2002 in which a regular symbol lottery for opening and closing the variable winning port 2003 by the passage of the game ball B is performed, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. Have In the present embodiment, the gate 2002 is a detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601.

[5-8 g. Specific obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 147 and the like. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the right side in the game area 5a and on the upstream side of the second special winning opening 2007. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of combined nail portions 2701 each including a plurality of adjacently arranged obstacle nails N, and the plurality of combined nail portions 2701 are mutually one game ball. It is arranged with an interval allowing passage of B. In the present embodiment, the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of two obstacle nails N.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided such that the portions (gap portions) between the plurality of braid nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals are arranged in a predetermined pattern. The game ball B can be guided by the section 2701. As a result, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guide area 2710 that can guide the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guide area 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The guide area 2710 includes a first guide area 2711 and a second guide area 2712 provided on the right side of the first guide area 2711. The first guide area 2711 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the outlet of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position on the left side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552. The second guide area 2712 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the outlet of the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position of the right side portion from the center of the guide wall portion 2552.

The first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are provided in an arc shape such that the center in the vertical direction bulges rightward. More specifically, in the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, in the plurality of braid nail portions 2701 forming the outside of the arc, a straight line connecting the braid nail portions 2701 near the upper end portion and the lower end portion. On the other hand, the arcs formed by the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the inside of the arc are in contact with each other. That is, the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 are formed such that the width in the left-right direction is a distance of two game balls B. Since the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 extend in an arc shape, the number of vertically extending portions is small, and the game ball B can be easily meandered in the left-right direction.

Further, the plurality of combined nail portions 2701 forming the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 are located below the two combined nail portions 2701 that are separated from each other on the left and right. 2701 is provided on the right side (the side farther from the center of the arc) than the center between the two upper nail portions 2701. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712.

Further, in the plurality of combined nail portions 2701 forming the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712, the gaps which are spaced above and below the plurality of combined nail portions 2701 arranged in an arc shape are It is provided so as to be located higher toward the right column. In other words, in the plurality of combined nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712, the two combined nail portions 2701 that are paired in the left-right direction have the right side. The braid part 2701 is arranged so as to be higher. This makes it easy for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

The guiding area 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward with a feeling of meandering in the left-right direction by the plurality of assembled nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals. As a result, compared to the area where the obstacle nail N is implanted in a general arrangement, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and slowed down, and the flow time of the game ball B to a predetermined position ( Arrival time) can be delayed. In addition, by setting two obstacle nails N as one set in the combined nail portion 2701, the number of collisions between the obstacle nail N and the game ball B can be increased as compared with the case where the obstacle nail N is configured by one obstacle nail N. The effect of delaying the fall of the ball B is enhanced.

In the guide area 2710, since the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the guided game ball B moves to the left outer side or the right outer side through the portion of the gap. It may be lost. That is, the game ball B moves from the first guidance area 2711 to the second guidance area 2712, moves from the second guidance area 2712 to the first guidance area 2711, or moves from the first guidance area 2711 to the left outside. Or, it may move to the right outside from the second guidance area 2712.

The game ball B guided to the lower end by the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552, and between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (the second prize) It will flow down on the mouth door 2562 or the second big winning opening 2007).

The game ball B moved to the left outside from the first guiding area 2711 is between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500, and a plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502. Further, the plurality of front ridge portions 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555 flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction. Then, it comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552 and flows down between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second big winning opening door 2562 or in the second big winning opening 2007). ..

The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712 is between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right wall portion 2551. The plurality of rear projection portions 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 and the center right front plate. A plurality of front ridge portions 2555d provided at 2555 meanders in the front-back direction while flowing down. Then, it will flow down to the first sub-outlet 2021, or between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second big winning opening door 2562 or in the second big winning opening 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, the game ball B flows through the second guide area 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide area 2712 to the outer right side, There is a possibility that one sub-out port 2021 will be accepted. That is, in the present embodiment, in the right guide passage group 2540, the right second guide passage 2542 has a higher probability of receiving the game ball B in the first sub-out port 2021 than the right first guide passage 2541. .. Therefore, the player can perform a driving operation such that the game ball B enters the right first guide passage 2541. In other words, when the player hits the ball "right", by hitting it strongly, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the stop 1006. There is no need, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

By the way, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, if the braid portion is configured by only one obstacle nail N, a pair is formed for the obstacle nail N to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass. Other obstacle nails N serve as obstacle nails N in all directions forming a gap around the obstacle nail N. That is, one obstacle nail N is responsible for forming the gaps in all directions. As a result, when the obstacle nail N bends, the gap widens in one direction and narrows in the opposite direction, so that the deformation of one obstacle nail N greatly changes the probability of guiding the game ball B by the guide region 2710. Therefore, it becomes difficult to distribute the game ball B in a stable state. Further, when the obstacle nail N is bent, the obstacle nails provided in all directions must be adjusted so as to have a clearance of a desired distance, which requires a lot of maintenance. Becomes

On the other hand, when the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of a plurality of obstructed nails N as in the present embodiment, in the braided nail portion 2701, the direction of the obstructed nail N adjacent to a certain obstructed nail N is Since the adjacent obstacle nails N are in charge of forming the gap, the direction in which a certain (one) obstacle nail N is in charge of forming the gap can be set only in some directions. It is possible to reduce the number of obstacle nails N that form a pair. As a result, even if one obstacle nail N of the braided nail portion 2701 is bent, since there are few areas of the gap affected, it is possible to suppress a change in the guidance probability of the game ball B by the guidance area 2710. Also, when a certain obstacle nail N is bent, the gap between the obstacle nail N in a part of the directions may be adjusted to a desired distance, and compared with the case where the gaps in all directions are adjusted, it can be used for maintenance. Such trouble can be reduced.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the head of the obstacle nail N is inserted and accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. The braided nail portion 2701 composed of the plurality of obstacle nails N is housed in the first housing portion 2555a so that the heads thereof are surrounded.

As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the obstacle nail N is stored in the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby limiting the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or an external impact due to something, and the game ball. It is possible to reduce the flow of B in an unintended flow, and it is possible to circulate the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 in a stable state, so that the effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be continuously maintained. This can be exhibited, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, as described above, the head portion of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, so that the obstacle nail N is not deformed. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to reduce the labor required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the center right front plate seal 2556 in which the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b housing the head of the obstacle nail N are attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. Since it is closed by, the nail N cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent by the contact of a tool or the like at the time of maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is bent from the front, the trace thereof remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, so that the defect of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

Further, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a function of distributing the inflowing game ball B to one of the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second special winning opening 2007. This function is an important function that influences the payout rate. No nail adjustment is allowed in the game hall. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 cannot be removed unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100, and the center right front plate 2555 and the center are arranged. Since the front side of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is covered by the right front plate seal 2556, no nail adjustment can be performed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 that form the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are configured by the two obstacle nails N, the present invention is not limited to this, and three nails are included. It may be configured by the obstacle nail N described above. When the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of three or more obstacle nails N, a plurality of obstacle nails N may be arranged in a line, or may be arranged in a polygonal shape such as a triangle, a quadrangle, a pentagon, and a hexagon. Is also good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the guide region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is configured by the two regions of the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured by one, or three or more regions.

According to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, the flow velocity of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, so that, for example, in the second attacker portion 2560 provided downstream, of the first special symbol. According to the lottery result and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, "small hit"), the second big winning opening 2007 is opened and closed with the game ball B in a short time so that the game ball B can be received. Even if the player tries to hit the game ball B so that the game ball B arrives at the timing at which the game ball B can be received at the second prize hole 2007, the game ball B is moved to the second prize hole 2007 at a desired timing by the specific obstacle nail group 2700. It can be made difficult to reach, and the timing of hitting the game ball B can be difficult. As a result, a difficulty level can be given to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the player can be motivated to enjoy the game, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult to receive the game ball B in the second special winning opening 2007, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the specific obstacle nail group 2700, since the distribution speed of the game ball B is suppressed by arranging a plurality of obstacle nails N, compared with the case where it is made of a synthetic resin member, the configuration is concerned. The cost required for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the increase in the cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[5-8h. Pseudo game area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The pseudo game area 2010 is independent of the game area 5a and is an area in which only a specific game ball B can be distributed. Specifically, only the game ball B (so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) received in the second big winning opening 2007 is the pseudo game area 2010 that can be distributed. This pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 is a portion in which the front surface of the flat-shaped game panel 1100 having the game area 5a in front is exposed and a plurality of obstacles planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100. Nail N and a pseudo-large prize that can be opened/closed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the second lottery result of the second special symbol that are drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. It has a mouth 2402 and a pseudo-out opening 2404 for discharging the game ball B, which has not been received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, to the rear of the game panel 1100. In other words, the pseudo game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, a pseudo special winning opening 2402 as a receiving opening that can receive the game ball B, and a pseudo out opening 2404 that discharges the game ball B. It has a structure similar to that in the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 is formed by the game panel 1100, the partition part 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned by the right shelf portion 2569, the left shelf portion 2570, and the middle wall portion 2571 of the second attacker portion 2560. The right end of the pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned by the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the first standing wall portion 2412 of the partition portion 2410. The left end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the attacker left wall portion 2568 of the second attacker portion 2560, the second standing wall portion 2415 of the partition portion 2410, the left lateral wall portion 2417, the inclined wall portion 2418, and the third standing wall portion 2419. ing. The lower end of the pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned by the bottom wall portion 2411 of the partition portion 2410.

In the pseudo game area 2010, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed to the front between the second attacker portion 2560 and the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at the relevant portion.

The second special winning opening 2007 as a supply source of the game ball B to the pseudo game area 2010 is opened and closed by the second special winning opening door 2562. Since the second special winning opening door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward, it is difficult for the player to see the second special winning opening door 2562. The pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a, and the parts (the partition 2410 and the attacker left wall 2568 of the center accessory 2500) that are partitioned from the game area 5a are transparent. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are formed in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100 while being formed, the pseudo game area 2010 for the player is a part of the game area 5a. Can be illusion of.

The pseudo special winning opening 2402 provided in the pseudo game area 2010 is formed longer in the left-right direction than the second special winning opening 2007 provided above. In this embodiment, the left and right sizes of the second special winning opening 2007 are 131 mm, and the left and right sizes of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 are 170 mm. Since the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is open toward the front, the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 which can open and close the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is in a state of closing the pseudo special winning opening 2402 (normally In the state (1), the surface is directed forward, and the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is conspicuous to the player.

For this reason, when the player looks at the pachinko machine 1, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 becomes more noticeable than the second special winning opening 2007, which is what the past pachinko machines have seen. It is possible to make the player think that it has a big winning opening that does not exist, and to strongly attract the interest of the player.

In the normal state of the pseudo game area 2010 of the present embodiment, the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is upright, and the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 makes the pseudo big winning opening 2402 unable to receive the game ball B. It is closed. Further, in a normal state, the second big winning opening 2007 is closed by the second big winning opening door 2562, so the game is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flows down to the second big winning opening door 2562. The ball B rolls leftward on the second special winning opening door 2562 and is discharged into the game area 5a through the right discharging passage 2565. Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B does not flow in the pseudo game area 2010.

From the normal state, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, etc., which is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the second When the special winning opening door 2562 is retracted, the game ball B can be received in the second special winning opening 2007. In this state, when the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2007, the game ball B is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2561 and then supplied to the pseudo game area 2010.

Then, the game ball B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while abutting on the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted in the front exposed portion of the game panel 1100. At this time, if the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo special winning opening door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo gaming area 2010 passes through the front of the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 and is at the bottom. After flowing down onto the wall portion 2411 and rolling leftward along the inclination of the bottom wall portion 2411, further rolling to the left is prevented by the third standing wall portion 2419, and at the relevant portion, it is directed forward. The pseudo out port 2404 that is opened is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100. That is, it is discharged from within the pseudo game area 2010.

Since the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 is provided close to the right side of the out port 1008, the game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 is outpoured 1008 to the player. The illusion of being accepted by. This makes it possible to give the illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a.

Therefore, it is possible to make the illusion that the game in which the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 in the pseudo game area 2010 is the same as the game in which the game ball B passes through the large winning opening in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to disappoint the player because the game ball B cannot be received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. On the other hand, since the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 circulates in the pseudo game area 2010, even if the game ball B is not received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, A predetermined number of game balls B are paid out by acceptance. As a result, the game ball B is paid out even though the game ball B is not received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, so that the player can feel as if he/she has gained the game and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is opened and closed, the large pseudo special winning opening door 2405 which is conspicuous from the front opens and closes, so that the player is instantly aware that the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can be accepted. Can be made. Thereby, the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called “right hit”) can be performed so that the game ball B can be received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. Further, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 may be opened/closed as a kind of notice, or the pseudo special winning opening 2402 may be opened/closed as one of the signals for instructing the player to "right hit". The pseudo special winning opening 2402 is inserted only when the player hits the ball “right”, so that the player can intuitively understand it.

For this reason, for example, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 may be opened/closed open/closed before the second special winning opening 2007 is ready to be accepted, and the player may make a "right hit". .. As a result, the "right-handed" game ball B can easily reach the second special winning opening 2007 at the timing when the second special winning opening 2007 can be accepted, which can further entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Then, during the "big hit" game in which the second special winning opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, if the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is also opened/closed, a large number of game balls B can be played through the second special winning opening 2007 in a short time. It can be supplied into the pseudo game area 2010, and many game balls B are distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, so that the player can enjoy the movement and the game of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010. I can do it. At this time, when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is opened and closed, the game ball B is received in the large pseudo special winning opening 2402, so that the player can be greatly entertained and a decrease in the interest of the player is suppressed. Can be made

In the present embodiment, the left-right direction of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is formed to be larger than the second special winning opening 2007, but above the pseudo special winning opening 2402, the right lateral wall portion 2414, the left lateral wall portion 2417, and The inclined wall portion 2418 is provided, and the game ball B passing between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 (between the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the left inclined wall portion 2416) is a pseudo big winning opening. 2402 is accepted. The distance between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 is about half the distance in the left-right direction of the second special winning opening 2007. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B received in the second special winning opening 2007 are aggregated in a narrow range and head for the pseudo special winning opening 2402, and thus the game balls B received in the second special winning opening 2007. It is possible to make the player illusion that a larger number of game balls B are received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, which can greatly entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

The pseudo special winning opening 2402 of the present embodiment does not pay out the game ball B by receiving the game ball B or give a bonus to the player. Therefore, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is an opening/closing pattern that cannot be seen in the conventional winning openings of pachinko machines (for example, 33-7 beats, minuet, waltz, bossa nova, swing, 8 beats, 16 beats, BGM or a predetermined pattern). The tempo of music, etc.) can be opened and closed to entertain the player.

In addition to the obstacle nail N, a wind turbine W may be provided in the pseudo game area 2010. The presence of the wind turbine W in the pseudo game area 2010 makes it more realistic, and it becomes difficult to distinguish between the pseudo game area 2010 and the game area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the approximate center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer sides and the lower side of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, above the side upper left unit 2300, there is provided a wind turbine W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B.

First, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a left guide passage group 2530, a gate 2002, and a side upper left unit 2300 are arranged at intervals from above, and between them and above the left guide passage group 2530. , A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted. The plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that the game balls B are collected above the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532. Accordingly, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can be circulated in the left second guide passage 2532 with a higher probability than in the left first guide passage 2531. The game ball B flowing through the left second guide passage 2532 will flow downward while approaching the center accessory 2500, and will flow down the left side of the variable winning port 2003 with a high probability.

Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first special winning opening 2006 that is normally closed unacceptably by the first special winning opening door 2523, and the left second guide passage 2532 is provided. The game ball B which has entered the above rolls down on the first big winning opening door 2523 and flows down. And, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol which are lottered by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, the first prize opening door 2523 is provided. When the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 while moving backward, there is a high probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the first special winning opening 2006.

The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first special winning hole sensor 2525 provided below, and the back ball of the back unit 3000 is guided. It is discharged downward through the unit 3100. When the game balls B are detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2525, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B is given.

The plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so as to be gathered directly above the gate 2002 at a site below the variable winning port 2003. With this, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it is possible to pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B flows downward on both the left outer side and the right outer side of the gate 2002.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a lottery for normal symbols is executed. Then, if the lottery result of the lottered ordinary symbols is "normal win", the variable winning a prize port 2003 is in a state of being able to receive the game ball B for a predetermined time. When the variable winning port 2003 is ready to be received, the variable winning port door 2521 is rotated to the left, so that the game ball B flowing through the second left guide passage 2532 has a high probability of variable winning. Accepted by mouth 2003. The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, and then passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to be lowered. Is discharged to. When the game ball B is detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

A warp entrance 2511 and a windmill W are provided from above between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300. The warp inlet 2511 is open leftward on the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. The wind turbine W is arranged near the center accessory 2500 between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002.

As for the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2002 and the windmill W, the game ball B flowing through the gate 2002 and the right outside of the gate 2002 mainly flows down to the right side of the center of the windmill W. It is arranged to. Therefore, the game ball B flowing through the gate 2002 and the right outside of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain probability. On the other hand, the game ball B flowing through the left outer side of the gate 2002 does not enter the warp entrance 2511.

The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is provided near the lower end of the center portion of the center accessory 2500 in the left-right direction from the warp exit 2512 that opens into the frame of the center accessory 2500 through the warp passage. It is supplied to the stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, and is discharged from either the central discharge portion 2513a or the side discharge portion 2513b so as to flow back into the game area 5a.

Since the central emitting portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided right above the first starting opening 2004 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the gaming ball B emitted from the central emitting portion 2513a is highly likely to be the first. Accepted in the start port 2004. The game balls B emitted from the side emission portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central emission portion 2513a are accepted into the first starting opening 2004 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2004 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002. Then, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, a privilege such as a predetermined special lottery is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2004 is received in the out port 1008 and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guiding portion 1003 and then discharged downward.

The game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W has a high probability of being located on the upper stage side of the plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged in two stages along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It flows down onto a plurality of obstacle nails N. The game ball B which has not flowed down on the plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper stage side through the right side of the windmill W flows down on the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. On the other hand, the game ball B circulating on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300, rolls the shelf 2301 to the right, and then above the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. Run down to.

The game ball B, which circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W and flows down to the upper stage side of the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged, is located at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction below the center accessory 2500 ( There is a possibility of being guided to the side of the first starting port 2004) and accepted by the first starting port 2004. In addition, on the upper stage side where a plurality of obstacle nails N are obliquely arranged in a row, there is a gap through which one game ball B can pass, and therefore may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap. There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 will be accepted. The game ball B not received in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2004 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, in the lower left part of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged in the left and right direction of the game area 5a by the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is guided to the center side, is not received in the first starting port 2004, is received in the out port 1008, and is discharged from within the game area 5a. On the lower stage side, a plurality of gaps through which one game ball B can pass are provided in the middle, so there is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 can be accepted through the gaps.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. It is discharged above and below. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the right guide passage group 2540, the space forming portion 2550, the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the second attacker portion 2560, and the lower right unit 2400 are sequentially arranged from the top. A specific obstacle nail group 2700 including a plurality of obstacle nails N is provided in the space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved to the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 from above the central portion in the left-right direction to the right, with the strength with which the game ball B enters. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

The game ball B, which is relatively strongly struck toward the right side of the center accessory 2500, comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 and enters the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540. On the other hand, the game ball B, which is relatively weakly aimed at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and moves to the right guide passage group 2540. Enter the right second guide passage 2542.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543, and then downward from the side close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. Is released. Then, the game ball B that has passed through the right first guide passage 2541 enters the first guiding area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and moves left and right in the first guiding area 2711. It runs down meandering. The game ball B flowing through the first guiding area 2711 contacts the guiding wall portion 2552 and flows diagonally to the lower right along the guiding wall portion 2552.

The plurality of combined nail portions 2701 forming the walls on both the left and right sides of the first guide area 2711 form a gap between each other in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass, and therefore the gap. There is a case where the game ball B moves to the left outer side or the right outer side of the first guide area 2711 (second guide area 2712). The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 flows down to the guide wall portion 2552 through between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501. At this time, due to the plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front ridge portions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the ridges meander in the front-rear direction. The game ball B flowing down to the guide wall portion 2552 flows along the guide wall portion 2552 obliquely to the lower right. The game ball B moved from the first guidance area 2711 to the right outside circulates in the second guidance area 2712.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is discharged downward from the side close to the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. Then, the game ball B that has passed through the right second guide passage 2542 enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and moves left and right in the second guide area 2712. It runs down meandering. The game ball B that has flowed through the second guide area 2712 contacts the guide wall portion 2552 and flows diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552.

The plurality of combined nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the second guide area 2712 form a gap between the upper and lower directions in which one game ball B can pass. There is a case where the game ball B moves to the outer left side of the second guide area 2712 (first guide area 2711) or the outer right side. The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the second guidance region 2712 flows through the first guidance region 2711. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712 passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall portion 2551 and between the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551. Run down to the site. At this time, due to the plurality of rear ridge portions 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front ridge portions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the ridges meander in the front-rear direction. The game ball B moved from the second guide area 2712 to the right outside is highly likely to be received by the first sub-out port 2021 and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000.

The game ball B guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a distribution speed of the game ball B suppressed and is at the same height as compared with a site where the obstacle nail N is implanted in a general gauge arrangement. It will be delayed and flow down.

The game ball B that has flowed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming unit 2550) and was not received in the first sub-out port 2021 is from the guide wall unit 2552 and the attacker right wall unit 2567 to the second attacker unit. It enters into the attacker passage 2564 provided above the second special winning opening 2007 of 2560. In a normal state, since the second special winning opening door 2562 has advanced and closed the second special winning opening 2007 unacceptably, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 is the second big winning opening door 2562. After being rolled to the left on the upper surface of the above, it is discharged downward through the right discharge passage 2565. In this attacker passage 2564, the game ball B rolls to the left without meandering in the front-rear direction due to the rear ridge portion 2564a of the flange portion 2502 and the front ridge portion of the center lower right front plate 2572.

The game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the second attacker portion 2560 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower right unit 2400 (left lateral wall portion 2417). To do. Then, with a certain probability, it is received in the second starting port 2005 which is always open upward under the right discharge passage 2565. Further, although the probability is lower than the acceptance probability to the second starting port 2005, it is accepted to the second sub-out port 2022 opened on the right side of the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, the second special symbol is drawn, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The game ball B discharged from the right discharge passage 2565 and not received in either the second starting opening 2005 or the second sub-out opening 2022 rolls diagonally to the lower left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400. After the movement, it is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B flowing through the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker unit 2560 is the lottery result or the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. When the second special winning opening door 2562 retracts according to the lottery result of the two special symbols, the second special winning opening 2007 is accepted with a high probability. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 is supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by one of the two second special winning opening sensors 2561 provided below. When the game balls B are detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2561, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B is given.

The game ball B supplied from the second special winning opening 2007 into the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010. Then, when the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is closed by the pseudo special winning opening door 2405, the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 passes through the front of the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 and flows down onto the bottom wall portion 2411, and along the inclination of the bottom wall portion 2411. After rolling to the left, it is received in the pseudo-out port 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

When the game ball B is circulated in the pseudo game area 2010, the lottery result and the second special symbol of the first special symbol selected by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. When the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 in accordance with the lottery result, the contact with the pseudo special winning opening door 2405 is highly likely to be received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402 in the rear. Be done. The game ball B received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. A predetermined effect can be executed by detecting the game ball B by the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403.

As an effect using the pseudo-winning prize hole 2402, depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that have been randomly selected (for example, according to "big hit", "small hit", etc.) When the second special winning opening 2007 is open, the peripheral special control board 1510 opens the pseudo special winning opening 2402 for effect. At that time, the peripheral control board 1510 can know the opening timing of the second special winning opening 2007, and thus the degree of picking up the game ball B by the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. By utilizing this property, it can be suggested that when a large number of pseudo special winning openings 2402 pick up the game balls B, they are put into a high probability state (so-called probability changing state) after the “big hit”. On the contrary, when there are a lot of misses at the pseudo special winning opening 2402, it can be suggested that a low probability state (so-called normal non-probably unchanging state) occurs after a “large hit”. Furthermore, the probability setting (generally, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6) can be suggested by such a missing state.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in a normal state, even if the player hits the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is only a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting opening 2005 to which the privilege is given, and the gate 2002 is opened. Since there is no possibility of passing or being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2004, it is possible to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004, and the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2005. With the lottery result, the special variation time for informing the player of the lottery result of the special symbol is set so that the lottery result of the second special symbol is longer than the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, the lottery result of the second special symbol takes longer to consume the number of holdings, so that even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 is the same. The number of the second special symbol lottery results to be executed by the second starting opening 2005 is reduced. Even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005, the number of game balls B to be paid out is one. Therefore, in a normal state, even if the player hits the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is no possibility that only the second starting opening 2005 will be accepted, and even if the second starting opening 2005 is accepted, it is a privilege. Since the number of game balls B paid out as is one, it is possible to make the player easily hit the game balls B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game balls B are received in the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007, a privilege of paying out many game balls B is given. In order to be able to receive the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007, the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 are made to receive the game ball B, and they are It is necessary to have the first special symbol and the second special symbol that can be accepted be drawn.

From such a situation, in the normal state, the game ball B flows down on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting opening 2004 for the player. The ball B can be driven, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed by showing the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N, and the first start opening 2004 A sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B can be increased.

Then, by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004, "hit" (for example, "small hit", "middle hit", "big hit", etc.) is drawn as the result of drawing the first special symbol. Then, the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes, so that the game ball B is driven so that the game ball B can be received at the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007. It is possible to entertain the operation, and it is possible to increase the expectation for accepting the game ball B to the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007.

Specifically, when the first special winning opening 2006 becomes available, the driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows to the left side of the center accessory 2500. On the other hand, when the second special winning opening 2007 becomes available, the driving operation (“right hit”) can be performed so that the game ball B flows to the right side of the center accessory 2500.

When hitting the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a right guide passage group 2540 including a right first guide passage 2541 and a right second guide passage 2542, and a specific obstacle. A guide area 2710 composed of a first guide area 2711 and a second guide area 2712 by the nail group 2700 is provided, and the guide passage to be circulated makes it easy to receive the second sub-out opening 2022, and thus a desired guide is provided. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the passage (here, the first guide passage 2541), and the player can perform the driving operation of the game ball B. Can entertain.

In addition, the second big winning opening 2007 has a larger opening in the left-right direction than the first big winning opening 2006, so that the second big winning opening 2007 is shorter in a glance to the player. It can be recognized that a large number of game balls B can be accepted. Thereby, when the second winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the player can immediately change the driving operation so that the game ball B is distributed to the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B into the special winning opening 2007 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, when the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2007, the game ball B is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 in which the pseudo special winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second special winning opening 2007 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B into the pseudo-winning prize hole 2402, and to entertain the movement of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be made

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The rear unit 3000 is a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B which is received in the general winning opening 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a rear starting portion 2004 is received in the rear of the gaming panel 1100. A first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the guided game ball B is provided. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guiding unit 3100.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall, and a back wall of the back box 3010. A rear box rear unit 3030 detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back substrate unit 3040 arranged behind the rear box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 are provided. There is.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower portion near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 in which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flows and the front end in the back box 3010. Inside the back box 3010, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, the back front front effect unit 3300 provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the front front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction. In front of the back lower front effect unit 3200 provided behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and in the back box 3010 behind the back front effect unit 3300 provided behind the rear effect unit 3500 (FIG. 155), and a back lower back effect unit 3600 provided behind the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box relation]
Next, the configuration related to the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. FIG. 151(a) is a perspective view of the back unit related configuration of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 151(b) is a perspective view of the back unit related configuration of the back unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 152(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box relationship of FIG. 151 disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 152(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the rear. FIG. 153(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit in FIG. 152 as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 153(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the rear.

The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 opened to the front, a back box rear unit 3030 attached to a rear wall of the back box 3010, and a back box rear unit 3030. And a back substrate unit 3040 attached to the rear side of 3010. The rear case rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the rear case 3010 by a lock slider 3020.

The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front, and an opening 3010a penetrating the back wall in a square shape, and a back box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) mounted on the lower side of the opening 3010a. The mounting surface portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame in the upper side of the opening 3010a, and the mounting surface portion 3010b are provided below the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. The lock slider 3020 is provided with a lock mechanism portion 3010d to which the lock slider 3020 is attached so as to be slidable left and right.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangle having an aspect ratio of 3:4 in a front view. The opening 3010a is formed so that the left-right direction is substantially the same size as the left-right direction of the rear wall of the back box 3010. Further, the opening 3010a is provided at a position where the vertical direction is offset (eccentric) upward with respect to the vertical center of the back box 3010. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as that of the 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixing pieces 1651 of the set plate 1650 of the rear case rear unit 3030 are inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the rear case 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 from the rear in a state where the lock slider 3020 is slid to the left in rear view. When the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in a rear view with the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 inserted in the lock mechanism portion 3010d, the lower movement of the lower fixing piece 1652 is blocked by the lock slider 3020. be able to.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface abutting on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the back ball guiding unit 3100 and the like formed at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a pair of shaft support portions 3010f and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 rotatably around an axis extending in the vertical direction on the rear surface. Is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and has a locking portion 3010g with which the locking claw 3041b of the back substrate unit 3040 is locked.

The rear case rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the rear wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the rear case 3010 from the rear side. The rear box rear unit 3030 is attached to the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, the set plate 1650 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached on the front side and attached to the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the set plate 1650. And a peripheral control unit 1500 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device having an aspect ratio of 3:4.

The set plate 1650 is formed in a flat plate shape with a quadrangle having the same size as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 which are separated from the upper side in the left-right direction and which protrude upward, and one lower fixing piece 1652 which protrudes downward from the vicinity of the left-right center of the lower side. There is. The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010.

Further, the set plate 1650 has a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 that is open toward the front on the front surface side. The liquid crystal attachment portion 1653 is formed in a size corresponding to the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is fitted and attached from the front. In the present embodiment, the center of the liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 and the center of the set plate 1650 coincide with each other when viewed from the front. The set plate 1650 is transparent. Accordingly, the inside of the back box 3010 can be visually recognized from the rear through the set plate 1650.

The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160 and the like) having a peripheral control section 1511 and an effect display control section 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 housing the peripheral control board 1510. Has been done. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650 so that the upper side of the peripheral control board box 1520 is located slightly lower than the upper side of the set plate 1650. Accordingly, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, a region having a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 is provided between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650. Has been formed.

The back board unit 3040 includes a board box 3041 that is L-shaped in a front view and has a thin box shape in front and back, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have it. The board box 3041 has two shaft portions 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer side of the vertically extending portion of the L-shape. Further, the board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b that are locked to the locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010 at the tips of the left and right L-shaped portions.

The back board unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 across the opening 3010a (back box rear unit 3030). When assembled on the game board 5, the L-shaped vertically extending portion of the back substrate unit 3040 is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. The L-shaped portion of the back substrate unit 3040 that extends to the left and right is located between the lower end at the rear of the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500.

The back board unit 3040 releases the locking between the locking portion 3010g and the locking claw 3041b, and rotates the locking claw 3041b around the shaft portion 3041a so as to move rearward, thereby the back box. The rear of the rear unit 3030 can be opened, and the rear unit 3030 can be attached to and detached from the rear casing 3010 without being removed from the rear casing 3010.

In this embodiment, an opening 3010a having a size capable of mounting a 19-inch liquid crystal display device is provided on the rear wall of the back box 3010, and the setting plate 1650 is mounted in the opening 3010a. A 15-inch performance display device 1600 is attached to the front side of the 1650. Accordingly, when the effect display device 1600 has a size of 19 inches, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and when the effect display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, the effect is displayed. It can be attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 via a set plate 1650 corresponding to the size of the display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to attach the effect display devices 1600 having different sizes by changing the set plate 1650 while leaving the back box 3010 as it is. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the design of the back box 3010 is also changed according to the change of the model, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common component even if the model is changed. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when it is desired to change the position of the effect display device 1600 due to a design change or the like, it is possible to easily respond by changing only the set plate 1650. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost for design change and the like.

In the above embodiment, the set plate 1650 is transparent, but the set plate 1650 is not limited to this and may be colored, such as colored transparent or colored opaque. When the set plate 1650 can be visually recognized from the player side, it is desirable that the set plate 1650 has an opaque color including black. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the inside of the island facility or seeing the light from the rear, which makes the pachinko machine 1 look unattractive. In this case, in particular, by making the set plate 1650 black, it is possible to make the set plate 1650 inconspicuous even if the set plate 1650 can be visually recognized from the player side, so the effect display device in the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to make the 1600 and other ornaments and the like more conspicuous, and it is possible to make it possible to sufficiently exert the effect produced by them.

[5-9b. Back ball guiding unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guiding unit 3100 is provided in the lower portion of the back box 3010 near the front end. The back ball guiding unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2004. , And a magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see FIG. 160 and the like).

The back ball guiding unit 3100 includes a general winning opening 2001, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, a second big winning opening 2007, a first sub-out opening 2021, and The game ball B received at the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 has a discharge passage for receiving and guiding the game ball B to the vicinity of the center of the lower end in the left-right direction and then discharging it downward. There is.

[5-9c. Back front edge decoration unit]
Next, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is attached near the front end in the back box 3010. When the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is assembled to the game board 5, the back front peripheral decoration 3201 and the back front peripheral decoration 3201 are formed in an annular shape along the periphery of the game area 5a, and are used for the light decoration of the back front peripheral decoration 3201. And a back-front peripheral decoration substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The back front edge peripheral decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape simulating a sumo ring. The front-rear peripheral edge decoration 3201 is formed to have a light-transmitting property, and can be light-emitted and decorated by light from the LEDs mounted on the rear-rear peripheral edge decoration substrate.

According to the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the periphery of the game area 5a can be annularly decorated by the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. In addition, by illuminating and decorating the back front peripheral decoration body 3201, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be made to emit light in a ring shape, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a.

Further, since the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 is capable of independently emitting and decorating a plurality of parts divided in the circumferential direction by the plurality of LEDs of the back front peripheral edge decoration substrate, it seems that light rotates in the peripheral direction. The luminous effect can be shown to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9d. Urakami Front Production Unit]
Next, the back-up front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The front back production unit 3300 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in the front-rear direction at substantially the same position as the front front edge decoration unit 3200. The back-up front rendering unit 3300 is provided in the rear of the back-up front decoration 3310, which is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and behind the back-up front decoration 3310, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front. It is provided with an upper front decorative substrate (not shown) and a rear upper front elevating unit (not shown) for elevating the rear upper decorative body 3310.

The back side front decorative body 3310 is provided so that the sumo rankings such as “Yokozuna”, “Ozeki”, and “Sekiwaki” are arranged from the left side, and the respective numbers are assigned by the LEDs on the back side front decorative board. Can be independently illuminated. The back upper front decorative body 3310 is formed to have a length such that the left-right direction traverses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The back upper front decorative body 3310 is attached so as to be able to move up and down, and can be raised and lowered by a back upper front lifting unit. The back upper front decorative body 3310 can be raised and lowered within a range of substantially the same height as the height of the back upper front decorative body 3310. In the normal state, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is in the state of the highest position where it is moved to the uppermost position. In this state, when assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 in a front view, and is located above the game area 5a. Most of the back front decorative body 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the remaining parts can be visually recognized through the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. it can.

The back-up front decorative body 3310 can be moved downward from the normal raised position to the lowered position by the back-up front lifting unit. In the lower position, the back-up front decorative body 3310 has a vertical center located substantially at the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 159). In the state of the lower position, the back upper front decorative body 3310 can be visually recognized almost entirely through the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500.

According to the back-up front rendering unit 3300, since the numbering of the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be independently performed by light emission decoration, for example, after all the numbering is subjected to variable light emission decoration, only one numbering is performed. It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting decoration is performed and the fluctuation stops. As a result, if the high-ranked rankings are illuminated, it is possible to make the player think that a chance has come, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, according to the back front decorative body 3310, and according to the ranking of the number of light emission decorations, suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a “big hit” game) will occur. can do. As a result, when a plurality of numbered variable light emission decorations of the back front decorative body 3310 are started, it is possible to make the player feel irritated depending on whether or not the variation is stopped at the desired numbering. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the front back decoration 3310 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position by the back front elevation unit, the back front decoration 3310 moves to the center side of the game area 5a and the front of the effect display device 1600. Since the upper portion is blocked, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-side front decoration body 3310, and the back-side front decoration body 3310 can be focused. As a result, it is possible to surely show the player the light-emission effect using the above-mentioned front and rear decorative body 3310, and entertain the player to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, if the above-described light emitting effect is executed at the lower position than at the ascending position, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of premium, and therefore, the reliability of suggesting the degree of expectation by the light emitting effect is increased. It can be further enhanced, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decline in interest.

[5-9e. Front and back production unit]
Next, the lower back front effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The lower back front effect unit 3400 is provided below the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the lower portion inside the back box 3010. The back under front effect unit Yunito 3400 is a back under front decorative body 3410 that is long in the left-right direction, and a back under front decorative board provided behind the back under front decorative body 3410 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (illustrated). Is omitted) and a front lower back elevating unit (not shown) for elevating the lower front decorative body 3410.

The back lower front decorative body 3410 can be light-emitted and decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front lower back decorative substrate. Further, the front lower back decoration 3410 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowermost position lowered by the front lower back elevating unit and the uppermost raised position. The lower back front decorative body 3410 is formed in such a length that the left-right direction traverses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The lower back front decoration 3410 includes a base decoration 3411 that is long in the left and right, a central decoration 3412 provided at the center of the base decoration 3411 in the left-right direction, and a base decoration 3411 that can cover the center decoration 3412 from the front. A front left decoration body 3413 and a front right decoration body 3414, which are provided in front of the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 156 and the like).

The base decoration body 3411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape imitating a rope and has a light-transmitting property. The central ornamental body 3412 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a relief-shaped character of "cup". The central ornamental body 3412 is provided rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction centering on the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned so as to be in contact with each other and movably provided so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction. The front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 each have a light-transmitting property. The front left decorative body 3413 is formed with a relief pattern of the word “heaven”. The front right ornamental body 3414 is formed with relief letters in the form of “rising”.

In the normal state, the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 are located in a closed position where they are close to and in contact with each other, and the central decoration 3412 provided behind is hidden from the front invisible. ing. The front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 can be moved from the normal state to the open position in which they are separated from each other in the left-right direction. In this open position, the central decoration body 3412 provided at the rear can be visually recognized from the front through the space between the front left decoration body 3413 and the front right decoration body 3414.

In the normal state, the back lower front effect unit 3400 has the lower back front decorative body 3410 positioned at the lowered position. Further, in a normal state, the front left decoration body 3413 and the front right decoration body 3414 are located in the closed position, and the central decoration body 3412 is invisible from the front. In the normal state, the lower front decorative body 3410, when assembled to the game board 5, has a vertical center located slightly above the side upper left unit 2300, and a lower end of the center accessory 2500. And the upper end is located slightly below the warp inlet 2511. In the normal state, the lower back front decorative body 3410 is partially visible through the frame of the center role object 2500, and the rest is a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and a transparent center role object 2500. It is visible through.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be moved from the lowered position to the raised position by the lower back front elevating unit. In the state where the lower back front decorative body 3410 is in the raised position, the upper end is located slightly below the rear upper front decorative body 3310 in the raised position (see FIG. 154). In other words, the vertical center of the lower back front decorative body 3410 at the raised position is located at substantially the same height as the first special winning opening 2006. In addition, the back lower front decorative body 3410 has the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 between the open position and the closed position at an arbitrary position (height) between the lowered position and the raised position. Can be moved.

According to this front lower back production unit 3400, when the front lower back decorative body 3410 is moved upward from the lowered position, it moves to the center side of the game area 5a and at the same time blocks a part of the performance display device 1600. Can be strongly attracted, and the front lower back decoration 3410 can be noticed.

In addition, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the back lower front decorative body 3410 makes the central decorative body 3412 provided behind visible (appearing). Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good with the appearance of the central ornamental body 3412, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, in the back lower front decorative body 3410, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, and the central decorative body 3412 is moved. When the central ornamental body 3412 is rotated with the body 3412 appearing, it can be strongly suggested to the player that something good should be done, further enhancing the player's expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since the central ornamental body 3412 can be rotated, when the central ornamental body 3412 appears visibly, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the central ornamental body 3412 rotates. Can entertain.

In addition, the back-under-front production unit 3400 raises and lowers the back-under front decorative body 3410, moves the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 to appear the central decorative body 3412, and rotates the central decorative body 3412. By appropriately combining and, it is possible to show a variety of movable effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the back lower front effect unit 3400, in addition to the movable effect of the front lower back decorative body 3410 as described above, it is also possible to perform the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs of the front lower back decorative board, so that more versatile effects can be achieved. It can be shown to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9f. Back production unit]
Next, the back-up rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described. The back-up rear effect unit 3500 is provided in the upper part inside the back box 3010 and behind the back-up front effect unit 3300. The back-up rear effect unit 3500 is provided behind the back-up rear decoration 3510 (see FIG. 155 and the like) that is long in the left-right direction, and is provided behind the back-up rear decoration 3510, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A rear back decorative board (not shown) and a rear rear elevating unit (not shown) for elevating the rear rear decorative body 3510 are provided.

The back-up rear decorative body 3510 has a light-transmitting property, and can be illuminated and decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decorative board. Further, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the raised position most raised by the back-up rear lifting unit and the lowered position lowered most. Furthermore, the back upper back decoration 3510 is provided behind the back lower front decoration 3410.

The back-up rear decorative body 3510 is formed in a shape simulating the upper half of the winning cup, and a letter “Yu” is formed in a relief shape at the center in the left-right direction. The back-up rear decorative body 3510 can form one big winning cup by the back-up rear decorative body 3610 contacting the lower end (see FIG. 157 and the like). The back-up rear decorative body 3510 has substantially the same height as the back-up front decorative body 3310.

In the rear side rear effect unit 3500, the rear side rear decorative body 3510 is located at the raised position in a normal state. In this state, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is located behind the back-up front decorative body 3310 in the raised position and is invisible from the front.

In the back-up rear effect unit 3500, in the state where the back-up rear decoration 3510 is moved to the lowered position by the back-up rear elevating unit, the lower end of the back-up rear decoration 3510 is substantially at the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is located in In the state where the rear upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved downward from the raised position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the back-up front decoration 3310 or the back-down front decoration 3410 has not moved in front of the back-up rear decoration 3510, the back-up rear decoration 3510 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back-up rear effect unit 3500, since the back-up rear decoration body 3510 can be moved up and down so as to be visible from the front, the player can be surprised by the appearance of the back-up rear decoration body 3510. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the back upper back decorative body 3510 can be brought into contact with the back lower back decorative body 3610 to form one large decoration, a strong impact can be given to the player, and It is possible to suppress the decline in interest that makes you think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-9 g. Back production unit]
Next, the lower back post production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The lower back production unit 3600 is provided behind the lower pre production unit 3400 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The under-rear posterior effect unit 3600 is provided behind the under-rear decorative object 3610 (see FIG. 155 and the like) which is long in the left-right direction, and is provided behind the under-rear posterior decorative object 3610, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A rear-bottom rear decoration substrate (not shown) and a rear-bottom rear lift unit (not shown) for lifting the rear-bottom rear decoration 3610 are provided.

The back lower back decorative body 3610 has a light-transmitting property, and can be light-emitted and decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower back decorative substrate. Further, the under-back rear decorative body 3610 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the most lowered lower position and the most raised position by the lower back rear lifting unit.

The back lower back decorative body 3610 is formed in a shape imitating the lower half of the winning cup, and a letter of “prize” is formed in a relief shape at the center in the left-right direction. The back-up rear decorative body 3610 can form one big winning cup by the back-up rear decorative body 3510 contacting the upper end (see FIG. 157 and the like). The back lower back decorative body 3610 has substantially the same height as the front lower back decorative body 3410.

In the under-rear posterior effect unit 3600, in a normal state, the under-rear posterior decorative body 3610 is located at the lowered position. In this state, the back lower back decorative body 3610 is located behind the front lower back decorative body 3410 in the lowered position and is invisible from the front.

In the state where the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the raised position by the back lower rear raising/lowering unit, the back lower rear decorative unit 3610 has the upper end of the back lower rear decorative body 3610 at the lower end of the rear upper rear decorative body 3510. It is located at a height at which it abuts. In the state where the rear lower back decorative body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the back-up front decoration 3310 or the back-down front decoration 3410 has not moved in front of the back-under back decoration 3610, the back-under back decoration 3610 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back under-rear effect production unit 3600, since the back under-rear decoration 3610 can be moved up and down so as to be visible from the front, the player can be surprised by the appearance of the back under-rear decoration 3610. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the back lower back decorative body 3610 can form one large decoration by contacting the back upper back decorative body 3510, a strong impact can be given to the player, and It is possible to suppress the decline in interest that makes you think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159 and the like. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-under front decorative body of the back-under front effect unit and the back-under rear decorative body of the under-back rear effect unit in the back unit are respectively moved to the raised position. . In FIG. 155, the back lower front decoration of the back lower front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the center of the game area, and the back upper rear decoration of the back upper rear effect unit is moved to the upper side of the back lower front decoration. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state in which the rear lower back decorative body of the lower rear front effect unit is moving to the lower side of the rear lower front decorative body. FIG. 156 shows a state in which, in the state of FIG. 155, the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit are moved to the open position and the central decorative body appears. It is a front view of a game board.

Also, FIG. 157 shows that the back-up rear decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back-lower rear effect unit rises and the back-up rear decorative body rises. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where it abuts. FIG. 158 shows a state in which, in the state of FIG. 157, the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit are moved to the open position and the central decorative body appears. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 159 shows that the back-up front decorative body of the back-up front rendering unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position and the back-up rear decorative body of the back-up rear rendering unit is moved to the rear of the back-up front decoration body. , The back under front decoration of the back under front production unit moves up and moves to the lower side of the back under front decoration, and the back under front decoration of the back under front production unit moves up and under the front under decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of being in contact with the rear upper rear decorative body behind the body.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed substantially transparent, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 142, through them, a game panel. In the back unit 3000 arranged behind 1100, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front decoration body 3310 of the back top front rendering unit 3300, and the back bottom of the back bottom front rendering unit 3400. The front decorative body 3410 and the like can be visually recognized well, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be excellently viewed through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the back-front rim decoration body 3201 of the back-front rim decoration unit 3200 is provided in a ring shape along the rim of the game area 5a, and can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the like. You can The back-up front decorative body 3310 of the back-up front rendering unit 3300 is located above the upper end of the rendering display device 1600, and is located at a raised position where the center in the vertical direction is substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Most of them can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the remaining parts can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500.

In addition, the front lower back decoration 3410 of the front lower back production unit 3400 is located near the lower end of the performance display device 1600 in a lower position where the vertical center is slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300. Part of it can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are located directly above the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized in the frame of the center accessory 2500 through a square region between the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The back-up rear decoration 3510 of the back-up rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is located behind the back-up front decoration 3310 and cannot be seen from the front. In addition, the back under-rear decoration body 3610 of the back under-rear effect unit 3600 is located behind the front back under-decoration body 3410 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The game board 5 is a back unit 3000 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that are drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back front production unit 3300, the back front production unit 3400, the back rear production unit 3500, and the back production unit 3600 perform predetermined movable production and light emission production. Further, the game board 5 performs an effect using the game ball B (here, a so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000.

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform a movable effect as shown in FIGS. 154 to 157. First, as shown in FIG. 154, the back lower front decorative body 3410 of the back lower front rendering unit 3400 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 of the back lower rear rendering unit 3600 are moved together to the raised position. As a result, the under-back front decorative body 3410 that crosses the effect display device 1600 moves upward so as to cross the effect display device 1600 vertically, so that the player's interest is attracted to the under-back front decorative body 3410. You can think of something as good as possible.

By the way, in FIG. 154, when only the back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved upward, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 in the lowered position becomes visible from the front. Since it is formed so as to form a pair with the rear decorative body 3510, if only the back lower rear decorative body 3610 can be visually recognized, it looks like a halfway unnatural thing, and the appearance of the game area 5a is deteriorated. There is a fear. In addition, when the underside rear decorative body 3610 is visible, it is recognized that some players combine it with other decorative bodies due to its incomplete shape, and it is jointed with the underside rear decorative body 3510 described later. When the movable effect is executed, the impact on the player is reduced, and there is a possibility that a sufficient effect cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the back lower back decorative body 3610 is moved upward together with the back lower front decorative body 3410, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 may be hidden. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a from being deteriorated, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the back lower rear decorative body 3610, and to move jointly with the back upper rear decorative body 3510 described later. It is possible to fully exert the effect of the effect.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 154, as shown in FIG. 155, the back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the center of the game area. At this time, for the same reason as described above, the back lower back decorative body 3610 is moved together with the back lower front decorative body 3410 so that the front back lower decorative body 3410 is positioned in front. In addition, the back upper back decoration 3510 is moved to a portion between the back upper front decoration 3310 and the back lower front decoration 3410, and the back lower rear decoration 3610 is moved to the lower side of the back lower front decoration 3410. Let

As a result, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is substantially covered with the back-up rear decorative body 3510, the back-lower front decorative body 3410, and the back-lower rear decorative body 3610, which has a strong impact on the player. You can give it and make you strongly think that there is something good. In this state, the back upper back decorative body 3510 and the back lower back decorative body 3610 that form one decoration (here, the winning cup) are separated from each other in the up and down direction. Since the front lower back decoration 3410 is located, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the middle of the vertically long winning cup is hidden by the front lower back decoration 3410, which makes the player unattractive. Can be avoided.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 155, as shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position close to each other to the open position separated from each other. Then, the central ornamental body 3412 is made to appear visibly between the front left ornamental body 3413 and the front right ornamental body 3414. As a result, when a new central decoration 3412 appears in the back lower front decoration 3410, an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game state) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can be strongly thought, and the expectation for the advantageous gaming state can be increased to suppress the decline in interest.

When the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 may be gradually moved or repeated opening and closing. Thereby, depending on whether the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are opened and the central decorative body 3412 appears, the player can be excited and excited, and the player can be entertained.

In the state shown in FIG. 156, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 may be further rotated. Thus, by rotating the central ornamental body 3412, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a “big hit” gaming state) occurs, and the advantageous gaming state is set. It is possible to raise expectations and suppress a decline in interest.

Subsequently, from the state shown in FIG. 156, as shown in FIG. 155, after moving the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 to the closed position, as shown in FIG. 157. , The back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the lowered position, and the back upper rear decorative body 3510 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 are respectively moved to the center in the vertical direction to be brought into contact with (joined to) each other. As a result, a large winning cup appears in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player can be confident that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "big hit" game state) occurs. , It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state and suppress a decrease in interest.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 157, as shown in FIG. 158, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the player can be strongly convinced that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "big hit" game state) occurs, and the expectation for the advantageous game state is increased to lower the interest. Can be suppressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 158, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. As a result, the player can be made aware that the advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage (for example, the "big hit" gaming state) has been determined, and the expectation for the advantageous gaming state can be increased. Can be suppressed.

Note that, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the first operation is to move the front lower back decorative body 3410 (back lower rear decorative body 3610) to the raised position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 159, the back upper front decorative body 3310 is moved to the lowered position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the back upper rear decorative body 3510 are moved to the lower front decorative body 3310. The back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the lower side of the back upper front decorative body 3310, and the back lower front decorative body 3610 together with the back lower front decorative body 3410 is rearward of the back lower front decorative body 3410. It may be moved to. Alternatively, the back lower front decoration 3410 may be moved to the center of the game area 5a together with the back lower rear decoration 3610. With these, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In this way, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the series of effects as described above is the lottery of the first special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. It is executed according to the result and the lottery result of the second special symbol, which can entertain the player. In addition, a series of productions proceed to the end or end halfway, depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that are selected by lottery. By showing it, it is difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect as described above can be appropriately combined with the light emission effect, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. With this, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining the light emission effects, the display effects, and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the player. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect as described above is the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the first special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005. Although what is executed according to the lottery result of the two special symbols is shown, it is not limited to this and may be executed according to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403. As a result, even during an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a “big hit” game state), it is possible to entertain the movable effect, prevent the player from getting tired, and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160 and the like. FIG. 160 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU 1310a, main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying a set value and an error display, and a partition on the game board 5 It is provided with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the ID code once added is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the content of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the content of the register changes inconsistently, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly determined to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit that resets. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism in which it cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described below, and again executes the main control side power-on process described below. Will be done. In this case, since the main power supply side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM will always occur as described later, and the contents of the main control internal RAM are completely erased ( Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in hardware") that updates the big hit determination random number, which is used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state, from among various random numbers related to the game by hardware. Random number circuit"). The hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and the initial value is generated. The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed as the value (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set every time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication, and within a predetermined numerical range. When all the values in 1 have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. It is supposed to be set as.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various sensors to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, so various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2004, and a second start that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2005. Mouth sensor 2401, general winning a prize sensor 3001 which detects the game ball B which is received in general winning a prize 2001, gate sensor 2601 which detects the game ball B which passes gate 2002, game which is accepted in first big winning a prize 2006 The first big winning opening sensor 2525 detecting the ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2561 detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 are detected. Detection signals from the out sensor 664, a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, a vibration sensor that detects a vibration acting on the game board 5, and the like are supplied to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. Is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port.

Further, the respective detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are passed through the payout control board 633 (via the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When it is input to the main control board 1310 without any intervention), it is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the second starting opening sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control is performed. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the input circuit. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning opening sensor 2525, the second big winning opening sensor 2561, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are transmitted through the panel relay board. Through the main control board 1310, that is, indirectly, it is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the main control solenoid drive circuit outputs the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, The respective drive signals are output to the special winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second special winning opening solenoid 2563 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the function display unit 1400. To status indicator, normal symbol indicator, ordinary reserved indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special reserved number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special reserved number indicator, round indicator, to Each drive signal is directly output without passing through another board. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) regarding the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) regarding the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or a game ball B from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal that notifies that the launch of the game sphere B is output, a launch permission signal that notifies that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the firing permission signal that informs that the firing is permitted is set to the firing permission logic when the firing is permitted, while the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) is obtained by inverting the firing permission logic when the firing is not permitted. Is set to. The logic of the launch permission signal is, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power recovery), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process described later is started. Up to this point, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the firing permission logic is set.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning opening sensor 2525, the second big winning opening sensor 2561, and the out sensor. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for 664, while a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the variable winning opening 2003, and the gate 2002, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2401 and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2601 also frequently occur. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601.

Further, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs, the first big winning opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B is frequently entered, so the first big winning hole sensor The detection of the game ball B by 2525 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2525. Further, since a large amount of the game balls B shot in the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, the detection of the game ball B by the out sensor 664 is frequent. Occurs in. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is also used for the out sensor 664. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3001. It should be noted that a proximity switch having high durability and long life may be used regardless of whether or not the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various kinds of information (game information) related to games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral controller 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, performs the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and the firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and the firing that controls the ball feed by the ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball for maintenance. The game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (the upper plate 201) and a ball removing switch for starting the ball removing operation. , Are provided.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, a payout control unit 633a that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has not only built-in ROM and RAM but also a function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) being input from the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 and the payout are also input. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU through the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and the error cancellation signal from the error cancellation switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, the payout device 580 is informed that there is no game ball B), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "the ball is a ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number “3” is displayed, the fact that the “counting switch error” has occurred (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, it informs that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, the fact that "CR is not connected" (the electric connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit) is notified, When the number "9" is displayed, the fact that "is in stock" (specifically, the number of gaming balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls) is informed. .

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 by a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit which outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit which outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , And generates a ball feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's intention is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the firing timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 which notifies the launch of the game ball B is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 which electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

The firing timing control circuit establishes firing condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and determines the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board based on the CR connection signal. If the firing condition 2 that is electrically connected is satisfied, and the firing condition 3 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B Since the firing reference pulse for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a is not output, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and cannot fire the game ball B.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 195, and a launch reference pulse. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

In the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with the firing control section 633b for performing the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. You may comprise. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not exist.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 160, the peripheral control board 1510 uses a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, although not shown in detail, has a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on one semiconductor chip. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs a high-quality sound, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to. And a stored sound ROM.

In the peripheral control IC, a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control ICs are controlled based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 to the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. For the game board decoration drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 or for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in the game board 5 A drive signal sent from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the thrust output adjustment drive motor 381. And door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is transmitted to the display control unit serial. In addition to transmitting from the I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, the press detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the bump output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit The operation of 1512 is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and provides a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and the like provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. The control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, etc.) as sound information are transmitted to the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. By transmitting a 2.1 ch surround signal or a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are different from the display command in a plurality of serial input/output. The bit rate is set to 250 kbps in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviated to Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in this image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU has a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs the interrupt process when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM is large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 is large, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as the “order of sprite superposition”).

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats main scanning for sequentially setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels for one line are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 to allow the player to rotate the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls B are brought into contact with the obstacle nails N, so that the game balls The flow-down speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center role object 2500.

When the game ball B that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, which is higher than the highest part, while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N, Either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is circulated. Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first special winning opening 2006 that is normally closed unacceptably by the first special winning opening door 2523, and the left second guide passage 2532 is provided. The game ball B which has entered the above rolls down on the first big winning opening door 2523 and flows down.

The game ball B flowing through the left guide passage group 2530 is discharged above the gate 2002, and on the left and right of the variable winning opening 2003 which is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521, the left guiding passage group 2530 and the gate. After abutting on the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gates 2002 and 2002, it passes through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the drawn regular symbols is "normal win", a variable winning a prize mouth The variable winning port 2003 closed by the door 2521 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the variable winning port 2003.

In the present embodiment, since the variable winning port 2003 is provided in a portion near the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is higher to circulate the left second guide passage 2532 than the left first guide passage 2531. The variable winning port 2003 is accepted with a probability. Then, when the game balls B are received in the variable winning port 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of the game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Paid out to.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from when the ordinary lottery is started until the result of the ordinary symbol is suggested (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, which is also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this ordinary symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning port 2003 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 after the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and the lottery result for the normal symbol is suggested, the suggestion for the lottery result for the normal symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is held until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous ordinary symbol ends. Further, the number of reserved lottery results of ordinary symbols has an upper limit of up to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, the number is discarded without being reserved. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

At the site of the gate 2002, the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002, the left outer side of the gate 2002, or the right outer side of the gate 2002. Then, the game ball B flowing down below the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W. .

Then, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting opening 2004, and thus the first probability is high. Accepted in the start port 2004.

When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", A lottery for "time reduction (time reduction)", "probability variation time reduction per hit", "probability variation time reduction per hit", "second big hit", etc. is performed. If the lottery result of the first special symbol selected by lottery is other than “miss”, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol selected by lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time).

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first start opening 2004 until the result of the lottery of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special variation time), the first start When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol, so until the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol that was previously drawn is completed, the first special symbol The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the design is suspended. The number of reservations of the lottery result of the first special symbol to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted in the first starting opening 2004. However, the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center character 2500, the right side of the center character 2500 is reached. It passes through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540 and is discharged to the space forming portion 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is implanted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right first guide passage 2541 having an inlet opening near the stopper 1006 and an inlet with a space leftward from the inlet of the right first guide passage 2541. And a right second guide passage 2542 which is open. As a result, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right hit) with the strength of abutting against the stopper 1006, the strength enters the right first guide passage 2541 and does not abut the stopper 1006 (right). When the game ball B is hit with a strength slightly weaker than the hitting), the player enters the right second guide passage 2542 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B that has been driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542, depending on the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B flowing through the right first guide passage 2541 is discharged to the first guiding region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B flowing through the right second guide passage 2542 is the specific obstacle. It is discharged to the second guiding area 2712 of the nail group 2700.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the left-right direction along the guide area 2710. Thereby, in the part of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the flow-down velocity of the game ball B is suppressed as compared with the normal region.

In the first guidance area 2711 and the second guidance area 2712, the game ball B may be removed from the guidance area 2710. When the game ball B is removed from the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside, the first sub-out port 2021 provided below is provided. Highly likely to be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any opportunity to be received in the second special winning opening 2007 or the second starting opening 2005 provided downstream.

In this embodiment, the right second guide passage 2542 is more likely to be received in the first sub-out port 2021 than is the right first guide passage 2541. Accordingly, it is possible to allow the player to perform the driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through the right first guide passage 2541 at the time of "right hitting". There is. That is, at the time of "right hitting", the driving operation of urging the handle 195 to a large degree so as to hit the game ball B with the strength such that the game ball B contacts the stop portion 1006 is urged. With the relatively easy driving operation, the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be easily enjoyed.

The game ball B that circulates through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming unit 2550) and cannot be received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and is the second attacker. Enter into section 2560. In a normal state, the second special winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker section 2560 is closed by the second special winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be received. The game ball B passing between the right wall portion 2567 and the second big winning opening door 2562 flows down and rolls to the left on the second big winning opening door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then to the right. It is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the discharge passage 2565.

A second starting port 2005 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the second starting port 2005, and a lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the second starting port 2005. Inclined wall portions 2418 are provided respectively. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the outlet of the right discharge passage 2565 and the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received in the second starting opening 2005 with a certain probability. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received in the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than the second starting port 2005. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 and not received in the second starting opening 2005 or the second sub-out opening 2022 flows down onto the inclined wall portion 2418, and the inclined wall portion 2418 is inclined. It rolls diagonally to the lower left, is discharged to the left at a site below the first starting port 2004, and is received in the out port 1008.

That is, in a normal state, when the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (“right hit”), only the second starting opening 2005 has the opportunity to accept the game ball B. As a result, in a normal state, the player can positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center role object 2500, and also on the right side of the center role object 2500 (“ Right-handed”) can give a sense of premium.

When the game ball B driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 is received by the second starting port 2005, a predetermined number (for example, one) from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201, and in the main control board 1310, a second special symbol (for example, “miss”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “15R big hit”) , "Probability change (probability change) per", "Time reduction (time reduction) per", "Probability variation time reduction per hit", "Probability variation time reduction per hit", "Second big hit", etc.) are drawn. If the lottery result of the second special symbol selected by lottery is other than "miss", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. And the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol is a player who spends a predetermined time longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time). Suggested by.

In the present embodiment, the second start is started from the start of the special lottery by receiving the game ball B into the second start opening 2005 until the result of the lottery of the second special symbol drawn is suggested (special change time). When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol that was previously drawn is completed until the second special symbol is completed. The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the design is suspended. With respect to the number of reserves of the lottery result of the second special symbols to be reserved, the maximum number of each of the second start ports 2005 is four, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted in the second start ports 2005. Even without holding the lottery result of the second special symbol, it is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol which is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2005 is the first special symbol which is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2004. It is set longer than the special variation time of the lottery result. As a result, the lottery result of the second special symbol takes longer to consume the number of holdings, so that the number of accepted game balls B per unit time for the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 is the same. Also, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting opening 2005 is smaller. Therefore, in a normal state, even if the player hits the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500, only the second starting opening 2005 may be accepted, and the frequency of executing the lottery result of the second special symbol is low. , It is possible to positively cause the player to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As described above, by the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol that is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the first big prize. The mouth 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 are opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the game ball B is ready to be received.

In the case where the first special winning opening 2006 can be accepted, the first special winning opening 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player is left first. The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the second guide passage 2532. When the game ball B that has entered the left second guide passage 2532 is received in the first special winning opening 2006 while the first special winning opening 2006 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 by the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, in the case where the second special winning opening 2007 can be accepted, since the second special winning opening 2007 is provided below the right side of the center character 2500, the right side of the center character 2500 to the player. The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed. Then, when the second special winning opening 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, the game ball B has entered the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker unit 2560 from between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567. When is received in the second big winning opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

In this way, when the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 can receive the game ball B, by letting the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 receive the game ball B, Since many game balls B can be paid out, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is, for example, “small hit”, the second special winning opening 2007 is short enough to accept the game ball B. Open and close with a space between (for example, small hit rush). At this time, even if an attempt is made to hit the game ball B aiming at the second prize hole 2007 at the timing when the second prize hole 2007 is opened and the game ball B can be accepted, the second prize hole 2007 Since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the flow-down speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to hit the game ball B at a timing. As a result, the degree of difficulty is given to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to entertain the player by motivating the player to play the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest. .. Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult to receive the game ball B in the second special winning opening 2007, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that are lottery are “big hit”, after the second special winning opening 2007 is in the open state in which the game ball B can be received, When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) elapses, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are received in the second special winning opening 2007, the game ball B is satisfied. The opening/closing pattern for closing the unacceptable closed state (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, if "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and if "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

In addition, in "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" or the second special symbol is drawn ("probability change") or the lottery result of the first special symbol There is a "hit" to change the display time of the effect image that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol ("time saving hit").

If the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is "second big hit", the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007, After allowing the game ball B to be received in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a state of probable variation or shortening during a predetermined number of times of variation.

In this embodiment, below the second special winning opening 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 can be distributed. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2561, and then enters the pseudo game area 2010. The game ball B that has entered the pseudo game region 2010 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted in the pseudo game region 2010, and when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can receive the game ball B. The game ball B is received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 cannot receive the game ball B, it is discharged from the pseudo out opening 2404 through the front of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo special winning opening 2402, for example, when the second big winning opening 2007 is capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to the “big hit” or the like as described above, the game ball B is opened in the predetermined opening/closing pattern. Acceptable. Since this pseudo special winning opening 2402 is provided so as to stand out larger than the second special winning opening 2007, many game balls B received by the second special winning opening 2007 become the pseudo special winning opening 2402. By being accepted, it is possible to make the player less entertaining and entertaining during the "big hit" game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In the present embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol are suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest a special symbol lottery result (first special symbol lottery result and second special symbol lottery result). The suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 suggests the lottery result of the special symbol by the combination of the LEDs that are turned on and off by blinking the plurality of LEDs repeatedly for a predetermined time. .

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a varying manner by changing each of the icon strings in a state where three image strings each including a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol rows are stopped and displayed such that the symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbols. If the special symbol lottery result is other than "miss", after three symbols are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image indicating the special symbol lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , An advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) corresponding to the lottery result of the drawn special symbol occurs.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (special variation time)) which suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the time which suggests the lottery result of the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row varies). The time until the confirmation image is displayed) is set differently, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the lottery special symbol. A player participation type effect in which the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in 300 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 so as to be conspicuous, and the player operation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000. It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back-up front production unit 3300, the back-down front production unit 3400, the back-up rear production unit 3500, the back-under rear production unit 3600, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the contact operation section 302 and the push operation section 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect.

[8. Second embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment shown in a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed. FIG. 162(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the game board of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and FIG. 162(b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the game board of the second embodiment as seen from the back. is there. FIG. 163(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guiding unit in the right half of the center accessory of FIG. 162 as seen from the front, and FIG. 163(b) is seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 164(a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 165(a) is a sectional view taken along the soot line in FIG. 164, (b) is a sectional view taken along the sethe line in FIG. 164, and (c) is a soot line in FIG. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along the saw line, and FIG. 16D is a cross-sectional view taken along the tar line in FIG. 166(a) is an exploded perspective view of the sphere guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 166(b) is an exploded perspective view of the sphere guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and seen from the front left.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment is different only in the configuration of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and a part of the front unit 2000. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the game board 5A of the second embodiment, three general winning openings 2001 are provided. Further, in the game board 5A, instead of the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 in the game board 5 is the normal winning opening 2008, and the variable winning opening 2003 of the game board 5 is playing to the normal winning opening 2008. The second starting port 2005 is opened and closed according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol that is drawn by receiving the ball B. Further, in the game board 5A, a ball guiding unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B is provided in place of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

Due to the differences as described above, in the game board 5A of the second embodiment, the variable winning opening sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting opening sensor, and the second starting opening sensor 2401 of the gaming board 5 is replaced. It is usually replaced by a winning a prize sensor.

The center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A is provided in the space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560 and can guide the game ball B flowing through the right guide passage group 2540. The guiding unit 2580 and a flat center right front plate 2590 that extends vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guiding unit 2580 are provided. ..

The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 penetrating vertically long rectangles in the flange portion 2502 extending rightward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and below the opening portion 2553. It has a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b through which the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 2580 is provided.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape that extends downward from the inlet, extends rightward, and then extends downward. A lower right second passage 2550b is provided on the right side of the lower right first passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open at the front and are closed by the center right front plate 2590. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located substantially in the vertical center of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5A.

Between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560, a space where the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed is formed, and the portion of the panel plate 1110 concerned. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in.

The lower right second passage 2550b opens downward just above the first sub-out port 2021. As a result, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the lower right second passage 2550b is more likely to be received in the first sub-out port 2021 than the lower right first passage 2550a. In this lower right second passage 2550b, the game ball B that has passed through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guide unit 2580 flows, so to the first sub-out port 2021. In order to reduce the probability of accepting the game ball B, the player can positively perform the driving operation of causing the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541. Therefore, when the player hits the ball "right", by hitting it strongly, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the stop portion 1006, and thus the game ball B needs to be hit with delicate adjustment. There is no need, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

[8-1. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 2580 separately guides the game balls B that have flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 in a state where they can be visually recognized from the front. The ball guide unit 2580 has a first guide passage 2580a for guiding the game ball B from the right first guide passage 2541 and a second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B from the right second guide passage 2542. is doing. A second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while swinging the game ball B in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction.

The first guiding passage 2580a of the ball guiding unit 2580 has an inlet opening forward near the upper end, and an outlet opening diagonally forward and downward at the lower end. Further, the second guide passage 2580b has an inlet opening toward the front at a position slightly lower than the inlet of the first guide passage 2580a, and an outlet opening toward the lower front diagonally at the lower end.

The ball guiding unit 2580 includes a left guide member 2581 provided with a first guide passage 2580a which is opened to the right, and a second guide member which is attached to the right of the left passage member 2581 and opened to the right. The right passage member 2582 is provided with the passage 2580b, and the flat passage closing plate 2583 is attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582. The ball guiding unit 2580 is transparent.

The left passage member 2581 protrudes rightward from a flat-faced side wall portion 2581a extending in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction and a surface of the side wall portion 2581a that faces the right side, and is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower. And has a plurality of inclined portions 2581b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided at intervals with which the game balls B can flow in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower sides in the vertical direction are alternately different. Further, the plurality of inclined portions 2581b are arranged such that the upper ends of the lower inclined portions 2581b extend outward in the front-rear direction with a spacing allowing the game ball B to flow from the lower ends of the upper inclined portions 2581b. It is provided.

In addition, the left passage member 2581 extends from the upper end of each inclined portion 2581b above the upper inclined portion 2581b and the standing wall portion 2581c extending from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c to above the upper inclined portion 2581b. And a ceiling wall portion 2581d that is exposed.
The top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the upper inclined portion 2581b of the inclined portion 2581b on which the standing wall portion 2581c stands. Further, the ceiling wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2581b of the upper inclined portion 2581b, and forms a gap between the upper inclined portion 2581b and the upper inclined portion 2581b. .

Further, the left passage member 2581 has a plurality of first protruding portions 2581e protruding rightward from a portion between the vertically spaced apart inclined portions 2581b of the side wall portion 2581a and the inclined portion 2581b of the side wall portion 2581a. It has a plurality of first projecting piece portions 2581f protruding rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2581c. The first protruding portion 2581e is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2581b in the front-rear direction, has a flat plate shape extending in parallel with the lower inclined portion 2581b, and has a triangular shape with a thin tip. Has been formed. The first projecting piece portion 2581f extends vertically, the lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and the upper end is inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is low, and the upper end side extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the inlet of the first guide passage 2580a. . Further, the lowermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the front end is low and is located rearward of the front end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, and forms the lower side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2580a. is doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2581d does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 includes a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2582a that closes the first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right side, and a plurality of first side wall portions 2582a that protrude leftward from the left-sided surface of the side wall portion 2582a. It has one protruding portion 2582b. When assembled into the ball guiding unit 2580, the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are provided two by two in the one inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 with the first protrusion 2581e therebetween in the front-rear direction. The first projecting portion 2582b has a triangular shape in which the upstream side of the first projecting portion 2581e projects to the left, and the downstream side of the first projecting portion 2581e is inclined toward the upstream side edge and extends downstream to the vicinity of the standing wall section 2581c. It has a trapezoidal shape that protrudes to the left.

Further, the right passage member 2582 projects rightward from the surface of the side wall portion 2582a that faces the right side, is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower, and is provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided at intervals with which the game balls B can flow in the up-down direction, and are provided so that the lower sides in the up-down direction are alternately different. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2582c are arranged such that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2582c extends outward in the front-rear direction with an interval at which the game ball B can flow than the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2582c. It is provided.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 extends from the upper end of each inclined portion 2582c to the standing wall portion 2582d that extends above the upper inclined portion 2582c, and extends from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d to above the upper inclined portion 2582c. And a ceiling wall portion 2582e which is exposed.
The ceiling wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the upper inclined portion 2582c of the inclined portion 2582c on which the standing wall portion 2582d stands. Further, the top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2582c of the upper inclined portion 2582c, and forms a gap between the upper inclined portion 2582c and the upper inclined portion 2582c. .

Further, the right passage member 2582 includes a plurality of second protruding portions 2582f protruding rightward from a site between the vertically spaced apart inclined portions 2582c of the side wall portion 2582a and the inclined portion 2582c of the side wall portion 2581a. It has a plurality of second projecting piece portions 2582g protruding rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2582d. The second projecting piece portion 2582g is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction of the inclined portion 2582c, has a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2582c, and has a triangular shape with a narrowed tip. Is formed in. The second projecting piece 2582g extends vertically, the lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end is inclined so as to lower to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the rear end is low, and the front end forms the lower side of the inlet of the second guide passage 2580b. Further, the lowermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the front end becomes lower, and is located rearward of the front end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, and forms the lower side of the outlet of the second guide passage 2580b. is doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2582e does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 includes a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that is opened to the right, and a plurality of first side wall portions 2583a that protrude to the left from the surface of the side wall portion 2583a that faces the left side. It has two protrusions 2583b. When assembled to the ball guiding unit 2580, the plurality of second protruding portions 2583b are provided in pairs in the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 with two second protruding portions 2582f in the front-rear direction. The second projecting portion 2583b has a triangular shape in which the upstream side of the second projecting portion 2582f projects to the left, and the downstream side of the second projecting portion 2582f has its upstream side edge inclined and extends to the downstream side up to the vicinity of the standing wall section 2582d. It has a trapezoidal shape that protrudes to the left.

In the ball guiding unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guiding passage 2580a through the right first guiding passage 2541 of the right guiding passage group 2540, the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 moves backward. Roll towards. Above the inclined portion 2581b, a first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right so as to move back and forth with the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. Thereby, the game ball B is guided to the left by the first protrusion 2582b, then guided to the right by the next first protrusion 2581e, and further guided to the left again by the next first protrusion 2582b. Then, it rolls to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2581b while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b onto the lower inclined portion 2581b along the standing wall portion 2581c. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the previous first protruding portion 2582b is guided to the right by the first projecting piece 2581f projecting to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2581b. To do. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically from the upper inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b.

The game ball B flowing down to the lower inclined portion 2581b rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2581b. Even above the inclined portion 2581b, the first projecting portion 2581e projects from the left, and two first projecting portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 project from the right so as to move back and forth with the first projecting portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the rear first protruding piece 2581f is guided to the left by the first protruding portion 2582b, and then guided to the right by the next first protruding portion 2581e. Then, it is guided to the left again by the next first projecting portion 2582b and rolls to the front end of the inclined portion 2581b while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2581b, it is guided to the right by the front side first projecting piece 2581f and further flows down onto the lower inclined portion 2581b, and the outlet of the first guide passage 2580a. Until now, the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated.

Further, in the ball guiding unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guiding passage 2580b through the right second guiding passage 2542 of the right guiding passage group 2540, it moves backward by the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582. Roll around. In the second guide passage 2580b, the game ball B flows down while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, similarly to the first guide passage 2580a. More specifically, the second protruding portion 2582f projects from the left above the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and the second portion of the passage closing plate 2583 extends from the right so as to move back and forth with the second protruding portion 2582f. Two projecting portions 2583b project. As a result, the game ball B is guided leftward by the second projecting portion 2583b, then guided rightward by the next second projecting portion 2582f, and further guided leftward by the next second projecting portion 2583b. Then, it rolls to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2582c while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c onto the lower inclined portion 2582c along the standing wall portion 2582d. At this time, the game ball B guided leftward by the second projecting portion 2583b is guided rightward by the second projecting piece portion 2582g projecting rightward and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2582c. To do. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically down from the upper inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c.

The game ball B flowing down to the lower inclined portion 2582c rolls forward in accordance with the inclination of the inclined portion 2582c. Even above the inclined portion 2582c, the second protruding portion 2582f protrudes from the left side, and two second protruding portions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right side so as to move back and forth with the second protruding portion 2582f. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the second projecting piece 2582g on the rear side is guided to the left by the second projecting portion 2583b, and then guided to the right by the next second projecting portion 2582f. Then, it is guided to the left again by the next second projecting portion 2583b and rolls to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction. Then, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2582c, the second projecting piece 2582g on the front side guides it to the right and further flows down on the lower inclined portion 2582c, and the outlet of the second guide passage 2580b. Until now, the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated.

As described above, according to the ball guiding unit 2580 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right guide passage group 2540 is allowed to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, and then discharged downward. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the retention time (flow-down time) of the game ball B at the same height as compared with the case where the game ball B is flown down vertically or is flown down by a spiral passage. You can As a result, the distribution speed of the game ball B becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B can be easily seen by the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the game ball B is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, compared with the case of causing it to flow down through a spiral passage, the game ball B However, the player can entertain the player with the movement of the game ball B, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the left side surface faces the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B moves forward and backward in the ball guiding unit 2580 by looking through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to visually recognize that the game ball B is circulating while meandering, and to enjoy the movement of the game ball B.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the flow velocity of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, and therefore, the same effect as the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described above can be achieved. If it explains in full detail, for example, according to the lottery result of the 1st special symbol and the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol which were drawn by acceptance of game ball B to the 1st starting mouth 2004 or the 2nd starting mouth 2005 (for example, " (Small hit) lottery), the second big winning opening 2007 of the second attacker portion 2560 provided below the ball guiding unit 2580 is opened and closed with a flicker in a short time so that the game ball B can be received (for example, , Small hit rush) so that the player can drive the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second prize hole 2007 at the timing when the second prize hole 2007 can be accepted. Will be done. At this time, even if an attempt is made to hit the game ball B at that timing, a ball guiding unit 2580 that can delay the flow down speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second special winning opening 2007. The timing of hitting the game ball B can be made difficult. As a result, a difficulty level can be given to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that it is possible to entertain the player by motivating the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the sphere guiding unit 2580, since the gap is formed between the inclined portion 2581b and the ceiling wall portion 2581d and between the inclined portion 2582c and the ceiling wall portion 2582e, the first guiding passage 2580a and the first guiding passageway 2580a. When a ball clogging occurs inside the second guide passage 2580b, the ball clogging can be eliminated by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

According to the ball guiding unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form the first guiding passage 2580a and the second guiding passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B. , Compared with the case of forming a passage using a plurality of obstacle nails N, the flow path is not deformed by the circulation of the game ball B (deformation of the obstacle nail N), and the game ball B is guided in a stable state. can do.

[8-2. Center right front plate]
The center right front plate 2590 of the game board 5A is formed in a transparent and flat plate shape, and covers the front between the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560 so as to cover the front. Is attached to the front end on the right outside of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The center right front plate 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (including the ball guiding unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 has a plurality of first accommodating portions 2590a penetrating forward and backward at the lower part and accommodating the heads of a plurality of obstructing nails N, respectively, and penetrating forward and backward so that one obstructing nail N It has the 2nd accommodation part 2590b in which a head is accommodated, and the peeling hole 2590c which penetrates back and forth.

The first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b have a panel board of the game panel 1100 whose front surface is exposed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560. The heads of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted at 1110 are accommodated.

The first accommodating portion 2590a is constant with respect to the circumferential line that surrounds and is in contact with the heads of the plurality of (two or three in the present embodiment) obstacle nails that are accommodated (two or three in the present embodiment). It is provided in the shape of a long hole forming a gap. As a result, the center of the first accommodating portion 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstacle nail N. The second accommodating portion 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b coincide with the respective obstacle nails N that are planted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560. It is provided in the part.

This makes it possible to limit the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N housed in the first housing portion 2590a and the second housing portion 2590b, so that the impact caused by the circulation (contact) of the game ball B. It is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an external impact or the like due to something or the like, and it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow, and to play the game. The ball B can be circulated in a stable state, the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b of the center right front plate 2590, on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to reduce the labor required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided in a mounting boss for mounting the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center accessory 2500, and is provided coaxially with the mounting hole of the mounting boss. When a sticker for decoration or protection is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, a stick-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side in the state where the seal is attached. By pressing the seal from the rear to the front by the rod-shaped member, a part of the seal can be rolled up from the center right front plate 2590. Then, by pulling the rolled portion of the seal by the operator, the seal can be easily removed (peeled) from the center right front plate 2590. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability such as the reattachment work of the seal at the time of manufacturing and the sorting work at the time of disposal.

Since the peeling hole 2590c is provided in the mounting boss portion, an attempt is made to insert a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or a portion where the game ball B flows through the peeling hole 2590c. Also, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the rear side is closed by the mounting screw, so that it is possible to prevent an illegal tool from being inserted, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed.

In addition, if a seal is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the peel hole 2590c can be made difficult to see from the front by the seal, and the appearance of the peel hole 2590c can be prevented from deteriorating and the player On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the existence of the peeling hole 2590c to be noticed, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2590c.

Further, when the seal is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion are attached by the seal attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590 when assembled on the game board 5. Since the front side of the portion 2590b can be closed, the obstacle nail N whose head is stored in the first storage portion 2590a or the second storage portion 2590b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent by the contact of a tool or the like at the time of maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the sticker is attached, when the obstacle nail N whose head is housed in the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b is bent through the seal, a trace thereof remains in the seal, The defect of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

[9. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The center right front plate 2555 of the center accessory 2500 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is a holding plate of the present invention, and the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 of the present embodiment are accommodating of the present invention. 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 in the present embodiment corresponds to the protrusion of the present invention.

[10. Characteristic effect of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the specific obstacle nail group 2700 formed of a plurality of obstacle nails N in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a predetermined guide area 2701 (first guide area) The game ball B can be guided with a predetermined probability along the 2711 or the second guidance area 2712). In this specific obstacle nail group 2700, the two obstacle nails N are configured to be at least configured by a plurality of combined nail portions 2710 that are one set of combined nail portions 2710, and a game is performed between the plurality of combined nail portions 2710. Since an interval through which the ball B can pass is provided, a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed in one obstacle nail N of the braided nail portion 2710 in the direction in which the remaining nail N is adjacent. Therefore, the remaining obstacle nails N are only responsible for forming a gap in a direction in which they are not adjacent. That is, in the assembled nail portion 2710, in one obstacle nail N, the direction in charge of forming a gap through which the game ball B can pass can be a partial direction. Therefore, even if one obstacle nail N of the braided nail portion 2710 is bent, the number of gaps affected by the number of gaps formed with the braided nail portion 2710 paired with the braided nail portion 2710 is affected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball B from largely changing, and it is possible to easily distribute the game ball B in a stable state in a desired and intended flow path.

At this time, the first accommodating portion 2555a of the center right front plate 2555 accommodates the front ends of the respective obstacle nails N of the plurality of braid nail portions 2710 forming the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the center right front plate. The second accommodation portion 2555b of 2555 accommodates the front end of a single obstacle nail N that constitutes the specific obstacle nail group 2700. In the braided nail portion 2710, the front ends of two obstacle nails N that are planted close to each other are housed in one first housing portion 2555a, and two obstacles that are planted close to each other are arranged. Since it is difficult for the nails N to bend in the direction in which they approach each other, by enclosing the parts in the direction in which they do not approach each other as a set by the first accommodating portion 2555a, the obstacles N in any direction It can also be difficult to bend. On the other hand, since the front end of one obstacle nail N that has been planted alone is accommodated in the second accommodating portion 2555b, the obstacle nail N can be made difficult to bend by the second accommodating portion 2555b. Due to this, the obstacle nails N of the plurality of combined nail portions 2710 and the single obstacle nail N forming the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are set to the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. Therefore, even if an impact is applied to the obstacle nail N due to the contact of the game ball B, the contact of a tool or the like at the time of maintenance, the front end of the obstacle nail N has the first accommodation portion. By abutting on the peripheral walls of the 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, it is possible to prevent further movement (hardness) of the obstacle nails N and prevent the nails N from bending (a specific obstacle nail group 2700). It is possible to maintain the flow of the game ball B by the original state (at the time of shipment) intended. Therefore, the plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 can make it difficult for the plurality of obstacle nails N that form the specific obstacle nail group 2700 to bend, so that the game ball B is It can be stably circulated in the intended flow, and it is possible to continue to guide the game ball B with a predetermined probability by the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and at the same time, achieve the intended effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. The pachinko machine 1 can be reliably exerted, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be exerted for a long time.

Further, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is composed of a plurality of braided nail portions 2710 and a single obstacle nail N, the number of the obstacle nails N implanted can be relatively increased, and more The game ball B can be brought into contact with the obstacle nail N. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of contact with the obstacle nail N, it becomes possible to further suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B or change the distribution direction of the game ball B to various directions. The movement of the game ball B can be more enjoyed, and a decrease in interest in the game by the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with a plurality of projecting ridge fronts 2555d protruding rearward, and the game ball B is brought into contact with the ridge front 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, whereby the game ball B Since it is possible to suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B or change the distribution direction of the game ball B, it is possible to show the player various movements of the game ball B, and entertain the player. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the front ridge portion 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 does not bend unlike the obstacle N, it is possible to stably maintain the flow of the game ball B by the plurality of front ridge portions 2555d, and the pachinko machine 1 The performance expected by the manufacturer can be exhibited for a long time.

Further, since the center right front plate 2555 is provided with the front ridge portion 2555d, the obstacle nail that suppresses the circulation speed of the game ball B or changes the circulation direction by the front ridge portion 2555d of the center right front plate 2555. Since it is possible to exert a function similar to N, and because the front end of the obstacle nail N is stored in the storage portion of the center right front plate 2555, the center right front plate 2555 is provided near the front end of the game area 5a. It is possible to extend the center right front plate 2555 to a portion where it is difficult to implant the obstacle nail N in the game area 5a, and to provide the front ridge portion 2555d at the portion. As a result, a ball 2555d in front of the ridge portion is provided in place of the obstacle nail N at a portion where the obstacle nail N cannot be implanted in the conventional pachinko machine or a portion outside the specific obstacle nail group 2700. Since B can be moved in the same manner as the obstacle nail N, it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball B in a wider range, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, a second large winning opening 2007 is provided downstream of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 so as to open and close the game ball B in a receivable manner in accordance with the progress of the game (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol). In this way, since the game ball B can be brought into contact with many obstacle nails N in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is possible to delay the distribution of the game ball B. When guided by the group 2700, the game ball B can be delayed and reach the second special winning opening 2007 provided on the downstream side as compared with the normal plurality of obstacle nails N. The driving timing of the game ball B aiming at the winning opening 2007 can be made difficult, and a desired difficulty level can be given to the driving operation of the game ball B. At this time, since the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is hard to bend by the center right front plate 2555 as described above, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can continue to guide the game ball B with a predetermined probability. Thus, the driving operation can be surely performed at a desired difficulty level, and the driving operation difficulty level can be maintained for a long time as the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1. From this, it is possible to motivate the player to drive the game ball, entertain the game ball B, and receive the game ball B into the second prize hole 2007. By doing so, a sense of accomplishment can be added, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed. Further, as described above, since it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation by the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is possible to make it difficult to receive the game ball B into the second special winning opening 2007. By suppressing the chance of paying out by accepting the game ball B into the special winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, since there are gaps between the front ends of the obstacle nails N accommodated in each of the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, it is possible to prevent temperature and humidity changes. Even if the center right front plate 2555 expands or contracts due to such an environmental change, the gap can absorb the change in the positions of the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b and the obstacle nail N due to the expansion or contraction. Therefore, even if the center right front plate 2555 expands or contracts, it is possible to prevent the plurality of obstacle nails N from bending, or the center right front plate 2555 from being damaged by the resistance from the plurality of obstacle nails N. With this, by enlarging the center right front plate 2555, even if the change in the distance from one end to the other end becomes large due to expansion and contraction, the above-described function and effect can be achieved. The plate 2555 can be enlarged, and the plurality of obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 that are planted in a wide range in the game area 5a can be reliably made difficult to bend. Therefore, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to the downstream second big winning opening 2007 with an intended predetermined probability, and entertain the movement of the game ball B by the intended flow of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest and to stably maintain the flow of the game ball B by the specific obstacle nail group 2700, so that the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time. As the large center right front plate 2555, for example, the height is in the range of 1/3 to 3/3 of the height of the game area 5a, and the left and right width is 1/10 to 10/10 of the width of the game area 5a. The range can be mentioned.

Further, in the plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, since there are gaps between the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the game board. At the time of assembling to the above, it is possible to easily insert the front ends of the plurality of implanted nails N into the corresponding first accommodating portion 2555a and second accommodating portion 2555b. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, since the center right front plate seal 2556 that closes the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are attached from the front. The obstacle nail N whose front end is housed cannot be touched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent by the contact of a tool or the like at the time of maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, in this case, when the obstacle nail N whose front end is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b is bent via the center right front plate seal 2556, a trace thereof remains in the center right front plate seal 2556. Therefore, it is possible to make the defect of the obstacle nail N easy to notice.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 are supplied to the lower plate 202 through the ball guide passage 241c of the plate unit base 211, From the right side in the vicinity of the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 211c opening to the front of the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 for supplying the lower bowl 202 with the game balls B that cannot be stored in the upper dish 201 from the rear side. The game ball B enters the storage passage 150e and rolls to the left side surface on the opposite side. On the left side surface on the opposite side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, the ball guiding portion 213 that is inclined so as to move to the other as it goes forward is provided, so the game ball from the ball guiding path 241c. B will roll along the ball guide portion 213, and it becomes easy for the ball to roll along the peripheral edge of the lower plate 202, which is a high portion on the bottom surface of the lower plate 202, so that the game ball B is far from the lower plate ball hole 202a. It is possible to roll to the other part in the left-right direction, and it is possible to prevent the supplied game ball B from reaching the part of the lower dish ball extraction hole 202a immediately. From this, since it is possible to roll the game ball B so as to circulate toward the lowest lower plate ball removal hole 202a in the lower plate 202, evenly in each direction around the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be stored, and the game ball B can be made hard to collect in the vicinity of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e. That is, it is possible to reduce clogging of the vicinity of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e (ball removal guide passage 241c) with the gaming ball B at an early stage when there is room to store the gaming ball B in the lower tray 202. It is possible to store as many game balls B as possible without the player averaging the lower plate 202. Therefore, when the player is in an advantageous game state such as a "big hit" game, frequent guidance for discharging the game ball B in the lower plate 202 to a dollar box or the like is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the left side surface of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is inclined so as to move toward the other as the ball guiding portion 213, the lower tray ball of the storage passage 150e in the lower tray 202 is inclined. Even if a plurality of game balls B are accumulated in front of the supply port 211c, a gap through which the game balls B can flow can be formed between the pool of the game balls B and the ball guide portion 213. The game ball B sent to the lower plate 202 without being fully stored in the upper plate 201 through the gap and the game ball B from the ball guideway 241c can be sent to the left part of the lower plate 202. As many game balls B as possible can be stored in the plate 202.

Further, the center of the lower dish ball supply port 211c opening toward the front of the storage passage 150e is located on the right side of the center of the lower dish ball discharge hole 202a of the lower plate 202. Compared to the case where the center of the outlet of 150e in the left-right direction is aligned with the center of the lower dish ball removal hole 202a (see FIG. 50(b)), the right side of the lower dish ball removal hole 202a in the lower plate 202 is compared. Since it is possible to widen the area, it is possible to increase the number of stored game balls B when the game balls B are stored until the lower plate 202 supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is closed in the lower plate 202. .. Therefore, by combining with the action and effect of the ball guiding unit 213 as described above, it is possible to store as many game balls B as possible without the player evenly arranging the lower plate 202, and as described above. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the effects can be more easily achieved.

By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. 50(b), even if there is a room for storing the game ball B in the lower plate 202, the vicinity of the lower plate ball supply port 211j is clogged with the game ball B. It becomes impossible to supply the game ball B to the plate 202. As a result, although the lower plate 202 still has a margin, the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned on and the payout of the game ball B is stopped. Then, depending on the player, even though the lower plate 202 has a margin, the player may feel distrust as the payout is stopped and the interest may be lowered. Or, even though the lower plate 202 has a margin, if the guide for moving the game ball B to the dollar box by opening the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is executed, it feels annoying and reduces the interest. There is a risk that On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to store as much of the game balls B as possible to the state where the lower plate 202 is close to being full without the player averaging. Therefore, when the lower plate 202 is looked at when the payout is stopped, it can be immediately recognized that the lower plate 202 has no room and is full, and the lower plate is provided without giving the player a feeling of resistance. The ball hole 202a can be opened and moved to the dollar box, and it can be recognized that many game balls B have been paid out, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. .

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B stays in the tank rail 553 of the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 (so-called ball clogging occurs), the tank rail 553. By touching the ball clogged ball B from the outside through any of the plurality of openings 553d penetrating in the bottom part (main guide part 553a), the game ball B is broken and the ball clogging is eliminated. You can Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be easily eliminated, the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the discomfort given to the player due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, since the ball rectifying member 556 that can swing in the vertical direction is provided on the upper portion of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 comes into contact with the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above. When the game balls B are distributed in a state where the game balls B are vertically stacked, the height of the game balls B stacked vertically changes, so that the change in the height causes the ball rectifying member 556 to swing vertically. By swinging the ball rectifying member 556 in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game sphere B which is in contact with the sphere rectifying member 556, and tries to move to the downstream side faster than the lower game sphere B. It is possible to prevent that, and to move downward so as to interrupt the row of the lower game balls B arranged in a line, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from meshing with each other. Further, when the ball rectifying member 556 moves downward, the upper game ball B is hit downward, so the upper game ball B can be collapsed and the game balls B stacked vertically can be destroyed. The occurrence of ball clogging of the game ball B can be suppressed, the interruption of the game due to the ball clogging can be reduced as much as possible, and a decrease in interest due to the interruption of the game can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, by circulating the game ball B in the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 can hit the game ball B from above to below, so that the ball is attached to the game ball B by the hit. It is possible to drop dust and dirt that are present, and to vibrate the tank rail 553 so that dust and dirt in the tank rail 553 can be easily discharged downward from the opening 553d. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dust, dust, and the like in the tank rail 553 as much as possible, so that it is possible to make it difficult to cause ball clogging due to the dust, dust, and the like, and to achieve the same effect as the above. it can.

Further, since at least one of the plurality of openings 553d is provided below the portion where the ball rectifying member 556 is provided, it is caused by dust or dust at the portion of the tank rail 553 below the ball rectifying member 556. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which ball clogging can be less likely to occur and the above-described operational effects can be more easily achieved.

Further, since a plurality of openings 553d having the above-described effects are provided in the direction of guiding the game ball B in the tank rail 553, even if the ball clogging occurs in any part of the tank rail 553. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of eliminating the ball clogging through the opening 553d at the closest position and capable of reliably achieving the above-described operational effects.

Further, since the opening 553d is extended in the guiding direction of the game ball B, the opening of the opening 553d can be made relatively large, and the game ball rolling on the bottom of the tank rail 553. It is possible to easily discharge dust and dirt from B downward. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dust and the like in the tank rail 553 as much as possible, and it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects.

In addition, since the opening 553d is opened downward and rearward, the opening is large enough to prevent the game ball B from passing and to hinder the rolling (circulation), and to be contacted from the outside. The portion 553d can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be easily realized.

Furthermore, since the opening 553d is opened downward and rearward, it is possible to easily visually recognize the game ball B inside through the opening 553d only by looking from the rear without looking through from below. Therefore, even if the tank rail 553 is opaque, it is possible to easily identify the place where the ball clogging occurs, so that the ball clogging can be easily eliminated, and the pachinko machine that reliably exhibits the above-described effects. The machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since at least one opening 553d is provided in a region below the ball rectifying member 556 in the tank rail 553, a plurality of game balls B are filled in the tank rail 553 from the outside. By touching the game ball B so as to press upward through the opening 553d, the ball rectifying member 556 can be pressed upward through the plurality of game balls B. At this time, by confirming the upward movement of the ball flow regulating member 556, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball flow regulating member 556 is in a swingable state. It is possible to reliably exert the effect of aligning the game balls B and suppress ball clogging. In addition, since the state of the ball rectifying member 556 can be easily confirmed through the opening 553d, workability during maintenance can be improved, and the burden on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is reduced. Can be made.

Further, since the transparent protective cover 559 that covers the upper portion of the tank rail 553 in a state in which the ball rectifying member 556 can be swung in the vertical direction is provided, the protective cover 559 allows dust and dirt to enter the tank rail 553 from above. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent dust and the like from entering and can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects.

Further, since the protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 and the tank rail 553 is transparent, the state of the sphere rectifying member 556 can be seen from the outside through the protective cover 559, and the state of the sphere rectifying member 556 can be easily confirmed. can do. Further, since the inside of the tank rail 553 can be seen through the protective cover 559, when the ball clogging occurs, the occurrence location can be easily found. As a result, the labor required for maintenance can be reduced, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, as described above, by hitting the game ball B from the upper side to the lower side by the ball rectifying member 556, it is possible to remove dust and dirt adhering to the game ball B, and the tank is opened by the opening 553d. Since the dust, dust, and the like in the rail 553 can be discharged to the outside, the game ball B with little attachment of dust, dust, etc. can be supplied to the payout device 580, and the dust in the payout device 580 can be supplied. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects caused by dust or the like.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4, the plurality of gaming balls B are provided on the external terminal board 558558 to which the electric wire whose tip coating is removed is connected from the rear side. The stored ball tanks 552 are provided adjacent to each other in the right direction, and a tank rail 553 that guides the game balls B from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580 by aligning them is below and behind the external terminal board 558. A ball rectifying member 556 that extends in the left-right direction at the portion of and is capable of collapsing the game balls B stacked on the upper portion of the tank rail 553 and swinging up and down is provided. Then, the top part 559c that covers a part of the upper part of the tank rail 553 and the upper part of the sphere rectifying member 556 and the guide that can guide the game ball B to the left outside in front of and below the top plate part 559c. A protective cover 559 having a plate portion 559d is provided. Accordingly, since the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 is provided between the top plate portion 559c above the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558 at a position lower than the top plate portion 559c, the external terminal The electric wire that is connected to the board 558 and hangs backward can be bridged like a bridge between the external terminal board 558 and the top board portion 559c, and the game ball B is located below the electric wire at the guide board portion 559d. It is possible to form a gap through which the liquid can flow. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 from the rear hangs down on the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, a game ball is formed in the guide plate portion 559d between the top plate portion 559c and the external terminal plate 558. Since it is possible to secure a clearance in the height direction through which B can flow, the guide plate portion 559d does not obstruct the leftward guidance of the game ball B by the electric wire, and the guide of the protective cover 559 is provided. By the plate portion 559d, the game ball B in the vicinity of the external terminal plate 558 can be guided outward in the left direction away from the external terminal plate 558, and the game ball B is reliably removed from the rear of the external terminal plate 558. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying near the external terminal board 558. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal board 558 comes off due to incomplete insertion of the electric wire into the external terminal board 558 or pulling the electric wire backward for some reason, Since the game ball B with which the tip of the wire comes into contact does not exist near the external terminal board 558, the tip of the wire does not come into contact with the game ball B, and it is possible to avoid a short circuit of the wire. . Then, by avoiding the short circuit of the electric wire, the necessary information can be surely received by the computer in the gaming hall (hall controller), and the occurrence of counting error in the gaming hall can be suppressed. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the ball rectifying member 556 and at least a portion above the tank rail 553 are covered with the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 is externally connected for some reason. Even if it comes off from the terminal plate 558, it is possible to prevent the tip of the electric wire pulled out by the top plate portion 559c from coming into contact with the game ball B in the tank rail 553, and the electric wire due to contact with the game ball B. It is possible to prevent the short circuit of the above and to obtain the same effect as the above.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to avoid a short circuit in the electric wire, it is possible to ensure that the necessary information is received by the hall controller due to the short circuit in the electric wire, and it is possible to prevent an error in counting. Therefore, it is possible to avoid maintenance due to the occurrence of the error, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 guides the game ball B outward in the left direction. Therefore, even if the game ball B flows down onto the protective cover 559 for some reason, the game ball B concerned. Can be dropped to the outside in the left-right direction of the game machine, and the game ball B can be prevented from falling to the rear side of the game machine. Therefore, since the game ball B does not come into contact with the electric wire hanging on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the game ball B is caught by the electric wire hanging on the rear side and stays, or the game ball B is on the electric wire. There is no fear that the electric wire will come off from the external terminal board 558 by abutting, and due to the retention of the game ball B on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 or the electric wire coming off from the external terminal board 558. The occurrence of defects can be reduced.

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in a single stage, but when the stacked game balls B decrease from two stages to one stage, the upper game balls B are When attempting to overtake the lower game balls B, those game balls B may be engaged with each other and become immobile (so-called ball clogging due to ball clogging). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the ball rectifying member 556 is provided on the upper portion of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 comes into contact with the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above. When the game balls B circulate while the game balls B are circulating, the height of the game balls B stacked vertically changes, and the change in the height causes the ball rectifying member 556 to swing vertically. By swinging the ball rectifying member 556 in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B that is in contact with the ball rectifying member 556, and it is possible to prevent the player from overtaking the lower game ball B. It is possible to move the game balls B downward so that they are interrupted behind the lower game balls B arranged in a line, so that the game balls B can be prevented from meshing with each other. Also, when the ball rectifying member 556 moves downward, the upper game ball B is hit downwards, so the upper game ball B can be collapsed and the game balls B stacked vertically can be destroyed. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging of the game ball B, and by the tank rail 553 and the ball rectifying member 556, the game balls B stacked in the ball tank 552 can be aligned and supplied to the payout device, With the payout device 580, the game ball B can be paid out without delay.

Since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the upper side of the ball rectifying member 556, the electric wire hanging from the external terminal plate 558 comes into contact with the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, so that the ball rectifying member 556 is formed. It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556 from being unable to swing in the vertical direction due to the contact of the electric wire. Therefore, even if an electric wire hangs above the ball rectifying member 556 from the external terminal plate 558, the ball rectifying member 556 can be swung in the vertical direction by being protected by the protective cover 559, so that the ball rectifying member 556 is shaken. The game balls B piled up by the movement can be surely collapsed, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the upper side of the sphere rectifying member 556, even if the game ball B flows down toward the sphere rectifying member 556 for some reason, the top plate portion of the protective cover 559 is formed. It is possible to guide and eliminate the game ball B in the direction away from the external terminal board 558 before contacting the ball rectifying member 556 by the 559c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from resting on the ball rectifying member 556 from being able to swing in the vertical direction, causing the ball rectifying member 556 to collapse the stacked game balls B to prevent ball clogging. Occurrence can be prevented.

Further, since the tank rail 553 is extended in the left-right direction so as to pass behind the external terminal board 558, the volume of the tank rail 553 can be increased, and together with the ball tank 552, the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to increase the storage amount of the game balls B for paying out in as much as possible. Therefore, when the player is in an advantageous game state in which a large number of game balls B are paid out, such as a “big hit” game, the game balls B to be paid out are lost (so-called, balls are out), and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the game from being given, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a box-shaped back box having an opening 3010a penetrating in the front and back is provided behind the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided in the front. 3000 is provided, at the position of the opening 3010a of the back box 3000, a performance display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is detachably attached to the back box 3010 directly when the size is the same as the opening 3010a, When it is smaller than the opening 3010a, it is detachably attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650. Therefore, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, the back is inserted via the set plate 1650. The effect display device 1600 can be attached to the box 3010. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the opening portion 3010a of the back box 3010 has a size to which a production display device having a size of 19 inches can be attached, and the setting plate 1650 having a size of 19 inches corresponding to the opening portion 3010a has a size of 15 inches. After the effect display device 1600 is attached, the set plate 1650 is fitted into the opening 3010a and attached to the back box 3010. As a result, the 15-inch effect display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650.

Therefore, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is changed by changing the model or the design, the effect display device 1600 is attached by the set plate 1650 that matches the size of the effect display device 1600 without changing the back box 3010. Therefore, the back box 3010 can be used as it is, and an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to provide the effect display device 1600 having a size different from the conventional one while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the size of the effect display device 1600 is different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to easily make the pachinko machine 1 having a different appearance to attract the player's interest, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player.

In addition, since the back box 3010 has a box shape and the strength and rigidity of the back box 3010 are high, even if a large (heavy) effect display device 1600 is attached, it can be sufficiently supported, and therefore, the effect display device. The opening 3010a to which 1600 is attached can be made as large as possible, and the largest (here, 19 inch) effect display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 (pachinko machine). .. Further, due to a model change or a design change, in the front of the effect display device 1600, as various ornaments and effect devices, a back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, a back top front effect unit 3300, a back bottom front effect unit 3400, and a back rear effect unit. When the range visible from the front is changed by providing 3500 and the back lower rear effect unit 3600, the effect display device 1600 (here, 15 inches) having the optimum size for the range is set on the set board 1650. It can be attached to the back box 3010 via the. Therefore, by using the set plate 1650, the effect display devices 1600 of various sizes can be attached, and thus it is possible to prevent the large effect display device 1600 from being unnecessarily provided to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650 arranged in the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, the position of the effect display device 1600 relative to the back box 3010 is changed due to design changes or the like. When changing, the position of the effect display device 1600 can be changed only by changing the set plate 1650 without changing the back box 3010, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. The effect display device 1600 can be provided in a more effective position, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, the effect display device 1600 and the opening 3010a are not provided. The space between them can be closed by a set plate 1650. Therefore, in the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, dust, dust, game balls B, etc. enter the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the effect display device 1600 and the opening 3010a. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles that cause the interruption of the game, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being deteriorated due to the interruption of the game, which can be enjoyed by the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the set plate 1650 for attaching the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010 is made transparent and flat, when the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, the effect display device is displayed. Through the space between 1600 and the opening 3010a, it is possible to visually recognize the front side to the rear side or the rear side to the front side. Therefore, it is possible to check the inside from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed from the inside of the pachinko machine 1, and it is easy to carry out maintenance work. By doing so, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, since the set plate 1650 is flat, it is possible to reduce the occupancy of the space in the front-rear direction by the set plate 1650. It is possible to easily secure a space for arranging, and a back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, a back front front production unit 3300, and a back bottom front as a decorative body or a production device capable of expecting a higher effect. It is possible to provide the effect unit 3400, the back-up rear effect unit 3500, and the back-under effect unit 3600, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player.

Further, since the back box 3010 is provided behind the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a is provided in the front, the effect display device attached to the back box 3010 through the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. The effect image by 1600 can be visually recognized, and the player can entertain the effect image. Further, since the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a feeling similar to that of the conventional pachinko machine in which the effect image can be seen in the game area 5a, the player familiar with the conventional pachinko machine can be given a sense of security by appearance. It is possible to facilitate selection of the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

In addition, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back front production unit 3300, the back front production unit 3400, the back production unit 3500, and the back production unit 3600, which are arranged inside the back box 3010, are used as pachinko machines. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can easily attract the player's attention can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player can be provided. Further, by the production by the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back front production unit 3300, the back front production unit 3400, the back production unit 3500, and the back production unit 3600, which are arranged inside the back box 3010. , Which is capable of entertaining the player, and is also produced by the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back front production unit 3300, the back front production unit 3400, the back production unit 3500, and the back production unit 3600, By appropriately combining with the effect image of the effect display device 1600, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the back box 3010, when the effect display device 1600 fails, the effect display device 1600 can be easily detached from the back box 3010, which is troublesome for maintenance. It is possible to reduce the load on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game area 5a of the game board 5A in which the game is performed by the game ball B, the game is provided in the left and right direction in the ball guiding unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500. Depending on the progress of the game (the lottery result of the special symbol that has been drawn) on the downstream side of the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b, and the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b in which the ball B can flow. The second big winning opening 2007, which allows the game ball B to be accepted, is provided. Therefore, when the second big winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable according to the lottery result of the special symbols drawn, the second In order to receive the game ball B in the special winning opening 2007, the player hits the game ball B into the game area 5a so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b. The game ball B can be driven into the first guidance passage 2580a and the second guidance passage 2580b at the entrance (“right hit”), and within the game area 5a. It is possible to make the player feel excited and excitement depending on whether or not the driven game ball B is guided by the desired first guide passage 2580a that is easily received in the second winning hole 2007, and the player's expectation. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest by increasing the interest rate. In addition, at the timing when the second special winning opening 2007 can be accepted, the player is made so that the game ball B passing through the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b reaches the second special winning opening 2007. It is possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by prompting the game ball B to be driven, and to entertain the game ball B to suppress a decrease in interest.

Then, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b, a plurality of them are provided in the vertical direction by alternately changing the inclined sides such that one side in the front-rear direction is lowered. By the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 or the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 and the standing wall portion 2581c and the standing wall portion 2582d that extend upward from the lower ends of the inclined portions 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c, the game ball B is guided downward in the zigzag shape in the front-rear direction, and the first protruding portion 2581e, the first protruding portion 2582b, and the first protruding portion 2582b protruding from the side wall portion 2581a and the side wall portion 2582a above each of the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. The side wall portion 2581a is located between the second protrusion 2582f and the second protrusion 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583, the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. The game ball B is meandered in the left-right direction by the first projecting piece 2581f and the second projecting piece 2582g protruding from the side wall 2582a. As a result, the game ball B is guided downward while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in a visually recognizable state. Can be shown, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest.

At this time, the game ball B is moved from the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c to the left and right by the side wall portion 2581a, the side wall portion 2582a, and the side wall portion 2583a provided on both the left and right sides of the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. The vertical wall 2581c and the vertical wall 2582d extending upward from the upper ends of the lower sloped portion 2581b and the lower sloped portion 2582c can be regulated by the upper sloped portion 2581b and the lower sloped portion 2582c. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball B moving to the portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c from falling out in the front-rear direction, guide the game ball B along the plurality of inclined portions 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. Therefore, it is possible to surely obtain the above-described effects.

Since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b have a plurality of inclined portions 2581b and inclined portions 2582c that are inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is low, the inclined portions 2581b and inclined portions 2581b and 2580b are included. When the game ball B guided in 2582c is viewed from the front, the flow speed is slower than the free flow, and the position of the game ball B in the front-back direction is unclear. It becomes possible to make the game ball B slowly flow down against gravity, and it is possible to show the player the movement of the game ball B, which could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

In this way, the game ball B can be guided downward through the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b while rocking the game ball B in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, so that the game ball B can be freely flowed down. Then, the flow-down speed of the game ball B can be relatively slowed (delayed). As a result, the staying time of the game ball B in the game area 5a can be lengthened, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B for a long time, and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

By the way, if the game ball B is made to flow down spirally as a guide passage, the game ball B flowing down spirally passes through the foremost part of the spiral many times, so the flow-down speed of the game ball B It is easy to set the timing for Therefore, at the time of a “small hit” or the like, it becomes possible to relatively easily allow the game ball B to be received in the second big winning opening 2007 on the downstream side. Therefore, depending on the driving operation of the game ball B depending on the player. I got tired of it at an early stage, and there was a risk that my interest would decline. On the other hand, in the ball guide unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is guided by the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b, in the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b. Since the circulation speed is suppressed by swinging the game ball B in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, the game ball B is delayed to the second big winning opening 2007 on the downstream side as compared with the other regions in the game region 5a. As a result, the timing of driving the game ball B aiming at the second big winning opening 2007 can be made difficult, and difficulty can be given to the driving operation. As a result, the player can be motivated to perform the driving operation, the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and the game ball B is accepted in the second winning hole 2007. It is possible to give a feeling, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second special winning opening 2007 by the first guiding passage 2580a and the second guiding passage 2580b, the second big winning opening 2007 is entered. It is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B. As a result, it is difficult to receive the game ball B into the second special winning opening 2007 through the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b, so that a predetermined number of game balls are received by receiving the game ball B into the second special winning opening 2007. It is possible to reduce the chances of B being paid out, and suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, when the game ball B is clogged in the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b (when a ball clogging occurs), the inclined portion 2581b and the top wall portion 2581d of the left passage member 2581 as the communication portion are connected to each other. The clogging is easily eliminated by inserting a thin rod-shaped member from the outside through the gap between the two, the gap between the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 and the top wall portion 2582e, and thrusting the game ball B. You can Therefore, even if a ball clogging occurs in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b during the game, it can be eliminated early, so that the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

Since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b are provided in the left-right direction, the player can see the game ball B guided in each of the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player hits the game ball B into the game area 5a to play a game, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a The game ball B will flow down while making various movements, and the game ball B that has flowed down to the downstream end in the game area 5a is discharged from the out port 1008. In this game area 5a, the progress of the game (lottery result of the first special symbol or lottery result of the second special symbol which is lottered by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005) Since the second special winning opening 2007 that opens and closes according to the above is provided, when the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2007 when the second special winning opening 2007 can receive the game ball B. , The game ball B will be distributed through the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2561. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted also in this pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B will flow down while moving in various ways by these obstacle nails N, up to the downstream end in the pseudo game area 2010. The game ball B that has flowed down is discharged from the pseudo outlet 2404 adjacent to the outlet 1008. Since the pseudo game area 2010 is provided with a pseudo special winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second special winning opening 2007, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 receives the game ball B as the game progresses. It becomes possible and the game ball B received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2561.

As a result, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are respectively implanted in the game area 5a and the pseudo game area 2010, the game balls B flow down in a complicated motion due to the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired. Further, since the out-port 1008 of the game area 5a and the pseudo-out port 2404 of the pseudo-gaming area 2010 are adjacent to each other, the player is illusion that the pseudo-gaming area 2010 is a part of the gaming area 5a. Can be made Furthermore, since the second big winning opening door 2562 of the second big winning opening 2007 is to be moved in the front-rear direction, the presence of the second big winning opening door 2562 can be seen when seen from the front (player). The pseudo special winning opening 2402 (pseudo special winning opening door 2405), which can be made difficult and can be opened and closed relatively, can be made to stand out and stand out. Since the opening of this pseudo special winning opening 2402 is made larger than the second special winning opening 2007, the illusion that the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 will flow through the game area 5a again. At the same time, the game area 5a can be made to give an illusion that there is a huge winning hole that has never been seen on a pachinko machine so far, which can have a strong impact on the player. The player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pseudo game area 2010 can be strongly attracted to the player regardless of the presence or absence of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, and the appeal power to the player can be obtained. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high price.

Further, since the opening of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is made larger than the second special winning opening 2007, when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is ready to receive the game ball B, many game balls B can be played in a short time. It becomes possible for the player to instantly recognize that the game can be accepted, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can be strongly attracted to the player, and the game ball B to the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can be obtained. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for acceptance of the game and suppress a decrease in interest, and the pseudo special winning opening 2402 provided in the pseudo game area 2010 is a real big prize provided in the game area 5a. It can make the player think of it as a mouth. In addition, since the game ball B is received by the pseudo special winning opening 2402 which is normally closed to the player, a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of the game ball B, the player becomes advantageous to the player). It is possible to strongly think that the advantageous game state is generated, etc., and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game.

Therefore, when the second special winning opening 2007 and the pseudo special winning opening 2402 are opened according to the progress of the game and the game ball B is ready to be received, the second big winning opening 2007 is presented to the player. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a aiming at, and the player can be entertained. Then, when the game ball B is received in the opened second big winning opening 2007 and supplied into the pseudo game region 2010, the game ball B is caused by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game region 2010. Can flow down while making various movements and entertain the movement of the game ball B, and can make the player feel excitement depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, when the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is opened according to the progress of the game and the game ball B can be accepted, it is possible to make the player think that an opportunity has come, and the pseudo special winning opening 2402 (second It is possible to enter the game ball B aiming at the two big winning holes 2007) and entertain the player by receiving a large number of game balls B in the pseudo special winning hole 2402. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the player's game.

Further, since the opening of the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is made larger than the second special winning opening 2007, the player is provided with a huge special winning opening that has never been seen by a pachinko machine until now. The pachinko machine 1 can be misidentified as if it were present, and the player can be strongly impacted and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player. Then, when the second special winning opening 2007 is opened/closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern by the "big hit" and the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is opened/closed, the second big winning opening is given to the player due to the opportunity. It is possible to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the 2007 (pseudo big winning opening 2402), which can entertain the player greatly and suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, since the game ball B circulating in the pseudo game area 2010 is the one that has been accepted by the second big winning opening 2007 and finished the game (so-called dead ball that does not affect the game), Even if the game is accepted into the pseudo-winning prize hole 2402, the player is not provided with a privilege such as the payout of the game ball B, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is suppressed. You can Further, since the payout is made to all the game balls B received in the second special winning opening 2007, the payout is made to the player by receiving the game balls B in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. It is possible to illusion that the game ball B is received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. Further, since the payouts are made to all the game balls B received in the second special winning opening 2007, the game balls B not received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402 on the downstream side of the second special winning opening 2007. Since the payout is also made to the player, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the number of the game balls B to be paid out is larger than the number of the game balls B received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel good and entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed so that the game ball B can be received, as a "big hit" or as a notice that the player is in an advantageous gaming state. As a result, the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can be opened and closed with a flicker to indicate to the player that a chance has come, and the player's expectation for the game can be increased and the decline in interest can be suppressed. it can. As this notice, for example, the degree of expectation of an advantageous game state can be suggested by the opening/closing speed of the pseudo special winning opening 2402, the number of times of opening and closing, and the like. Alternatively, by opening and closing the pseudo-winning prize hole 2402 with a rhythm like 33-three beats or a music rhythm according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, a high or low level of expectation or a gaming state after a “big hit” (for example, , Time-saving state, probable variation state, etc. can also be suggested. As described above, by opening and closing the pseudo special winning opening 2402, various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

Further, in a normal state, the second special winning opening 2007 is closed to make it impossible to receive the game ball B. Therefore, even if the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is opened, a pseudo special winning opening 2402 is provided. Since the game ball B cannot be circulated in the game area 2010, a premium feeling can be given to the distribution of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, and the second big winning hole according to the progress of the game. The expectation of the player can be increased so that 2007 can be accepted.

Further, since the game ball B supplied from the second special winning opening 2007 to the pseudo game area 2010 is discharged from the pseudo outlet 2404 without returning to the game area 5a, the pseudo game area 2010 is a game. Since the player can strongly think that it is a special area (premium area) independent of the area 5a, he strongly requests the player to distribute the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010. When the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is opened and closed according to the progress of the game, the game ball B is positively aimed at the second big winning opening 2007 in order to distribute the game ball B in the pseudo gaming area 2010. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player and entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 and supplied into the pseudo gaming area 2010 is not received in the pseudo special winning opening 2402, the pseudo out opening at the downstream end in the pseudo gaming area 2010 Since it is discharged from 2404, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo out port 2404 is the same as the out port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the game ball B to the 2402 in the same manner as the openable second special winning opening 2007 provided in the game area 5a without causing any discomfort, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the pseudo out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B which is not received in the pseudo special winning port 2402 is provided adjacent to the out port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the game area 5a, It is possible to make it appear that the game ball B, which has been supplied from the two major winning openings 2007 to the pseudo gaming area 2010 and has not been received by the pseudo major winning opening 2402, has been discharged from the out opening 1008.

Furthermore, since the game ball B (so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2561 and having finished the game is supplied to the pseudo game region 2010, the pseudo game is provided. In the area 2010, the game ball B that does not affect the game is used for the effect. Therefore, as compared with, for example, a production device in which a pseudo game ball similar to the game ball B is enclosed, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for circulating the pseudo game ball for production, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

Moreover, since the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo special winning opening 2402 can be detected by the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403, a predetermined effect can be executed by the detection of the game ball B, and the player can be more effective. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be entertained and can suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the pseudo special winning opening sensor 2403 is made visible to the player, the game ball B (so-called dead ball that has no influence on the game) circulates in the pseudo game area 2010. Even if it does so, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the pseudo special winning opening 2402 is a real big winning opening, and thus the game ball to the pseudo special winning opening 2402 which is opened and closed according to the progress of the game. It is possible to strongly desire the acceptance of B, and it is possible to entertain the game ball B aiming at the second big winning opening 2007 (pseudo big winning opening 2402) and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine as the gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and a game that is a pachi-slot machine or a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine. It may be applied to a machine, and even in this case, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained. Further, the present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which a player does not touch the game ball B or a game machine called a management game machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the one in which the effect display device 1600 is attached to the center of the set plate 1650 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect is provided at an eccentric position with respect to the center of the set plate 1650. The display device 1600 may be attached. Also, although one effect display device 1600 is attached to the set plate 1650, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effect display devices may be attached to the set plate 1650.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component member 1100 Game panel 2000 Table unit 2500 Center accessory 2555 Center right front plate (holding plate)
2555a First storage unit (storage unit)
2555b Second storage unit (storage unit)
2555c Peeling hole 2555d Front of ridge (projection)
2700 Specific obstacle nail group 2701 Braided nail portion 2710 Guide area 2711 First guide area 2712 Second guide area N Obstacle nail

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a gaming board in which a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a gaming area in which a game is played,
A transparent flat plate-shaped holding plate provided with a plurality of accommodating portions capable of accommodating the front end of the obstacle nail with a gap,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

Images